3 1822 00167 0280
 
 NIVERSITY OF CAL FORNIA SAN DIEC, 
 
 3 1822 00167 0280
 
 Church Missionary 
 Society Library, 
 ISrj Waterloo Road,
 
 C.M.S. LlBRARX 
 
 A 
 
 BENGALI LANGUAGE: 
 
 TO wnicn is ADDED 
 
 A SELECTION OF EASY PHRASES 
 
 AND 
 
 USEFUL DIALOGUES. 
 
 BY 
 
 DUNCAN FORBES, LLD,, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES IN KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON ; 
 
 MEMDF.K OF THK KOYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY OF CHEAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND; 
 
 AND AUT1IOU OP BKVliRAL WORKS ON T1IE UINUL'STANI AND PEUSIAN LANUUAGKS. 
 
 LONDON 
 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOI) AND SOX 
 
 7, STA riONERS' HALL COURT, Ll'DCiATK HII.L, B.C. 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, SAN 
 IA JOLLA, CALIFORNIA
 
 
 London: W.. IT. A llm, & Co., Printers, 13, Waterloo Plnrv, Tall Mall. 8.W. L.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THE Bengali is the vernacular language of thirty 
 millions of British subjects inhabiting the fertile and com- 
 pact province of Bengal proper. This province extends 
 from the Bay of Bengal on the south, to the mountains 
 of Bootan on the north, a breadth of some 350 miles; 
 and its extreme length from Eamgur on the west, to 
 Arakan on the east, is about 400 miles. Its soil is one 
 of the richest in the world, having been fertilised for 
 countless ages by the annual inundation of the Ganges 
 and Barhamputra with their numerous tributaries and 
 branches ; hence it is admirably adapted for the cultiva- 
 tion of indigo, rice, sugar, and cotton. 
 
 The Bengali holds the second rank, in point of im- 
 portance, amidst all the languages of India ; the first 
 rank being universally conceded to the Hindustani, which,
 
 IV PREFACE. 
 
 under one or other dialectic form, is spoken by at least 
 fifty millions of people. A young man who has acquired 
 a fair knowledge of these two languages and the task is 
 not difficult is qualified to fill any situation civil, mili- 
 tary, medical, clerical, or mercantile, etc., throughout the 
 vast region extending from the mouths of the Ganges to 
 the mountains of Kashmir; and from the Indus to the 
 Himalayas. Such then being the case, I think the 
 reader will feel grateful to me for reproducing the follow- 
 ing very sensible remarks on the subject matter from the 
 Preface to Dr. Carey's Bengali Grammar, a work now 
 exceedingly scarce, if not unprocurable : 
 
 " The pleasure which a person feels in being able to converse upon 
 any subject with those who have occasion to visit him, is very great. 
 Many of the natives of this country [Bengal], who are conversant with 
 Europeans, are men of great respectability, well informed upon a variety 
 of subjects, both commercial and literary, and able to mix in conversation 
 with pleasure and advantage. Indeed, husbandmen, labourers, and 
 people in the lowest stations, are often able to give that information 
 on local affairs which every friend of science would be proud to obtain. 
 The pleasure and advantage, therefore, of free conversation with all classes 
 of people, will amply repay any person for the labour of acquiring the 
 language. 
 
 " .An ability to transact business, and inspect all the minutiae of mer- 
 cantile concerns, without the intervention of an interpreter, must be an 
 object of importance to every one engaged in such undertakings ; and in 
 the important concerns of administering justice, collecting the revenues, 
 and preventing impositions and misunderstandings in all the common 
 afi'uirs of life, the disadvantages to which every one is subject who is
 
 PREFACE. V 
 
 ignorant of the language, not only plead in favour of the study thereof, 
 but strongly mark the necessity of acquiring it. 
 
 " A benevolent man feels much pleasure in making enquiries into, and 
 relieving the distresses, of others. But in a foreign country he must be 
 Tinable to do this, to his own satisfaction, so long as he is unacquainted 
 with the current language of the country ; for should he attempt to do it 
 through the medium of servants, he would not only be liable to in- 
 numerable impositions, but his kind intentions must be frequently ren- 
 dered abortive by the ignorance or inattention of those to whom the 
 management thereof is committed. 
 
 " The advantages of being able to communicate useful knowledge to the 
 heathens, with whom we have a daily intercourse ; to point out their 
 mistakes ; and to impress upon them sentiments of morality and religion, 
 are confessedly very important. Indeed, the high gratification which 
 must arise from an ability to contribute in any degree to the happiness 
 of a body of people supposed to be equal to the whole population of Great 
 Britain and Ireland, can scarcely fail of recommending the more general 
 study of the Bengali language. 
 
 "It has been supposed by some, that a knowledge of the Hindustani 
 language is sufficient for every purpose of business in any part of India. 
 This idea is very far from correct ; for though it be admitted, that persons 
 may be found in every part of India who speak that language, yet Hin- 
 dustani is almost as much a foreign language, in all the countries of India, 
 except those to the north-west of Bengal, which may be called Hindustan 
 proper, as the French is in the .other countries of Europe. In all the 
 courts of justice in Bengal, and most probably in every other part of 
 India, the poor usually give their evidence in the dialect of that par- 
 ticular country, and seldom understand any other; which is also usually 
 thc case with the litigating parties. 
 
 " In Bengal all bonds, leases, and other agreements, or instruments, are 
 generally written in the current language ; and the greater part of those 
 persons with whom a European is concerned, especially in the collection 
 of the revenue, and in commercial undertakings, speak no other: to this 
 may be added, that, with a few exceptions, those who have a smattering 
 of Hindustani, speak it too imperfectly to express their sentiments with 
 precision.
 
 VI PREFACE. 
 
 "The Bengali may be considered as more nearly allied to the Sanskrit 
 than any of the other languages of India ; for though it contains many 
 words of Persian and Arabic origin, yet four-fifths of tho words in the 
 language are pure Sanskrit. "Words may be compounded with such 
 facility, and to so great an extent in Bengali, as to convey ideas with the 
 utmost precision, a circumstance which adds much to its copiousness. On 
 these, and many other accounts, it may be esteemed one of the most 
 expressive and elegant languages of the East." 
 
 Forty years ago, a Bengali Professorship was estab- 
 lished at Haileybury College for the benefit of young 
 Civilians destined for the Bengal Presidency. Some fif- 
 teen years later, Professor WILSOX, tho Oriental Examiner, 
 substituted Sanskrit for the Bengali a measure, the wis- 
 dom of which I never could perceive : hence, for the last 
 quarter of a century, seldom, if ever, has a single Bengali 
 book been written, printed, or read in any part of Europe. 
 It naturally followed, then, that works of this description 
 gradually vanished from the market ; so much so that it 
 was with great difficulty that two pupils of mine last 
 autumn were able to procure a copy of ITaughton's "Ben- 
 gali Grammar," which, though very defective, is still the 
 best adapted for beginners of any that we possess. 
 
 Under these circumstances, I was induced by the pub- 
 lishers, at the commencement of this year, to compile a 
 new Grammar of the Bengali language. The result is 
 the following work, which is now submitted to the ap-
 
 PUKFACK. Vll 
 
 proval of the public. I have used every exertion to 
 render it at once the simplest, the plainest, and the most 
 copious work of the kind as yet in existence. I have 
 freely availed myself of whatever I found useful and 
 satisfactory in the Grammars of HALIIED, CAREY, I!AUGH- 
 TON, YATES, and that of the anonymous Pandit alluded to 
 in 21, a. I have in many instances ventured to differ 
 from these gentlemen; and have endeavoured to rectify 
 what I have considered to be erroneous or defective on 
 their part. 
 
 In the arrangement of the various materials, I have 
 followed the plan adopted in my Grammars of the Persian 
 and Hindustani languages, works which, judging by their 
 sale, appear to have given general satisfaction. This will 
 appear at once by looking at their respective tables of 
 contents. The plan is simple enough it consists merely 
 in discussing plainly and concisely every part of the sub- 
 ject at the right time and place. In works of this kind 
 methodical arrangement is a matter of far greater im- 
 portance in aiding the student's memory than writers 
 seem to have generally taken into consideration. Every 
 individual paragraph ought to serve the learner as a. 
 stepping-stone to that which immediately follows. 
 
 I feel pleasure in here acknowledging my debt ut
 
 Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 gratitude to FKAXCIS JOHXSON, Esq., formerly Professor of 
 Sanskrit, Bengali, and Telugu at Haileybury College. 
 That gentleman in the kindest manner volunteered to 
 peruse and correct every one of the proof-sheets as they 
 passed through the press ; and to his industry and 
 thorough competency for the task, I have no hesitation 
 in saying that this work is mainly indebted for its 
 accuracy on the score of style, and its comparative free- 
 dom from any serious typographical errors. 
 
 Along with this Grammar the student should procure 
 Ilaughton's " Bengali Selections ;" and by means of these 
 two works alone he will attain to a fair knowledge of the 
 language. Let him then procure Ilaughton's "Bengali 
 and Sanskrit Dictionary," which valuable work is now 
 selling by the publishers at the very reasonable rate of 
 thirty shillings per copy, handsomely bound, instead of 
 seven guineas, the original published price. By the aid 
 of Ilaughton's "Dictionary," the student may advanta- 
 geously peruse any or all of the following works, viz., 
 " Tota-Itihfis," "Krishna Chandra," "Batris Singlifisan," 
 and "Purush-Paiikliya." Of these, the "Krishna Chan- 
 dra" and " Purush-Paiikhya " are the most important, 
 as they arc both used as text-books for the Bengali 
 examination in India.
 
 rilEFACE. IX 
 
 I had formed some intention of adding a Section on 
 Bengali Prosody, similar to what I have given in my 
 Persian Grammar; but on further consideration I came 
 to the conclusion that the subject would be of very 
 little utility to the student. The Muses, when fright- 
 ened by ruthless barbarians from Greece and Kome, 
 sought and found shelter among the Arabs and Per- 
 sians ; but, in modern Bengal, they have not, as yet, 
 had sufficient time to become domesticated ; and until 
 this wished-for consummation takes place we may very 
 venially postpone our chapter on Bengali Prosody. 
 
 I have added, at the end of the work, three Appen- 
 dices, all of which will be found of great practical 
 utility. Appendix A. gives an account of the peculiari- 
 ties of the Bengali language as spoken by the un- 
 educated portion of the people. It is not sufficient 
 for the British resident in Bengal to be able merely 
 to speak the language, fluently and grammatically, 
 himself; he ought to be able, at the same time, to 
 understand the numerous grades of people who speak 
 the language fluently, but not grammatically. Of Appen- 
 dices B. and C. it is needless for nic to oifer any re- 
 marks, they speak for themselves. 
 
 In order that nothing might be wanting to render this
 
 X PREFACE. 
 
 work as complete as possible, the publishers have caused 
 to be re-engraved, at considerable expense, the four 
 beautiful plates of Bengali writing formerly appended 
 to Haughton's Grammar. These will enable the stu- 
 dent to attain an accurate style of writing from the 
 outset. Let him carefully copy the single letters as 
 given in Plate I. ; then let him read on to page 15, 
 and endeavour to restore correctly the list of words 
 there given in the Eoman character into the original ; 
 having recourse to Plates II., III., and IV., for such 
 compound consonants as may occur. 
 
 D. FOKBES. 
 
 58, IJUHTON CRESCENT^ 
 JULY, 1SG1.
 
 C O N T E N T S. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 PAOB 
 
 ON THE ALPHABET 1 
 
 Articulate Sounds of the Letters 3 
 
 Compound Letters 7 
 
 General Kcmarks on the Sounds of the Consonants 10 
 
 Of words whose Finals are open 12 
 
 Praxis for Heading and Writing 15 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE 17 
 
 OF SUBSTANTIVES 18 
 
 Of Gender ib. 
 
 Of Number 19 
 
 Of Case 20 
 
 Of Declension 21 
 
 REMARKS ON THE CASES 25 
 
 Of the Nominative Case ib. 
 
 Of the Accusative Case 20 
 
 Of the Instrumental Case ib. 
 
 Of the Dative Case 27 
 
 Of the Ablative Case .. ib.
 
 Xll CONTEXTS. 
 
 Of the Genitive Case 23 
 
 Of tho Locative Case 29 
 
 Of the Vocative Case ib. 
 
 OF ADJECTIVES 30 
 
 Of Number and Case ib. 
 
 Of Gender ib. 
 
 Of Comparison 31 
 
 OF PEOXOFXS ib. 
 
 Of Gender 32 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns ib. 
 
 Of Personals of Inferiority 33 
 
 Of Pronouns of the Third Person 34 
 
 Of the Pronoun Remote ib. 
 
 Of the Pronoun Proximate 3-5 
 
 Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 36 
 
 Of the Reciprocal, or Reflective Pronoun 37 
 
 Of the Pronoun upani, "self," "your honour," etc 38 
 
 Of the Relative 39 
 
 Of the Interrogatives 40 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 OP THE VEEB 41 
 
 Of Conjugation 43 
 
 Of the Auxiliary Verb ha-ite, "to be" 46 
 
 Of Causal Verbs 43 
 
 A List of Verbal Roots 50 
 
 Of Irregular Verbs 5.'3 
 
 Of the Passive Voice .01 
 
 A List of Past and Passive Participles 5 <> 
 
 Of Impersonal Verbs 58 
 
 Of the Negative Verb 61 
 
 Of the Deft-etive Auxiliary uclJ/i ^
 
 CONTENTS. Xllt 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 FAOB 
 
 OF PARTICLES AND NUMERALS 64 
 
 Of A dvcrbs ib. 
 
 Of Prepositions 70 
 
 Of Diptotcs or Postpositions 76 
 
 Of Conj unctions 78 
 
 f Interjections 80 
 
 Of Expletive Particles 81 
 
 Of Numerals 82 
 
 Of Collective Numbers 88 
 
 Of Fractional Numbers 89 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 OP THE JUNCTION OF LETTEES, AND THE DERIVATION AND COMPO- 
 SITION OF WORDS 90 
 
 Of the Junction of Vowels ib. 
 
 Of the Junction of similar Vowels 91 
 
 Of the Junction of dissimilar Vowels ib. 
 
 Examples of the Changes of the Vowels to their Semi- Vowels 
 
 before dissimilar Vowels 92 
 
 Of the Changes of the Diphthongs to their Semi- Vowels before 
 
 dissimilar Vowels i. 
 
 Of the Formation of Diphthongs 93 
 
 Of the Junction of Consonants ib. 
 
 Classification of the Consonants ib. 
 
 General Ptules respecting their Junction and Permutation 94 
 
 Of AnuswdraJi and Visargah 98 
 
 OF THE DERIVATION OF WORDS 10(1 
 
 Of the use of the terms Guna and Vriddhi ib. 
 
 Of Substantives tb. 
 
 Of Derivative Adjectives 105 
 
 Of Derivative Verbs . 114
 
 XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 OK THE COMPOSITION OF WORDS 115 
 
 Of the First Class, or W^ ^WfT 110 
 
 Of the Second Class, or ^JT*rlTP >l*Jl>i 117 
 
 Of the Third Class, or f^$ TRtJT ib. 
 
 Of the Fourth Class, or ^<5ftW ?Wt*r 118 
 
 Of the Fifth Class, or 4^4)^ 7RT?T ib. 
 
 Of the Sixth Class, or ^Rjft^T^ ^TT^ 121 
 
 Of Compound Verbs ib. 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 SYNTAX, on THE CONSTRUCTION OP SENTENCES 125 
 
 Concord of Substantives, Adjectives, and Pronouns 127 
 
 Concord of Verbs 131 
 
 Use and Application of the Tenses 132 
 
 Of the Indefinite Tense ib. 
 
 Of the Present Definite 133 
 
 Of the Past Indefinite Tense ib. 
 
 Of the Imperfect Tense ib. 
 
 Of the Perfect Tense ib. 
 
 Of the Pluperfect Tense 134 
 
 Of the Future Tense ib. 
 
 Of the Conditional Tense 135 
 
 Of the Imperative ilood ib. 
 
 Use and Application of the Verbal Nouns 137 
 
 Use and Application of the Present Participle 138 
 
 Of the Past Conjunctive Participle 139 
 
 Of the Adverbial Participle MO 
 
 Of the Adjectival Participle 142 
 
 Government of Substantives and Adjectives ib. 
 
 Government of Verbs 1-15 
 
 Application and Use of Adverbs, Postpositions, Conjunctions, 
 
 and Interjections 1 ,3 1 
 
 Of lif.i-uli Style i.oo
 
 CONTENTS. X V 
 
 APPENDIX A. 
 
 PA<;R 
 
 CONTAIN i xo A CONCISK ACCOUNT OF THE VULGAR on SPOKEN 
 BENGAL?, WITH RULES FOR FAMILIAR OH COMMON CONVKU- 
 SATION 159 170 
 
 APPENDIX E. 
 
 ON THE DIVISIONS OF MONEY WEIGHTS AND MEASURES DAYS OF 
 THE WEEK MONTHS OF THE YEAR HINDU ERAS CON- 
 TRACTIONS OF WORDS 171 170 
 
 Of the Divisions of Money 171 
 
 Of Weights 172 
 
 Of Dry Measure ib. 
 
 Of Long Measure ib. 
 
 Of Measures of Time 173 
 
 Of the Days of the Week ib. 
 
 Of the Names of the Months 17-1 
 
 Of the Contractions of Current Words 17") 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 CONSISTING OF EASY PHRASES AND USEFUL DIALOGUES ON FAMILIAR 
 
 SUBJECTS .. . 177232
 
 EEEATA. 
 
 PAOK LINE 
 
 3 25 
 
 5 prachur 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 19 
 
 32 24 17, a. 
 
 37 31 *f*f 
 53 7 ^ 
 
 57 26 $% 
 
 59 14 
 
 61 13 
 
 73 24 
 
 74 4 
 
 ,, 6 privitivum, 
 
 prachur. 
 
 19, a. 
 
 privativum. 
 
 PAGE LINK FOn 
 
 74 22 
 
 75 6 
 
 76 23 *TZ 
 31 
 
 83 9 
 12 
 
 22 
 
 84 24, etc. 
 104 31 
 
 111 15 
 144 24 
 
 183 13 ^ ^ 
 
 207 note, Appendix C. Appendix B. 
 
 Note. The mark repha or top r, is very liable to break off in tbe working of the 
 press; and the same remark applies to the slender top of the long 7 T, which then 
 becomes long n T . The reader will, I trust, have the charity to hold the author blame- 
 less in such cases.
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ON THE ALPHABET. 
 
 1. Ix India, and the adjacent countries to the eastward, 
 the Hindus and Budhists appear to have possessed, from a 
 very remote period, an alphabet by far the most scientific, 
 and the nearest to perfection, hitherto invented. From 
 Kashmir to Ceylon, and from the Indus to the confines 
 of China, the alphabetic system is evidently the same, 
 although the forms of the letters have, in the course of 
 ages, undergone considerable variations. The standard of 
 this class of alphabets is the Devandgarl^ in which most 
 Sanskrit works are written and printed, at least to the 
 north-west of Bengal.* Of all the Hindu alphabets, that 
 of the Bengali has deviated least from the standard, being, 
 in fact, a mere distinction with very little difference. It 
 consists of Fourteen Towels and Thirty-three Consonants, 
 
 in the following order : 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 da II u u rl r~i U l~i (J~ ai au 
 
 * In Bengal Proper they still adhere to tin ir own elmrarter, both in writing and in 
 printing Sanskrit works ; and a similar rule holds in the Madras Presideney, where the 
 Telugu and Malayalma alphabets are used for the same purpose. 
 
 t As the vowels e and o are always long, i* will be ncedk-sa to mark them as t and <;, 
 beyond the first few pages of this work.
 
 2 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 k kh q ah n ch chh j jh n t th d 
 
 U U v v ... 
 
 dh n t th d dh n p pli I b/i m y 
 
 r I VOYW s/t sh s h 
 
 2. In naming the consonants, the short vowel d is in- 
 herent in each ; thus, kd, khd, yd, etc. : and in reading, 
 the mere utterance of the consonants often suffices for the 
 pronunciation of a word ; thus, 3-^ kanaka, " gold," w?t? 
 nd'jdid, "a city;" hence the first of the vowels, w #, is 
 never written except when it begins a word or syllable. 
 With regard to the remaining vowels, they have each two 
 forms : that given above, which may be called their primary 
 form, is used only when they begin a word or syllable ; 
 but when they follow a consonant, they assume, in most 
 instances, a totally different shape, which may be called 
 their secondary forms; thus, T Ci, fi^ i, ^ it, ^ u, ^ ri, *_ rl, 
 * U, % li, t t 7 , ai, z 1 o, and ?T) au, as may be seen in the 
 following exemplification of them in combination with the 
 letter ^ kd, thus : 
 
 dkd dka iki Ik I uku itkii rikri rtkrl Will likll c^c aikai 
 
 6k d auk an 
 
 a. The reader is requested in particular to remark that the 
 vowels ^ /, <s\ (". and 4 (ii, are written before the consonants after 
 which they are to he sounded. Examples : f% hi, ( he, 3? hai ;
 
 soi'NDs or Tin: I.KTTKKS. o 
 
 while *? ft and * au enclose the consonants between their two 
 members, as (%] /v5, (^] Imn. 
 
 l>. The thirty-three eonsonants of the Bengali alphabet are in 
 reality so many syllahles, and are understood to he uttered with 
 the short vowel a, when unaccompanied hy any other synihol. 
 When this inherent vowel is not to he sounded, which it seldom 
 is, at the end of a word, the consonant ought to he marked 
 underneath with the synihol ( ) called rirunui or ' rot,'' thus, 
 <-j<f- kanak. J5fa nftifnr. In the spoken languages of India, how- 
 
 \ *s ' 
 
 ever, such as the Bengali, Hindi, MahrattT, etc., the general rule 
 is, that the last consonant of a word is not followed hy the short 
 vowel a ; consequently, in such cases the viranni is not requisite. 
 When, at the beginning or in the middle of a word, two or more 
 consonants come together without the intervention of a vowel, 
 instead of using the rin'uiui, the consonant undergoes some 
 modification or contraction, in combination with that which 
 follows it, as will he explained more fully hereafter. 
 
 Articulate Sounds of the Letters. 
 
 I. VOWELS. 
 
 3. The first vowel ^ a is, as we liuvc already stated, 
 inherent in every consonant, and is pronounced like 1 a short 
 a or o, as, for instance, like a or o in " tolerable 1 ." Tims, 
 ^w=r anal, "fire." At the beginning of a word, before a 
 compound consonant, it is pronounced like a in "artful," 
 as ^w ardha, li half." At the end of a word it is commonly 
 dropped, as in the word ^r^iT'l aMran, not alulrann, as it 
 would be in Sanskrit. The exceptions to this last rule 
 will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 Wl (1 is the above letter lengthened, and has the sound 
 of a in " father," as ^rf<FK dfalth, " the sky." 
 
 ^" / is pronounced like / in "pin," as ^"fr im\ "this 
 man."
 
 4 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^ f is the preceding vowel lengthened, and has the 
 sound of i in "machine," or "police," as ^r, isliat, "a 
 little." 
 
 ^ u is pronounced like u in "bull," as ^ utha, "arise." 
 
 ^ u like u in "prime," as %fsr*f unish, "nineteen." 
 
 ^ ri is like ri in " rich," as ^f% rishi, " a sage." 
 
 ^ rl as in the French word "rire." 
 
 *> U is like U in " little," as *> ^T? li-Jcdr, " the letter //." 
 
 & U is the preceding lengthened. These two vowels, 
 however, being peculiar only to the Sanskrit, are of ex- 
 tremely rare occurrence in Bengali. 
 
 <s\ e is pronounced like e in " there," as ^ ek, " one." 
 
 ^ ai is like our i in " fire," as ^ aiJcya, " unity." 
 
 ^ o is like o in "note," as *& oshtha, "the lip." 
 
 ^ M is like oio in "how," as ^sf aushadh, "medi- 
 
 ^r ail called anuswara, is like the French nasal n 
 in the words dans and 55, as ^-i<if sutardh, " conse- 
 quently." 
 
 ^% ah, called visarga, indicates that the preceding vowel 
 should in pronunciation, be abruptly shortened, as 
 antah, " within." 
 
 II. COXSOXAXTS. 
 
 ^ /", as in English, thus, ^T^ kale, "a crow." 
 
 t /'//, like Jch in "black-heath," or ' 'brick -house ;" there 
 must, however, be no hiatus between the k and h as in the 
 English words, but both pronounced with one breath, as 
 *rtri shaMa, "a branch." 
 
 ^ cj, like (j in " go," or " give," as *>tww gaman, " going. 
 
 "
 
 ROUNDS OF THE LKTTKIIS. 
 
 *T gli, like gh in " hog-herd," or u log-house," as 
 #/ws, " grass." 
 
 <S ng, like ?z in "Lank," or "trinket," as ^SF% anJca, " 
 mark." It is rarely used except in composition. 
 
 F c/i, like c/t in " church," as fpifl chin la, " thought." 
 
 ^ <?M, like c//-// in "fetch-hence," "much-haste," as 
 chhd i/d, " a shadow." 
 
 s?/, like/ in "just," as w$ jay, "victory." 
 
 *t jfij like #e-/a in " college -hall," as (TW %7^, "a 
 load." 
 
 ^3 nj, like w in "hinge," as TT^SIT sanchajj, "collec- 
 tion." This letter, like <B. is used chiefly in composition. 
 
 fc /, like t in "take," as fet*1 takd, "a rupT." To dis- 
 tinguish this and the next four letters from the five follow- 
 ing ones, a dot is placed below the Roman letter : it is 
 placed under these in preference to the others, because 
 used much less frequently. 
 
 fh, like t-h in "fat-hen," as M^? IJiakur, "a god," or 
 "chief." 
 
 ^ <J, like d in " do," as wft t/al, " a branch," or " bough." 
 
 u <]h, like d-h in "bad-hand," "old-house," as FfsT Jhtil, 
 "a shield." This letter and the preceding one with a do f 
 under them are pronounced like our r with the tip of thfe 
 tongue turned up to the roof of the mouth, as "3~5 lara, 
 "great," ^CTJ murliti, "a fool." In the Roman character 
 this letter will be represented by r, to distinguish it from 
 the common ?r r. 
 
 l n, like n in " can," as ^^ JcantaJc, " a thorn." 
 ^5 t, as in the Gaelic, German, and Italian laguages. thus. 
 v5t?1 tdnl, "a star." To pronounce this and the next four
 
 6 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 letters, viz., t th, w d, q dk, and ^ ^ aright, the tongue 
 should be pressed against the edge of the upper teeth. 
 Their true sounds do not exist in the English language, 
 therefore it would simply be misleading the student to 
 describe them ; they must be learnt by the ear. In 
 Yates's Grammar we are gravely told that i> is sounded 
 like I in "take," which is quite true; then AVC arc told 
 that ^ is sounded like t in " teeth," which is quite untrue. 
 I should like to know the difference between t in "take" 
 and t in "teeth." The letter ^5 sometimes assumes the 
 form <t, called the ardha-ta, or half t, in which case it is 
 never followed by a vowel. 
 
 *T^, like/* in "pin," as *ft$ pdtra, "a vessel." 
 
 ?$ ph, like p-h in " up-hill," " Imp-hazard," as ^ phal, 
 " fruit." It is sometimes pronounced nearly like/ 
 
 * I, like 1) in " book," as <rm<F bdlak, " a child." 
 
 ^ bh, like ~b-h in "hob-house," as ~^^ b/idluk, " a bear." 
 
 ^ m, like m in " mind," as ^Tsl mala, " a mother." 
 
 *T jjj j. This is properly the consonant ?/, but it is pro- 
 nounced j in Bengali, except when it is the last letter of a 
 compound or has a dot under it ; then it is ;/, as *Tl"gf^ jajaJc , 
 " a priest;" WJ danti/a, "dental ;" ^fr?rl Icariyd, " done." 
 <r ^ r, like r in " rod," as ?t^Tl rdja, " a king." 
 cf I, like /in " lamb," as ^rr^ labli^ "gain." 
 
 ^ b, v, ^v. This is properly v or iv, but is always pro- 
 nounced like I) in " but" by the natives of Bengal, except 
 when following another letter in composition, and then it is 
 usually pronounced w, as TTst^T balds, "wind;" Tf? dwdr, 
 
 "a door." 
 
 "*f sh, like sh in " shine," as "*tt*t shap, " a curse."
 
 COMPOUND LKTTKUS. 7 
 
 ^ s/i, nearly like si in " vision," as c^TC shcsh, " cud." 
 >T 8, like s in " sin," as ^TT? 67//-, " essence." 
 ^ //, like h in " heart," as 3^3 has la, " a hand." 
 
 Classification of the Consonants. 
 
 4. The consonants are further classified as follows, the 
 use of which will be seen hereafter, viz. : 
 
 NASAL. SEMI-VOWEL. SIIilLAXT. 
 
 1 Gutturals ^ k t kh *>\ y *r yh \ ny ^ h 
 
 2 Palatials F ch ^ c/t/i W/ ^jh >s&ny ^ ya *f sh 
 
 3 Cerebrals ^ t $ Ih ^ d u dh ^ n ? r ^ alt 
 i Dentals ^ t Q Ih if d % dh w n ^ I ^5 
 5 Labials *f/> TP^ ^ J ^^/^ sr ;w ? y 
 
 . Observe that in each class the second and fourth letters are 
 the (ixpimtc.s of the first and third respectively ; but of all this 
 we shah 1 treat more fully in a future section. 
 
 Of Compound Letters. 
 
 5. It is a rule in Sanskrit and Bengali orthography, that 
 when two or more consonants come together, without the 
 intervention of a vowel, such consonants unite into one 
 compound group : thus, in the word F^ chandra, " the 
 moon," the letters *, *, and <r are blended as it were into 
 one character. For the formation of the compound letters 
 no general rule holds, except that the last of the group, 
 with two exceptions to be immediately noticed, remains 
 entire, and the rest are more or less contracted by omitting 
 the perpendicular stroke, and sometimes by changing their 
 primitive form. The letter ? being of frequent occurrence
 
 8 BENGALI GEAMMAE. 
 
 in compounds, is written over the group in the formwhen 
 it is to be sounded first, as in the word ^F tar/ca, "reason- 
 ing ;" and when the "$ follows another single letter or com- 
 pound group, it is represented underneath such letter or 
 group, thus^, as in the word F^ chandra, " the moon." The 
 letter *r is also very often employed as the last of a group ; 
 and in that case it assumes the form J, as in the word 3^0" 
 Jcalya, " to-morrow." 
 
 6. Compound letters may be classified as follows : 
 
 (1) DOUBLE LETTEES ; where it will be observed, that 
 when an aspirate is to be doubled, the first is expressed by 
 the unaspiratcd letter of the same species, thus, 
 
 Me JcJch gg ggh nn click cliclili jj jjh nn 
 U tth fid ddh nn it ttli dd ddh nn 
 
 pp ppli 11) Itlh mm yy II shsh shsh ss 
 
 (2) COMPOUNDS, consisting of the nasals with the letters 
 of their own class ; but in all such combinations, the sign 
 anuswdra may supply the place of the nasal. 
 
 nk nidi ng ngh nch nchh nj njh nt nth 
 
 nd mill nt nth ml ndh mp mpli ml) mbli 
 
 (3) MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS. These, of course, are 
 very numerous, and a complete list of them would occupy 
 many pages. The following arc of frequent occurrence, 
 and a perusal of them will suggest the method by which
 
 COMPOUND LETTERS. 9 
 
 others may 1)0 formed. Compounds in which the letter <r 
 forms tlie iirst or last element are generally omitted, as 
 well as those in which *T comes last, for those letters follow 
 a special rule of their own, already stated. "We may throw 
 the miscellaneous compounds into two classes, the first of 
 which is, upon the whole, simple and regular ; the second 
 contains several anomalies, as may be seen on inspection. 
 In this, as in everything else, practice alone " renders per- 
 fect." 
 
 EEGULAU COMPOUNDS. 
 
 $ ff r 
 
 ^M 
 
 T^ chclih 
 
 <& nt 
 
 $ nth 
 
 ^ 
 
 IT tm 
 
 *f dd 
 
 \ dn 
 
 W dm 
 
 15 dr 
 
 ^ (/; 
 
 ^5 dru 
 
 ^Sn dru 
 
 ^ nd 
 
 g" nn 
 
 ^ nw 
 
 ^f /> 
 
 *% pw 
 
 ? bb 
 
 "& mbh 
 
 "^T mm 
 
 gf ml 
 
 r^ 
 
 JKU 
 
 P shch 
 
 ^ shw 
 
 *x slim 
 
 ^| 5/^7 
 
 P shru 
 
 ^ shk 
 
 V sht 
 
 ^ shth 
 
 M s/ij) 
 
 T sp 
 
 ^" 7^c 
 
 ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Jcri 
 
 N<P lit 
 
 ^ kr 
 
 ^> A"5/i 
 
 ^T ^"5^/TZ 
 
 ^ ngk 
 
 gu 
 
 % gdh 
 
 ^ n 99 
 
 ^r jn 
 
 ^ay 
 
 P n ch 
 
 tt 
 
 ^ nd 
 
 ^ ndu 
 
 ^ ^ or ^^ 
 
 ^ Vth 
 
 -as ty 
 
 tr 
 
 3? z'rw 
 
 -$ttr 
 
 W c/'c//i 
 
 ^ nt 
 
 ^ ntn 
 
 ntr 
 
 ^ ?z^ 
 
 ^ y?^ 
 
 ^f ic/ 
 
 ^ Ihr 
 
 ^r Ihru 
 
 rn 
 
 ?f ru 
 
 ^ -5/!M 
 
 ^j shn 
 
 ^ st 
 
 ^ stu 
 
 "35" str ^ sth ^ Ini ^ hri ?> 1m ^r Jim 
 
 a. Compounds of three letters are not numerous in Bengali', 
 bcinp: peculiar to Sanskrit words ; and when they do occur, they 
 generally result from adding to the preceding 1 , (or any compound 
 of t\vo), one or other of the following; letters, viz., w, sr, *r, ^, cT, 
 ?", or "TT; hut of these, IT and ^ most frequently occur as the last 
 element; for this reason, that words ending in the vowels ? t . ^ ; 
 and ^, ^; are liable, in certain situations, to change the ^" and
 
 10 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^ into if and the ^ and ^ into <r ; hence, when the latter vowels, 
 so situated, are preceded by a double or compound letter, the *T 
 or ^ will add a third to the group. The letter <[ is also of 
 frequent occurrence at the end of a group, but it is easily dis- 
 tinguished, on account of its peculiar form. 
 
 b. It will be observed that in compounds of two letters, the first 
 is generally modified, and the last (with the exception of *r and 3) 
 is for the most part left entire. Two of the compound letters, 
 however, are so disguised as to have the semblance of single 
 letters,* viz., ^ A-.s7/, compounded of 3? and 3", sounded like our .r 
 in " fluxion," or ct in " faction, but generally corrupted into kliy 
 in Bengali, as in the word ^Ff^? khyunta, " appeased," instead of 
 kshanta. The compound "QSju, sounded like our git in " bagnio," 
 or the French gn in " ligne," " champagne," etc. 
 
 c. The symbol * denotes a strong nasal sound, like that of 
 the French n in the word " sans," thus, TP*T baits, " a bamboo." 
 The mark 1 is used in poetry to indicate the first member of a 
 sltloka or couplet ; and at the end of the shloka it is generally 
 doubled, 11. In prose the same marks serve to denote stops. In 
 many books lately published in India, in both the Bengali and 
 Devanagari characters, the English stops are very properly and 
 successfully introduced. When the figure *. (2) follows any 
 word, it implies that such word is to be repeated, thus ^rf*t^ is 
 to be read dpan vpan. 
 
 General Remarks on the Sounds of the Consonants. 
 
 7. The consonants, as we have shown, are arranged 
 according to the organs of utterance, as gutturals^ palatials, 
 etc. The cerebral letters arc sounded very like our own 
 
 * These t\vn compounds, affording to some Iliivln grammarians, are to be considered 
 as distinct letter--, like | xi. and ^ psi in the Greek alphabet. For instancn, in Moles- 
 woitli's MarliattT Dictionary, they figure as the two last letters of the Devanagari 
 alphabet. This is simply absurd ; for, on the same principle, every compound ill San- 
 skrit may put in its claim to rank as a separate letter.
 
 GEXKHAL KKMAUKS. 11 
 
 t and (1 \ but tho denials are quite different, being pro- 
 nounced by bringing tho point of the tongue against the 
 roots of the front upper teeth. The cerebrals are denoted 
 by a dot written beneath ; though it should rather have 
 been put under the dentals, to mark that they are different 
 from our own letters ; but to prevent the confusion that 
 must result from so many systems, the plan which has 
 been adopted in Sanskrit and Hindi Grammars and Dic- 
 tionaries, is here followed. 
 
 8. The rest of the consonants hardly differ from our 
 own ; but it may be necessary to apprise the learner why 
 there are so many nasals. In the Bengali alphabet no 
 change takes place in sound without a corresponding change 
 in writing ; consequently, as the sound of the nasal entirely 
 depends upon the consonant by which it is followed, it will, 
 for this reason, depend upon the latter, what form the nasal 
 shall assume in writing. As an example, the sound of n in 
 "king" is different from the sound of n in "lent/' and for 
 the first the guttural \s n Avould be required, and for the 
 last the cerebral c i ii< if it were desired to represent these 
 words in Bengali characters ; because the q of " king" is a 
 
 O / O 
 
 guttural, and the t of " lent" a cerebral. 
 
 (i. As a further example, the letter ]) is a labial, and the proper 
 nasal to precede it is in ; but by no effort of the organs of speech 
 could the word ' damp" be pronounced danp.'' with an // for an 
 a/, even though it were so written. On the same principle we 
 find that in Latin and (Jreek the letter <j. n, inevitably becomes 
 p, in, before a labial letter, thus, for cvfial^at we have ep.fio&'ha), 
 and for hijiono we have impono. 
 
 1). Every consonant, as we have already observed, has an 
 inherent short vowel n. which is understood, but never written
 
 12 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 after it ; thus ^ is ka, and not k. But when any other vowel is 
 subjoined to a consonant, the inherent vowel is suppressed. 
 Example : ^ I subjoined to ^ ka forms the syllable ^t ki, and 
 not kal. 
 
 c. When we sec an initial vowel follow any consonant, it is to 
 be considered as commencing a new syllabic, and the preceding 
 consonant retains the inherent short a ; therefore ^c should 
 be pronounced ha-ite, and not hite. 
 
 Remarks on the Letters ^s, TJ, i, *r, ?, <r, ^"-p", *T, ^, and^. 
 
 9. The letters ^ da and T> dha are frequently softened 
 into ^ ra and TJ rha, and a point is put beneath them to 
 mark the change that has taken place. The letter IT ya is 
 generally corrupted into ja ; and when the true sound of 
 *T ya is intended to be expressed, a dot is put beneath it, as 
 thus, TT ya. When the letter *r ya follows a long ^rl #, as 
 in f^nslrr, it drops the inherent vowel, and has the sound of 
 a long f, thus, pita-i, not pitaya, or pitay. ^TT. "Whenever 
 an initial ^ o and the letter TT are found combined together, 
 cither in the beginning or middle of a word, they have 
 conjointly the sound of wa. Example : ^t^irl ddtvd, u a 
 claim." Should the letter ^ va follow a consonant with 
 which it is in composition, it is sounded as iva ; thus in 
 ftt, u an island," the ^ is subjoined to W, and the word is 
 pronounced divlp. The letter ^ va is not in any way dis- 
 criminated by the vulgar from la, cither in shape or sound. 
 The letters *f sha, ^ sha, and "ST sa are corrupted by the 
 vulgar into a sound resembling sha. 
 
 Of Words tuliosc Finals are Open. 
 
 10. The inherent vowel is generally omitted at the end 
 of a word, and the following remarks arc intended to point
 
 ON THE FINAL SHORT A. 1 > 
 
 out by what rule it is retained. Accurately, all words 
 which end in a silent consonant should have the small 
 mark ( v ) written under the last, as ffr dik, "a side," 
 where the letter 3F lea has this mark subjoined; but as the 
 omission of the inherent vowel at the end of a word is the 
 general rule, the mark ( v ) is dispensed with. 
 
 a. In all adjectives which to the eye appear to be mono- 
 syllables, the final consonant retains the inherent vowel, and 
 thus the adjective forms a dissyllable. Examples : ^^\ bhula, 
 "good," ~F5 Ixtra, "large," C^ffr chhota, " small," etc. The same 
 rule applies to indeclinable particles ending 1 in ^ n, or ^5 /, such 
 as (3rr kena, " why ?" (3"^ tena, " such," ^5 kata, il how many ?" 
 C^tT /fotia, "any or some," etc., which retain the inherent vowel 
 of the final consonant, because of their affinity in sense to ad- 
 jectives. 
 
 b. The following- persons of the verb never drop the inherent 
 vowel of the final consonant : viz., the second person plural of 
 the present tense, as 3T? kara, "you do;" the third person 
 singular of the simple preterite, as 3-f%T kurila, " he did;" the 
 first person singular and plural of the future, as <?f<K kariba, 
 " I (or we) will do ;" the third person singular of the conditional, 
 as <?r<!^ karita, "he would do;" the second person plural of the 
 imperative, as 3F3 kara, " do yc." 
 
 c. The inherent vowel is invariably sounded after a final ^ ha 
 in indigenous words. Also after all compound consonants, as 
 "*T^f xhabda, ~^S lihadra, Tt^T biikya, ^^ bhagun, ^T^ ntnht, "SHU 
 matt a, ^f^" panka, '4^'-^ Ixiyaska. AVhen the final consonant is 
 preceded by or i, as ^TT huhsa. ^-21 dnltklia. When the 
 word is a Sanskrit participle passive, as "T5 krita, ^fF5 rac/iifa,* 
 ^17 murha (also murlt}. When it is an adjective in the com- 
 
 * Sanskrit participles in ita arc commonly pronounced also without the final , thus, 
 t>Jcr|\j) chalita and chalit, ai j c equally correct.
 
 14 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 parative and superlative terminations ^<r and ^, as 
 priya-tara, fHT-^55T priya-tama. When the word is Sanskrit 
 and the penultimate letter is TT preceded hy 9 , ^, ^, ^, or j), 
 as fnr p riyu, 3F<r^tir karanlya, "s^T 13T bhuya-bhuya, c^T? slireya. 
 In the words TT^ sama, W^T nama, ^T tarna, s^jyf^ii tnahiunu- 
 hima, ^>\*\\*\ aslnia, <T^r raja, *^~ na1>a, "^juba, f^q hid ha, and a 
 few more. In the names of (Hindu) gods, when pronounced in 
 invocation, as f*R f*f? shiva shiva ! ^TTUTI (^ ndrayunu lie ! 
 Nearly all words in this language terminate in a silent conso- 
 nant, hut the examples previously given will show where the 
 reverse takes place. The letter ^ as the final of the genitive 
 case never takes the short a. In the word C3Tf^ kon, "who ?" or 
 "what r" the ^ n has not the short a; but the word (^^ kona, 
 "any," "some," as has heen already stated, terminates in an 
 open ^ na. 
 
 11. General remark. In reading, the same stress should 
 be laid on a final syllable as upon one of similar length, 
 which is either incipient or medial. The syllables must be 
 divided by pronouncing together the consonant with the 
 vowel which immediately follows it ; and when a double 
 consonant occurs, its first letter is to be joined to the pre- 
 ceding syllable. A short example will make this easy : 
 ^5T^T? "sr^T^ ^T^Ps f^T ^] td-Jidr san-tCui scm-ta-ti citJii-la na. 
 If a word commences with a vowel, the latter must be con- 
 sidered to constitute the first syllable. Example : ^t^f 
 
 v X 
 
 ti-lap, and not al-dp. 
 
 12. To enable the learner fully to comprehend the force 
 of the preceding explanations, the commencement of the 
 popular stories entitled the "Tales of a Parrot," is here 
 given, with the pronunciation expressed in English charac- 
 ters beneath each word of the original.
 
 PRAXIS FOR READING, ETC. 1 ; ~> 
 
 EXAMPLE : 
 
 purbba killer dhanbdnerder madhyc, Am/id Sultan name 
 
 J)^ ^R r^C^M ^St^T? ^TFjT <"T -S ti^SIJ <ft 
 
 ck jan chhilcn. Tdhdr pracliur dhan o aishwarjya elan 
 
 bistar sain y as a man fa chJiila. EJc saJutsra asltwa, panchashat 
 z^t 5T3;-*n5 %g ^t7?? "srf^s ; 5tRT?r Tfr? ^Tfsf? 
 
 hasti, nabashat ushtra^ bJidrcr sahit, tdJtdr dwdre htijir 
 sflf^rs i fri ;; 5t^T?' >i^'H Tpgfs f%=T ^r) i|^ ^t<ri 
 
 thdlcita. Kintu tdhdr santdn santati clildla na, ci liar an 
 
 wi dibdratri, o prate o sandhydte, ishivarpujaJccrder ni/cale 
 
 aaman Jcariyd, scbdr dwara santdncr bar prarthand Jcariten. 
 
 " Among the wealthy of ancient times, there was a 
 man, by name Amad Sultan. He had much wealth and 
 power, also a numerous army. A thousand horse, five 
 Inmdrcd elephants, nine hundred camels, together with 
 their burdens, used to remain ready at his gate. But 
 he had no male offspring : on this account, he, day and 
 night, morning and evening, having gone to the presence 
 of the worshippers of God, used to implore the gift of 
 a son." 
 
 13. Perhaps the readiest and easiest mode of learning 
 the letters, will be by restoring the following words into 
 their native characters. 
 
 salcal pratliam Jcailas dpani 
 
 sab janma cJihan nikal 
 
 man sarnbul dip upasthit
 
 1C 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 samay 
 
 mull/ a 
 
 dhuli 
 
 dtak 
 
 kara 
 
 pdhuhchhiyd 
 
 lairdgl 
 
 udak 
 
 kaha 
 
 buddhi 
 
 bodhan 
 
 uddsl 
 
 bara 
 
 kintu 
 
 paurush 
 
 ishat 
 
 par 
 
 takhan 
 
 bujhite 
 
 ulrish 
 
 tanaij 
 
 badan 
 
 bdman 
 
 dc/dr 
 
 jan 
 
 shay an 
 
 phirite 
 
 drishU 
 
 phal 
 
 paksha 
 
 karite 
 
 sitrjt/a 
 
 gaman 
 
 palan 
 
 dckhiyd 
 
 akartalbya 
 
 hat 
 
 dalak 
 
 clilidmani 
 
 lydghra 
 
 putite 
 
 chhalan 
 
 duhitd 
 
 stnlok 
 
 nikat 
 
 khanan 
 
 pichhalan 
 
 ardha 
 
 ghdii 
 
 sahaj'a 
 
 pliuldna 
 
 karma 
 
 duhkh 
 
 saran 
 
 phekura 
 
 kdnyakubja 
 
 ydhd 
 
 shat 
 
 lasliun 
 
 sivdmi 
 
 Ihdla 
 
 laksha 
 
 Idgdo 
 
 Irdhman 
 
 pur at an 
 
 daran 
 
 ritu 
 
 dhairjfja 
 
 bhojan 
 
 dhakan 
 
 ekhan 
 
 muhurtlek 
 
 totCi 
 
 kapal 
 
 airi 
 
 pashcJiim 
 
 gnydta 
 
 nagar 
 
 aimat 
 
 drabdrlia, 
 
 kautak 
 
 nanad 
 
 aildk 
 
 tivancha 
 
 eJcatar 
 
 ladhan 
 
 old 
 
 ganggd 
 
 upar 
 
 lasan 
 
 osdr 
 
 ydcJmd 
 
 ami 
 
 daman 
 
 odik 
 
 mat la 
 
 udar 
 
 dashan 
 
 opdr 
 
 at u ant a 
 
 dpan 
 
 dalak 
 
 auras 
 
 jliampa, 
 
 dsite 
 
 char aii 
 
 aushadh 
 
 landan 
 
 drolian 
 
 liun 
 
 upahata 
 
 nibasfra 
 
 dkar 
 
 rupaldn 
 
 ushdkdl 
 
 niyukta 
 
 dp up Ik 
 
 Idjdr 
 
 ihdte 
 
 rakta
 
 17 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLES, SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 14. In the Bengali, as in Sanskrit and Latin, our defi- 
 nite article has not a corresponding representative. When 
 a noun is employed for the first time, and denotes some- 
 thing which is the specific object of discourse, it takes the 
 numeral 4& "one" before it, which has then completely 
 the sense of our indefinite article when similarly employed ; 
 and on the same noun being again alluded to, the inde- 
 clinable pronominal adjectives (?T^~ and 4 "that," are 
 generally prefixed, with very much the same signification 
 as our definite article : thus, ^ 3Z^ <s& '3TF3 "^T? -%$ ^Jf^t 
 j)^- ^s~ ^jpJ PT^ ^c^r? Tff^s rtf?F5 1 " In a certain forest,* 
 a tiger and a tigress, those two creatures, together with 
 their two young ones, dwelt." 
 
 a. Should the noun be preceded by two or more adjectives, the 
 interposing the numeral between them and the noun, iiives threat 
 idiomatic elegance to the sentence : thus, ^t^^^iki*^ ^TSfF? 
 "*ff*n]~t -^ ^nrl f^5T 1 "The King- of Kanyakuhja 
 
 * All BongalT pnssngos ocnirrin? in the presi-nt and next Section of this work are 
 translated as literally as possible. The student, however, need not dwell upon them too 
 much at present, till he has made himself acquainted with the inflections of the nouns, 
 pronouns, and verbs, after which he will nuvt with no difficulty whatever.
 
 18 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 had a most beautiful and moon-faced daughter/' The applica- 
 tion of (7[^ and J? for the definite article, will he clearly seen 
 in the following passage, viz., 
 
 ^9 y\ i " Aftenvards, the tree was rent asunder of itself ; 
 and t/te damsel having nimhly stepped into the middle of it, the 
 tree reunited again as it was before." 
 
 b. The letter J) e of the word w& in the following example, 
 seems to convey very much the force of our definite article : thus., 
 
 1 " Soon after, the Prince, accompanied by that damsel, 
 having returned to his own palace, those two individuals dwelt 
 together." When J) e is joined to the adjective TT^T "all," it 
 gives it the sense of " the whole/' or " every one," like that of a 
 collective noun : thus,, tf||^ e|^" ~3f3r (% ("sfsnTl VR-srl 5T(T5^ ^/t?T 
 ^<? 1 " Now this is a juncture that you should evert/ one feign to 
 he dead." 
 
 OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Of Gender. 
 
 15. The Bengali nouns are of the three genders mascu- 
 line, feminine, and neuter ; and correspond in this respect 
 exactly to the analogy of our own language. The masculine 
 gender is only applied to male animals, and the feminine to 
 females ; with c<]ual propriety, all inanimate things, as well 
 as nouns expressive of abstract qualities, arc neuter ; but 
 should the latter be employed in a personified sense, they 
 regain their original i'eminine gender, wliich they had in 
 Sanskrit ; and in that case their adjectives must agree with 
 them according to the analogy of feminine nouns : for ox- 
 ample,
 
 OF GENDKR, ETC 19 
 
 $ o s>U* $f<i<i1 ^rit 4ddw i " great Prince ! the 
 rcnoivn of your foe does not at any time, or any where, go 
 beyond her dwelling, (and yet) the wise declare her im- 
 modest. But your rcnoivn they pronounce of unsullied chas- 
 tity, though she at all times roams through the terrestrial 
 and Tartarean regions." From this passage, the learner 
 will perceive how neuter nouns are employed when per- 
 sonified. 
 
 a. To form fcminincs, ^ 7 long, or pwt inl, is generally added 
 to masculines ; though in this language, as in our own, the names 
 of some of the most common male and female objects in nature 
 are applied quite absolutely, and without any relation to one 
 another : thus, *%&$ " a man," "3ft " a woman ;" f*f$1 a father," 
 STfal "a mother;" T^tSl or "^^ "a brother," ^wf^f^t or <f^{ " a 
 sister ;" ^if^iM " a bull," *ff^ " a cow." 
 
 b. The following examples may serve to point out the analogy 
 by which feminine nouns arc regularly formed from masculines, 
 viz., TTST " a tiger," Tf^t " a tigress;" ^;f?i -a buck." zfgcft a 
 doe ;" (1T51 " a ram," (~~ft '' a ewe ;" ^^t " an elephant/' ^ 
 
 "a she-elephant;" fffal "an ass," 9ttt "a she-ass;" ThT 
 crow," ^tt " a hen-crow." 
 
 c. If the feminine sign ^^t is added to a noun ending in 
 long, the latter is cut off. Example : ^~^t ' an elephant," F 
 
 " a she-elephant." When it is necessary to distinguish the sex 
 of any animal, to which these feminine terminations have not been 
 applied by the idiom of the language, it is usual to effect it by 
 prefixing the term vj-g^ male," or isff '' female." 
 
 Of Xumlcr. 
 
 1C. This language has but two numbers, the singular 
 and the plural, which apply only to masculine and irminine 
 nouns. The neuter has no plural termination ; but the
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 state of the noun is defined by a numeral, or marked in a 
 vague way, by a word expressive of quantity, as ^cfl "a 
 body," "heap," "set." A kind of collective, indefinite 
 sense is given to nouns by subjoining the words ?fi " a 
 multitude," W "a class," c*rft? "people," and w^ "a 
 band," as ^rtsfTsfq or ?is?k?it^ "kings," -*)<iTf "servants," 
 ^W^T " a band of Kurus." But when the plural termina- 
 tions are given to these adjuncts, they seem to convey to 
 them the sense of definite articles, as ^R^f?1 " the ser- 
 vants," etc. : thus, ^RrnVl *rf5r| crr*t ^T<I <ff?r*r| <rTsrr? &<<& 
 ^rrf^nrl <-f^Ji i " The servants having wandered over many 
 countries, having returned to the King, said" 
 
 a. The word (cffa does not always convey a plural significa- 
 tion ; for when joined to an adjective it simply serves to mark 
 that a human being is intended, as "SsffS^Tft? "a woman ;" because 
 "3ft is so often employed to designate any other female, that it 
 requires the word C^Tt^ to mark when it is intended to designate 
 rational beings. Sometimes it implies " world," as *T$M'te " the 
 other world," or " the state of existence after death." When 
 written after (Tf^ " a deity," ^rfft " a serpent," and sr<[ " a man," 
 implies the region or abode of these beings severally : thus, 
 " the region of the gods," heaven ; Wff7^rt^ " the abode 
 of serpents," commonly called Patella j TsTT^ " the abode of 
 men," the earth. 
 
 Of Case. 
 
 17. Those various relations of nouns, which we term 
 cases, are discriminated in Bengali by terminations sub- 
 joined to the noun ; the cases are eight in number, in 
 accordance with the Sanskrit, and are arranged by native
 
 DECLENSION. 21 
 
 grammarians as follows: 1. Nominative; 2. Accusative; 
 3. Instrumental, "by" or "with;" 4. Dative, "to" or 
 "for;" 5. Ablative, "from," "out of;" G. Genitive, "of," 
 denoting possession; 7. Locative, "in," "on," "at," or 
 "upon;" 8. Vocative, same form as the nominative. 
 
 a. The following 1 terminations are added to all nouns, mascu- 
 line, feminine, or neuter, save that the neuter, as has been 
 already mentioned, is declined only in the singular number. 
 
 Nom. iff^rl er-u. 
 
 Ac. (^ he j)<jfTr?fZ3i er-digke. 
 
 Inst. if|3 efe. 6($fwCtf$ er-digete. 
 
 Dat. ($ kc or J)<7<r ere. ^fpfTC^ er-digke or if)<[ -ere. 
 
 Ab. J)^5 efe or ^? (.$ ha-itc. ^fpFC'jftrs er-digete, ^7TS-/ia-i 
 
 or J)^<><!s 9 d-i er-derha-ite. 
 
 *s *\> 
 
 Gen. <s(^er. 4jJwt'ft3(e.r-dig 
 
 Loc. JQ e or <\T~$ efe. <[$fv[ZtfU5 er-digete. 
 
 b. The oblique cases of the plural arc formed by adding fif> 
 "a side," to the genitive singular, and subjoining to it the various 
 terminations employed for the oblique cases singular. frfTf being 
 itself inflected like any other noun, while forming the plural, 
 may be contracted in the fifth and sixth cases into (F3. 
 
 Declension. 
 
 18. In Bengali there is virtually but one declension, 
 which we may conveniently divide into two classes. The 
 first class includes all nouns ending in a consonant, or with 
 the inherent short a ; the second includes all nouns ending 
 in any vowel, except the inherent short a.
 
 22 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Class First Wf " A Man." 
 
 a man. 
 a man. 
 
 by o?' with, a man. 
 or w^tt to a man. 
 etc., from a man. 
 of a man 
 in a man. 
 
 Yoc. W man. 
 
 men. 
 
 men. 
 
 by or with men. 
 to men. 
 
 etc., from men. 
 etc., of men. 
 in men. 
 men. 
 
 "A Son." 
 
 Ac. 
 
 Inst. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Loc. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 a son. 
 a son. 
 
 by or with a son. 
 etc., to a son. 
 
 etc., from a son. 
 of a son. 
 in a son. 
 son. 
 
 sons. 
 
 sons. 
 
 by or with sons. 
 
 etc., to sons. 
 etc. from sons. 
 
 or of? of sons. 
 
 in sons. 
 sons. 
 
 . In this class the terminations in the singular are added 
 directly to the nominative. The genitive singular, as already 
 stated, is the basis of the plural inflection, which adds d for the 
 nominative and vocative plural, and the syllable dig, with the 
 terminations of the singular for all the other cases. When the 
 nominative singular ends in the inherent short a, the latter is 
 suppressed when the termination begins with e : thus^ putrete, 
 not putra-ete. 
 
 l>. In like manner decline : ^5 " a messenger," ^"7 " a phy-
 
 DECLENSION 
 
 23 
 
 sician," $t*rf? "a blacksmith," -iit<! "a potter," ^i|<l "a car- 
 pouter," rff^f'S " a barber," ^~$ " a dog," Tffr<r " a calf," ^5TF 
 " a bullock," srf^ "' a buiValo," ^f " a horse," and FTsffi " a 
 goat." 
 
 19. 
 
 Class Second 
 
 SING. 
 
 Kom. rfft a woman. 
 
 Ac. <1<rtc<:> a woman. 
 
 Inst. ^tltd-4 by a woman. 
 
 Dat. JtsPtw to a woman. 
 
 Ab. rfTrtrs from a w<jman. 
 
 Gen. *rfft? of a woman. 
 
 \ 
 
 Loc. -rfftrs in a woman. 
 Yoc. rfft woman. 
 
 " A Woman." 
 
 I'LVIl. 
 
 rfft<r) women. 
 
 women. 
 by women. 
 to women. 
 from women. 
 f? of women. 
 in women. 
 ftj\ women. 
 
 A Lord." 
 
 Kom. 
 
 a lord. 
 
 fT?1 lords. 
 
 Ac. <snr&$ a lord. 
 
 Inst. <j 5 c -s by or witli a lord. 
 
 Dat. >T2Z^ etc., to a lord. 
 
 Ab. Ts7T3 r ^Ty^T^ from a 
 
 lord. 
 
 Gen. ^Ts? of a lord. 
 
 Loc. *2| j?<:i in a lord. 
 
 Yoc. Tf lord. 
 
 lords. 
 
 by or witli lords 
 
 etc., to lords. 
 
 from lords. 
 ? , <Tf?fT?*t<r of lords. 
 
 in lords. 
 lords. 
 
 a. The main peculiarity of this class is that the initial e of the 
 termination is suppressed in the singular, and the final vowel of 
 the nominative supplies its place. When the nominative ends 
 in the lon*^ a, like f^fsl "a father,'' the locative is optionally 
 formed by adding ("3 te or 7f I (vide 9) : thus, P?I~517T5 or
 
 24 BENGALI GRAMMAK. 
 
 The genitive singular forms the basis of the plural precisely as 
 in Class I. 
 
 1). In like manner decline : 4t&t1 " a king/' (SPFsl " a horse," 
 T<9 "an animal," C^f?P "a turkey," ^cT "an oilman," ift "a 
 woman," ^frHffr "a sister," sflf^ "a florist," ^f^ft "a she- 
 deer," and ^ "a wife;" nom. ^, ace. ^*n7F, etc., only making 
 voc. (% ^ " O wife," with the u short. 
 
 c. It is quite superfluous to give an example of a neuter noun, 
 which is declined only in the singular number, and precisely like 
 the preceding, according to the class under which it falls. 
 
 20. In all works recently published in Bengal, I find a 
 natural tendency prevails to contract the oblique cases 
 plural, i.e., those to which the syllable frr>T <tig is subjoined. 
 The syllable ^<r er of Class 1st and the ? r of Class 2nd are 
 entirely omitted, and the syllable frp>t, with its termina- 
 tions, is subjoined directly to the nominative singular, in 
 accordance with the analogy of the Sanskrit language. 
 This is, no doubt, a step in the right direction, as every 
 language pretending to practical utility ought to reject all 
 superfluities Avhen in so doing no obscurity results. The 
 following examples will amply illustrate this point, viz., 
 
 Class First Q<s\ " A Son." 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 a son. ?&&j\ sons. 
 
 a son. ^frf*^ sons, 
 by or with a son. JOsqfTfT$fiT3 by or with sons, 
 
 etc., to a son. ^^fwi^^f etc., to sons, 
 
 from a son. ^C^fpf^t^^ from sons, 
 
 of a son. < 2?)fTf < 5t?[ or c*f? of sons. 
 
 iri a son. <%^fwc t >ft~5 in sons. 
 
 son. <5ttfsq?1 sous.
 
 REMARKS ON THE CASES. 
 
 25 
 
 Class Second w$ " A Teacher." 
 
 SINO. 
 
 a teacher. 
 a teacher. 
 by or with a teacher. 
 etc., to a teacher. 
 from a teacher. 
 of a teacher. 
 in a teacher. 
 teacher. 
 
 teachers. 
 
 teachers. 
 
 ttrs by or with teachers 
 etc., to teachers. 
 from teachers. 
 or (TT? of teachers. 
 in teachers. 
 teachers. 
 
 a. A noun ending in ^ t long, sometimes takes ^ i short 
 before the terminations, as "^t^t " a lord," "-^lfj|<l " of a lord." 
 Nouns ending in ^" / short, occasionally drop it, and take <s\ e in 
 the seventh ease, as <rffa " night," <Tt^5 " at or in the night," 
 though the form <Ttf^5 is equally correct. 
 
 Remarks on the Cases. 
 
 21. The nominative case is often found with the letter ^j 
 or f5 (vide 13, #.) subjoined, as ^ "a man ;" Xom. 
 u the man," as in the following examples : 
 
 fT i "111 fine, the goldsmith and ^c carpenter, after much 
 altercation, went before the Cazy, who was the Judge of 
 that place." 0*^ ^j^ V^^^* ^>'tr<v1 ^nrtft^t?^ ^fj? 1 !:^ 
 c$ r^rr? ^^nr^ ^rftrs ^tm ^^ j?f tro ?tr<nrtr^ 1 "The 
 
 man having meditated for a short time, said to the mer- 
 chant, ' A fairy having carried away your daughter, has 
 placed her on an inaccessible mountain." 
 
 H " The rain of this time does no good." 
 
 a. In a very good Bengali Grammar published anonymously 
 in Calcutta. 1850, the author, \vho is a native, and evidently 
 well versed in his own laiiffuajre as \vcll as in Sanskrit, seems to
 
 26 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 view these terminations as signs of the locative case, and con- 
 tents himself by saying, " Common names of animals and of 
 those objects which have the power of doing anything, when 
 nominatives to active verbs are sometimes idiomatically used in 
 their locative form." Now the rationale of this is by no means 
 satisfactory. I am myself strongly inclined to consider parite, 
 in the preceding sentence, neither as a nominative nor as a loca- 
 tive, but as an instrumental case. In fact, I believe it to be a 
 Hindi construction, in which tongue the sentence woidd run thus, 
 " Tnmhdrl betl-ko parl-ne lejdkar ek durga parbat-par rakha-hai" 
 
 22. The sign (3 of the accusative is not always required, 
 hence the accusative case, as in our own language, is often 
 the same as the nominative. The (^, however, must not be 
 omitted when there may be the least doubt to which noun 
 the action of the verb tends : i.e., between the accusative 
 and the nominative, as in this instance, c^UlW fo^Utf T^irl 
 f*1*ild^ "the cat having seized the parrot is gone off." 
 Again, in the following example it is omitted, because 
 there can be no ambiguity, as the pronominal adjective 
 ^srf^t^ must ever be preceded by a nominative, expressed 
 or understood ; and consequently the word it qualifies is, 
 by implication, in an oblique case ; and the transitive verb 
 
 marks that this oblique case is the accusative : thus, 
 *nr?r ^rW C^sl srrfrrri <riCeH i " Shortly after (the 
 merchant) having recognized his own. parrot, said"- 
 
 23. The instrumental case denotes agency in general; 
 it terminates, as we have seen, in J), c$, or Jira universally. 
 The words ^V "being previous," and ^"e^ or ^^ "hav- 
 ing an agent," Tf?1 and frtlfl " through," or " by means 
 of," have been sometimes popularly explained to mean 
 "by;" but as all these clearly form compound words they 
 will be more fully treated of hereafter.
 
 REMARKS ON THE CASES. It 
 
 a. In English the sign of the instrumental case is "by," or 
 "with," denoting an agent or instrument. The student must 
 remember, however, that when "with" implies association, it is 
 expressed in Bengali by a word to that effect, cither in the 
 nominative or locative form, governing tbe genitive case : thus, 
 ^Wfa 3FC's > lt4<l <SR TT^ <1CS?<1 >lf\* ^T5 1 " Dove flies with 
 dove, and hawk ivith hawk." 
 
 24. The dative case in Bengali denotes merely acquisition 
 or reception. Like the accusative, it generally takes the 
 sign ($ for its termination. The sign <4? or is rarely 
 employed in prose, but its occurrence in poetry is very com- 
 mon : thus, c^tr CtrlW (Trtft "^sTtfo ^^5 *i^<i 1 J^ w ^5t3fl (TCc? 
 <>/\>i TST? n " Declare then instantly, wretch ! with what 
 crime I am polluted, that thou shouldst address such 
 opprobrious language to me" 
 
 a. The student must bear in mind that when a transitive or 
 neuter verb would in English require " to," denoting motion or 
 conveyance, towards a person or object, it is expressed in Bengali 
 by a word signifying locality, governing the genitive case : thus, 
 <l fWi? ~^t^ 1 " Bring the boy to me." C^Q^ 
 ^-sts<i [K-c'S ^rf^in f^tf^5 <-T^^ 1 " Taking 
 the damsel with them, and having gone to the tree, they repre- 
 sented the matter." It must not be forgotten, however, that 
 these, as well as every other instance of what are improperly 
 called particles, governing a genitive case, may, and perhaps had 
 always better be rendered literally, as fa$<:i? and 7Rt*t " in or 
 to the vicinity," etc. 
 
 25. The ablative in Bengali simply denotes " away 
 from," or " out of." It does not, as in Latin, admit of 
 the significations of the instrumental and locative cases. 
 There are many adjuncts which serve to express the abla-
 
 28 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 tive case, in addition to the regular terminations given in 
 16, a, and for which they may be optionally substituted. 
 They are TTc^ " in a place," 3Tfr^ and ^rfr^rs "in the 
 
 W i 
 
 vicinity," and rarely tt", a corruption perhaps of ^"tir, 
 "in a place ;" these generally, but not invariably, govern 
 a genitive case. When they reject the genitive, which is 
 rare, though optional, they are added like any other termi- 
 nation to the noun: thus, ^ ^*f1 ?1"5Tl r<jp*JlfiTJ 
 
 " King Yikra- 
 
 maditya, on hearing this story from the Brahman, being 
 delighted, gave him ten million pagodas." ?1"rt? f-K-'D ^ 
 <Tt^rl * Wt^iFS c*tsf 5fl ^n f%f; ^f^T sn "On obtaining 
 the pagodas from the King, he quitted not the place, 
 neither did he say anything." 
 
 26. The genitive case is formed, as we have already 
 seen, by adding ^ in words which end in a consonant or 
 in the short inherent a, and by <l in those which end in 
 any vowel, except the short a. It sometimes occurs, how- 
 ever, that the Izdfat, or Persian genitive sign, is employed 
 after a Persian word, when it is the governing noun : thus, 
 03l$lF<fr/"3i ^"*?'n <t-f<i<:sH c*r ^irf? ^^j sr^n:^ ^ TTW ^^ i 
 " The parrot-seller answered, saying, the price of this is 
 the sum of one thousand pagodas," in which the word 
 aNcrcst is the Persian -~- " the sum of." When two 
 nouns are in composition, the case of course is never indi- 
 cated in the first of them, as rstTp-f^Tsr " parrot-tales," 
 i.e., " Tales of a Parrot." In Mr. Yates's Grammar we 
 arc told that " the possessive case is supplied by w*f rup, 
 ' form." Xow the addition of wt to a substantive simply 
 converts the latter into a possessive adjective, which is 
 equivalent to a genitive case: for example, "a wealthy
 
 REMARKS ON THE CASES. 2'J 
 
 man" is synonymous with "a man of wealth." Of this 
 more hereafter. 
 
 27. The locative case, besides the forms given among 
 the terminations of the declensions, 10, a, is very fre- 
 quently made by the noun srcu, or corruptly srtz^f " in the 
 midst," governing the genitive case, or by adding it like 
 any other termination, to the nominative singular of the 
 noun : thus, ^ ^*M ^fsnrl ^t^f c i *rc^? TTCW f^Ft? ^f^R i 
 " Ilaving heard this statement, the Brahman considered in 
 his mind." ^fir Wtfs^ ?1~5fl $t*ij c<i< : 3C?" ^It^St? ^fs i 
 ^Ft*lW f3T3T*rt^ <tf>iiJl ?l6?<t-*j <K<H i "If at any time the 
 King transacted business, then it was in the midst of the 
 assembly, when seated on the throne witli (Queen) Blianu- 
 matl, that he attended to affairs of State." 
 
 Of the Vocative. 
 
 28. The vocative has not a regular termination like the 
 rest of the oblique cases, but is expressed by prefixing or 
 subjoining certain interjections, such as 4, (T, (*f1, (?, fFI, 
 etc., to the nominative. <n is employed in addressing a 
 superior, as <( ^rfsr U master!" or subjoined by way of 
 great endearment, as feftir U my love !" (^ is also used 
 in addressing a superior, as (^ ?t^T| '' king !" or a friend, 
 as (^ fsns " friend!" ff1 is tlic usual interjection em- 
 ployed to express reverence to parents, teachers, an elder 
 brother, or any one to whom superior respect and regard 
 arc intended. (? is employed either for endearment or 
 contempt, as, c? ^C 3 ^ tk my son!" (? ^ ^RW ;; vile 
 Muslim !" fwl is rather a Sanskrit than a Bengali vocative 
 sign ; but when used, it is employed through respect. 
 The particle <? o is prefixed to all these interjections when 
 the person is in sight, as ^ (*M *ri '' O revered mother ! 
 
 "
 
 30 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 ^ (*f| ?fift " my dear mistress !" These signs are occa- 
 sionally put after the noun when the person addressed is 
 present, as f*T3Tc < ?fl " honoured father !" 
 
 . Nouns, which in Sanskrit end in a silent consonant in the 
 vocative, occasionally retain that form in the Bengali, as well as 
 the one which accords with the analogy of its own grammar. 
 Examples: ^TtSR "O king!" In this instance no particle of 
 interjection is either prefixed or subjoined; but it optionally 
 takes one, as (^ <Tf3fr " O king." It would be equally correct in 
 familiar discourse to say c^ <T|T5l "O king!" agreeably to the 
 rule for other nouns. Frequently the vocative is expressed by 
 the noun being simply preceded by ^r " hear," " listen ! " the 
 imperative of the verb ^fsr^S " to hear." 
 
 OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 29. Adjectives in Bengali are prefixed to the nouns they 
 qualify, as they are in English. They have no distinction 
 of number and case ; they may therefore be considered as 
 in composition with their nouns, even though the two 
 words may not join in writing : thus, 
 
 "The Brahman, on hearing this request, having brought 
 delicious-ripe-excellent'fruit) and well-cooled-ivater ) presented 
 them to the King." 
 
 30. The gender of feminine adjectives is marked by the 
 termination ; but masculines and neuters remain unchanged, 
 as in our own language. Most adjectives take ^ri as the 
 sign of the feminine gender : thus, ^fs "srtty crrft frrg"l ^9 yl 
 
 <F<T i " On this the goddess being rendered 
 favourable, having seized hold of the King's hand, said, ' 
 King ! thou art a most worthy man, with thee I am well
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. ol 
 
 pleased, demand a boon." 1 A few adjectives take ^ f long 
 to form the feminine : thus, ^ \\w <$$ ^H^ isft frnCJ '<*<! 
 JQ^ <sn^ UC<- 1 " Then; lie (dead) in that spot a lovely 
 woman and a divinely beautiful youth." 
 
 Of the Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 31. The comparative degree is formed by adding 3? tara, 
 and the superlative by adding ~&f tama to the positive, as 
 wf^t "wise," "QGTfsr^r "wiser," ^ifr-i^ " wisest." So frsa 
 "wise," f?W3?, f<93i^ ; fnr "beloved," fnrs<r "more 
 beloved," fefTTST "most beloved." Tliese forms, however, 
 which are pure Sanskrit, viz., ^ and ^r, though regular, 
 are but little used in ordinary language for the com- 
 parative and superlative degrees. The comparative is 
 most commonly expressed by the positive with a noun in 
 the ablative case ; and the superlative by the positive with 
 an additional word prefixed, as ^ret 5 ? " strong," ^rfsrtr^s 
 
 stronger than I," ^fi5 or ^j-3 ^sRT 5 * " strongest 
 
 o O 
 
 of all," " very or exceedingly strong." 
 
 . There are a few adjectives in Bengali, as in Greek and 
 Latin, which make up for the comparative and superlative 
 decrees by ushi distinct words: thus, ^1 " youns;," ^f^? -"the 
 younger," or "youngest," <T$ "old," (W$ "the older," or 
 " elder," or oldest," r*F3 ' excellent," (^ " more excellent/*' 
 or " most excellent." 
 
 OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 32. The declension of pronouns is the same as that of 
 nouns, admitting the same terminations in the singular 
 and plural, the only difference being, that these are joined to 
 a modified state of the nominative, instead of being joined to 
 that case itself. Example : ^nfa "I," becomes in the oblujno
 
 32 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 cases ^rl^n, and ^fir "tliou," fsTsfl. So that when the 
 modification is known, it is easy to decline any pronoun 
 by subjoining the terminations laid down for nouns. It 
 will be found that the oblique modifications of almost all 
 the pronouns end in 1 a ; hence their locative cases are 
 formed in the same manner as we stated respecting nouns 
 in 1 a (vide 19, ). 
 
 . Pronouns have no particular termination to mark the gen- 
 der ; they are therefore to be translated by a reference to their 
 antecedents : thus OT^~ must, according to circumstances, be 
 rendered by " he," she," " it," or that." 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns. 
 33. ^rffsr " I," oblique modification <srt*fl. 
 
 K"om. "^rffsr I. ^rt^Ti we. 
 
 me. ^srlrrfi^f^fa^ us. 
 
 by or with me. ^rt^rr^fpfzsf^ by or with us. 
 
 to me. ^rfatfif^fr^ to us. 
 
 etc., from me. "srTsrf^fTr^ftrs etc., from us. 
 
 ^ of me, mine. ^rW^fTf^Tt^ etc., of us, our. 
 
 in me. ^rWfe''l7T5 in us. 
 
 a. The fifth and seventh cases singular, and the fifth and 
 sixth plural of all pronouns, take, optionally, the forms men- 
 tioned in 1 7, a ; and the nominative plural is contracted from 
 
 ^5Tf3rf?1 into ^srfairi 
 
 b. The reader is requested to bear in mind that in all works 
 recently printed in the Bengali language, the letter " /, preced- 
 ing the word fpfsf dig (with its terminations), in the oblique cases 
 plural of the pronouns is generally suppressed: thus, instead of 
 ^srt^rr^fw^f^ dmardigke, they say ~^t 5 rffff'5lZ3- umudigke, and so 
 on for all the rest.
 
 34. ^fa u Thou," oblique modification 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 Xom. ^r thou. c^>t*{<i1 ye. 
 
 Ac. c~5t3rf<:> thee. fsT^rr^ffr^fCT- you. 
 
 lust. (At^ft-i by or with thee. c^T^T^fwr^frJ by or with you. 
 
 v %} J 
 
 Dat. (4t*Jl < *' etc., to thee. fTW<n c ? < >f<^ to you. 
 
 v \ J 
 
 Ab. fST^rn:^ etc., from thee. f5PTf?fffC*fir5 from you. 
 
 v J 
 
 Gen. csfrT? of thee, thine. (n^rr^fTrZ^r^ etc., of you, your. 
 Loc. f5W*r in thee. cn^rT^fFc^rrs in you. 
 
 \ v J 
 
 (i. The nominative plural is contracted from ("5tSTt<n into 
 r?1, as the first person a mar a becomes umru. 
 
 Of Personals of Inferiority. 
 
 35. The habit of self-abasement before a superior, and 
 of the assumption of self-importance in speaking to an 
 inferior, have established the use of two personal pronouns, 
 which may be considered as contractions of ^rffa u I," and 
 Itfsr u thou." They are likewise applied in anger and 
 defiance among equals ; but even when they are employed 
 in the plural, they usually take a verb in the singular 
 number: thus, ^C? f-H-l?^ C^riTWl C5t?1 f% Orfenrsf^riT U 
 surrounding multitude ! at what do ye slare ?" 
 
 "sj^ "I," oblique modification (Wl. 
 
 SIXO. TLUR. 
 
 Xom. ^" I. fsrfin we. 
 
 Ac. (3TFF me. CTT^fw^f^ us. 
 
 lust. c^Tftrs by or with me. c^rf^f^^"? by or with us. 
 
 Dat. (HU<fr etc., to me. csrr^frf^j^ etc., to us. 
 
 Ab. c 5r t7T5 etc., from me. C 5 rf^fwz''fr3 etc., from us. 
 
 Gen. csrf^ of me, mine. c^rf^fifZ''^ etc., of us, oiu*. 
 
 Loc. (srftrs in me. (stt~$fm e >ft~s in us. 
 
 3
 
 34 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Thou," oblique modification 
 
 Nom. ^5" thou. C5t?1 ye. 
 
 Ac. (3tE3? thee. (3t<iiTf*tC3? you. 
 
 The other cases may be declined like those of "J^ " I." 
 
 Of Pronouns of the Third Person. 
 
 36. As the pronouns in this language have no gender, 
 they are employed to denote, in an indefinite way, either 
 persons or things, whichever their antecedent may be ; and 
 hence they should be rendered by "he," "she," "it," "this," 
 or " that," as the context may require. Pronouns of the 
 third person are of two kinds, those which apply pronomi- 
 nally and are the real representatives of nouns, as t~fr 
 if^icrisr "he understood;" and those which are used adjcc- 
 tively, and arc then indeclinable, and put before the noun 
 they qualify, after the manner of adjectives, as <3 
 "having heard this story." 
 
 The pronoun fsfr " he," is employed when the person it 
 represents is absent, and may therefore be termed the 
 
 Pronoun Remote. 
 : 'He," "she," "it," oblique modification 
 
 SING. PLVU. 
 
 Xom. fsfr lie, she, it. CS^Ji they. 
 
 Ac. (i^1"c<- him, etc. (^rf? s fwsiz^ them. 
 
 Inst. f5^t(T5 by or with him. (3rf3fFfC*to5 by or with them. 
 
 Dat. cssrtoF etc., to him, etc. C5^T? N f?^<? etc., to them. 
 
 Ab. f^rftrsctc., from him. C5^T?fe^f^5 etc., from them. 
 
 / \ ' 
 
 Gen. C3^T^ of him, etc. C3^T^firZ''r^ etc., of them, their, 
 
 Loc. C5^t^ in him, etc. C3^BntSirs in them. 
 
 S ' N
 
 riiONOUN PROXIMATE. 35 
 
 The pronoun ^fV "lie," is used to designate one who is 
 present and the object of discourse, and may be called the 
 
 Pronoun Proximate. 
 ^fr "He," "she," "it," oblique modification^. 
 
 Nom. fsr he, she, it. T<r| they. 
 
 Ac. ^Hk<J? him, etc. ^f^fifftc* them. 
 
 The other cases arc declined after the same analogy as 
 those of fsfsr, etc. 
 
 37. "Where a mere general reference is made to persons, 
 to whom no respect is expressly intended, it is usual to 
 employ OT^" "lie," "she," "it," or "that," oblique sub- 
 stitute sts[1, by contraction si. 
 
 he, she, it. St$t?fl they. 
 
 Ac. slpU<t- him, etc. SlTT<rfjf*uT3F them. 
 
 x x s s 
 
 Inst. sT^^sbyorwithhim, etc. ^irT^f^^lrrs by or with them. 
 
 Dat. ^5t^lr^ to him, etc. ^T^T^fw^fC^ to them. 
 
 Ab. : 5t^l7:3 from him, etc. ^irf^fFC^Iirs from them. 
 
 Gen. 3tTT<r of him, etc. 'St^Tfe^ of them, their. 
 
 Loc. ^T5r in him, etc. ^T^fe''^ in them. 
 
 The contraction si will make 2 sTre, 3 sirs. 4 sTc^, etc. 
 
 . Where great respect is intended, the nasal is written over 
 the oblique substitute, as ^t5"JT^ ' liiin.*' etc.. and over ~i\ the 
 contracted form in a similar nuuiner. a^ in the fol!o\v5i:U - sentence- : 
 
 r i Therefore
 
 Ob HEXGALI GBAMMAB. 
 
 being your majesty's well-wisher, I mention, for the sake of 
 remembrance, that whatever king; is devoted to dissipation, his 
 empire is ruined, even though his wealth, intellect, and power 
 continue by him." ^fgfi ^f^T^R %? f% rfa 'i " The King inquired, 
 what is his name ?" 
 
 Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 " 
 
 38. The two demonstrative pronouns ^ u this," and i? 
 that," are opposed to each other, and are employed to 
 mark contrariety. ^ designates the object last alluded 
 to, and 4 points out that which was first mentioned, and 
 has often the force of our definite article. See 14. 
 
 ^ " This," contraction ^, oblique modification 
 
 Xom. or ^ this. ^"^T?1 these. 
 
 this. ^tjrffrtfc^ these. 
 by or with this. ^^t^fpfC^t^s by or with these. 
 
 to this. tT^^^t^ T O these. 
 
 from this. '^T^^ ?f ^ 5 from these. 
 
 OI< this. ^T^r^^ of these, their. 
 
 R~R~tir in this. ^T^JTf^fre in these. 
 
 a. Whore great respect is meant, the nasal is written over the 
 modified form of the oblique cases, singular and plural: thus, 
 
 *rf<f^T 1 " In fine, the great men, such as coun- 
 cillors, literati, etc., who were about his uiajesfi/'s person, all died 
 by degrees." 
 
 39. ^r^" or by contraction 4 u That," oblique substitute
 
 REFLECTIVE PRONOUN. 37 
 
 Xom. ^r^" or 4 that. ^9T?n those. 
 
 Ac. ^9~T^ that. ^?t<rfTF*fi^iF them. 
 
 Inst. ^9l7T5 by or with that. ^pt^fw^firs by or with them. 
 
 Dat. ^rrre to that. ^T^fafc* to them. 
 
 Ab. ^17T5 from that. ^T^feffiFS from them. 
 
 Gen. ^^T<r of that. ^^t? v fe^f? s of them, their. 
 
 Loc. ^slir in that. ^S^Tnr^nrs in them. 
 
 a. Where threat respect is meant, the nasal is written over the 
 substitute ^Fl in all the oblique eases, singular and plural. (7[o 
 " that," which has been already declined, is often employed 
 instead of Jf, when the latter is contrasted with ^^ "this/' It 
 is of continual occurrence as an indeclinable pronominal adjec- 
 tive, and may be considered as having the force of the definite 
 article. Example : (Tip ^jfe " thut person." A repetition of 
 C^^ implies succession or distribution, as (^r^ flPTlir ?Tr^t^?1 
 ' the respectable people of the country one after another" 
 
 Of the Reciprocal or Reflective Pronoun. 
 
 40. The pronominal adjective ^^fw "own," is inde- 
 clinable whenever it is employed to qualify a noun ; and 
 as it is the representative of the last nominative in the 
 sentence, it is to be rendered by "my," "thy," "his," 
 "her," "our," "your," or "their," according to the cir- 
 cumstances of its antecedent. It must always have a 
 nominative in the same sentence, cither expressed or un- 
 derstood : thus, ^rffr Tt^t srfoin ^rf*R TT^t 5 ^ ^rffryi rst^t? 
 TTsFTFS <rfwt^ ^f% i "I having gone home, and having 
 brought my son, will offer him a sacrifice in your pre- 
 sence." 4Ff ijfsr ^rfatre *SR1 3lwl '=srf*R *Bf'*t ST 1 " Xow 
 having pardoned me, take your share." 
 
 5rt>T
 
 38 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 " Having considered this, he cut off some flesh from his 
 body, and flung it before the serpent." The adjectives 
 and ''srFsr " own," may be substituted in every case for 
 
 a. From these examples the learner will easily acquire the 
 rule for the application of ^Tt^fT, which is always employed 
 instead of the genitive case of the pronouns " I," " thou," and 
 " he," etc., when these woidd he used in English, immediately 
 with reference to the last nominative in the sentence, in such 
 phrases as "he went to his house," where ^t*^ is used when 
 "his" means "his own," but 35t^t?T would be used for his, if it 
 meant "another man's" house. 
 
 41. The noun ^t^ff^ "self," is the equivalent of our 
 "myself," "thyself," "himself," " herself," " ourselves," 
 " yourselves," and " themselves." It is declinable like 
 the rest of the pronouns : thus, 
 
 Self," oblique modification 
 
 SING. PI/ITR. 
 
 ISTom. <5rf*rf5T self. <srt*Rt<rl selves. 
 
 Ac. ^rr^tr^ self. ^rwr^fiftfc* selves. 
 
 Inst. ^^ttrs by or with self, ^^t^t^fe'^sby or with selves. 
 
 Dat. ^rfsf^rtr^ to self. ^rf^r^T? s fF?)r^ to selves. 
 
 Ab. ^rr^RTrs from self. ^rr^i^t? s f^^f^ from selves. 
 
 Gen. ^rr^RT^ of self. ^rf^PT? s f^ < 'f^ of selves. 
 
 Loc. ^WHT in self. ^^Rt?fe^t^ in selves. 
 
 a. When ^t^tfr " self," is employed, it is of course used 
 nominatively, and not adjectivcly : thus, nfpf ^ <t- *q t ^ fSt^TT? ^twt 
 ^rroT^R -5C* C5t*rfre ^Tf^Rt^ ^^^ ^f?^^T i " Sliouhl your lord 
 return unexpectedly, he will keep you alone wit It himself.'* 
 ^ttfr " self," may immediately follow any of the personal pro-
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 39 
 
 nouns, for the purpose of giving emphasis to the action implied 
 by the verb, as ^{fa <3rf*ffr ^1 ^f?cTt*r " I myse/f <\'n\ that." 
 
 42. "When great respect and deference arc intended in 
 speaking of another, or in addressing one who is present, 
 the word ^Tf^rfr is used, and will then mean " your," or 
 4 'his honour;" "your," or "her ladyship;" or any simi- 
 larly respectful form of address, according to the rank of 
 the person who is intended to be designated. It of course 
 governs the verb in the third person, should it be employed 
 nominatively ; but when used in the oblique cases, it is 
 thus declined : 
 
 "Your honour," etc., oblique modification 
 
 Xom. ^rf^ffr your honour, etc. "^Tt^t^lTI your honours. 
 Ac. ^srf^TUr^ your honour, etc. ^^f^rr^frf^^ your, etc. 
 
 The remaining cases are declined like those of any other 
 pronoun. 
 
 a. The learner cannot fail to have observed the similarity in 
 the use of ^srt^ff^ with the Latin ij>.*:e } in many of the foregoing 
 remarks. A sort of coiitiiiuativc sense is given to words by 
 repeating them,, as c^rt" ^Tf^*. VTR fe^Fsfl ^f^CsR 1 "he 
 
 reflected a lung time in his mind." 
 
 Of the Relative 
 
 43. ftfr " who," is the corresponding relative of the 
 pronoun fsfr "he," etc., and takes for its modified form 
 
 SIXO. PLVU. 
 
 ftrfr -\vho. c^^t?1 who. 
 
 Ac. (iHtd$ whom. cwf^fT??!^ whom.
 
 40 BENGALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 The other cases are declined like those 
 
 The analogous relative of C 3 ^" " he," etc., is c*r " who," 
 " which," "what," oblique substitute 
 
 Nom. c*r who, which, what. *rt^T?1 who, etc. 
 
 Ac. *ri3jc? whom, etc. sm^ffrtftfF whom, etc. 
 
 The other cases are declined like those of 
 
 a. Where great deference is intended to any one, the nasal 
 may be inserted in the oblique substitute., which is then the 
 corresponding relative of ^t^l : thus, (i|*H G3T 3Ft 
 
 ?l T(T?' f '' 1 "Just as the most minute drop of oil 
 can overspread the greatest extent of water, so he who is a hero, 
 having acquired the smallest point of territory in this world, is 
 able in a short space of time, to overrun every (neighbouring 
 kingdom). 
 
 Of the Interrogatives. 
 
 44. The pronoun c$ "who?" "which?" is employed 
 for persons, and f% "what?" "which?" for things; but 
 both (^ and f% take ^t^t for the oblique substitute, which 
 may be contracted into ^1 , by the same analogy that 
 becomes ^1, 
 
 Nom. C$ who ? which ? ?Tt^lTl who ? which ? 
 
 Ac. ^lfw whom ? which ? ^Tffw^t^ whom ? which ? 
 
 The remaining cases are declined after the same analogy 
 as those of the other pronouns. 
 
 ft? " Which ?" " what ?" oblique substitute
 
 INTERROGATE YES. 41 
 
 NEUTER 
 
 ]S T om. fr which '? what ? ^ft[T31 which ? what ? 
 
 Ac. <H?Jd$ which ? what ? -t$t<ifif'>tt^ which ? what ? 
 
 The remaining cases are declined like those of the other 
 pronouns. 
 
 m* " which?" "what?" as m^ ?ifss "what man?" 
 oblique substitutes f^r. It has no plural. 
 
 Nom. (Tf^ which ? what ? 
 Ac. r$*iT$ which ? what ? 
 
 The remaining cases may be declined after the same 
 analogy as the singular cases of other pronouns. 
 
 45. Under the head of pronominal adjectives may be 
 classed (^ "any one," oblique modification w^\. But 
 C^fa and f%|[ " any," " some," ^r^ " other ;" and fsrsr, -*Jl^i, 
 and ^rf^ "own," which have been already alluded to, are 
 all indeclinable without any modification or substitution. 
 
 a. (% is occasionally found repeated, to give an idea of repeti- 
 tion or multiplicity, and may be rendered by ''whatsoever" or 
 '. every,'' as in the following passage : ^jFl1 <T<I^1 "3Z=T <rTSTl 
 SCf^IT? 1 OT (3 ^*T1 ^^ *n&f "Zf* ttS 11 " King Yudhishthir, 
 being moved even unto tears, repeated every word of Narad, 
 chief of sages. (^ (^ " whosoever," "every one," is similarly 
 employed for persons, and takes as its oblique modification 
 (^ Wt^\ C$T*l (^ " any one," is used indefinitely, and takes as 
 its oblique modification (3Tfr ^T^"l The Sanskrit pronouns ^R 
 "that," J^tf "this," and ^Hr "what," are very frequently found 
 in composition, as ^rW^ "that form/' <fT3it?R*f "this form," 
 " what thing," " whatever."
 
 42 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 46. The Bengali verb is extremely simple and regular 
 throughout the whole of its inflections. There is only one 
 conjugation, consisting of nine tenses, and it is applicable 
 to every verb in the language. There are two numbers, 
 the singular and plural, which are very much confounded, 
 the plural being very often made to agree with a singular 
 noun or pronoun, and vice versa. ' The singular number of 
 the verb is generally employed with the plural of nouns 
 and pronouns, denoting inferiors in rank, to mark more 
 particularly the idea of such inferiority. Conversely, when 
 honour or respect is intended, a noun or pronoun in the 
 singular takes the verb in the plural. In consequence of 
 these arbitrary customs, there is a good deal of irregularity 
 in the use of the verbal terminations denoting the singular 
 and plural numbers. 
 
 . The rules relating to the employment of the singular or 
 plural verb shall be more fully treated of in our section on the 
 Syntax of the Language. The subject is here noticed merely 
 that the student may not feel embarrassed in translating the 
 various easy quotations hitherto given in this work. 
 
 47. The second person singular of the imperative, as the 
 shortest and simplest member of the verb, is considered as 
 the root. From this root arc regularly formed two parti- 
 ciples; thus, from the root ^ "make thou," are formed
 
 OF THE VEIIB. 43 
 
 the present participle <Ff?<re " making," by adding the ter- 
 mination itc ; and also the past or conjunctive participle 
 <-P<iil1 "made" or "having made," by adding the termina- 
 tion tf/d to the root. The whole of the nine tenses are 
 derived either immediately from the root, or from one or 
 other of the two foremcntioned participles, as will be seen 
 in the following paradigm. 
 
 a. When the root ends in any vowel, except the inherent a, 
 or in a single consonant, in which case the inherent a is never 
 sounded, the terminations ife and it/a are added to it directly, as 
 we have just seen. If, on the other hand, the root ends in a com- 
 pound consonant, and consequently, by rule, with the inherent 
 short a, the latter is suppressed on receiving the additional ter- 
 minations ife and iya of the participles. It is a rule, however, 
 that even when ending 1 with a compound consonant, the second 
 person singular of the imperative suppresses the inherent short a 
 in order to distinguish the same from the second person plural. 
 
 48. We shall now proceed to exemplify the conjugation 
 of a Bengali verb, briefly noticing the mode of forming 
 each tense or part as we go along. We may observe in 
 the mean time that the form in which the Bengali verb is 
 always found in the dictionary is that of a verbal noun, as 
 3F?1 "a doing," rendered in English "to do,'.' ScR "a 
 moving/' cffr "a seeing," (crsfr "a writing." This verbal 
 noun is formed by adding the termination *t an to the root, 
 except when the latter ends in ?, and in a few other 
 instances of Sanskrit formation, in which case the cerebral 
 l an or nd is added. We shall select as our model the 
 transitive verb ^q "making" or "doing." Observe, at 
 the same time, that the first persons singular and plural 
 are the same throughout.
 
 44 BEXGALl GRAMMAR. 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 Eoot^( "Do thou." 
 Present Participle ^f%T3 " Doing." 
 
 Past or Conjunctive Participle <tf<iyl "Done" or " having 
 
 done." 
 
 1st. Present Indefinite Tense, formed by adding to the 
 root the terminations i, is, and e respectively, for the three 
 persons singular ; and i, a, and en, for the plural : thus, 
 
 1. ^f? I do. 1. ^f?r we do. 
 
 2. ^f?f5T thou dost. 2. ^<r you do. 
 
 s > 
 
 3. ^? he does. 3. ^?w they do. 
 
 2nd. Present Definite Tense, formed by adding to the 
 present participle the terminations chid, chhis, clihe, for the 
 singular ; and chid, chhd, chhen, for the plural : thus, 
 
 I am doing. <t-f<i(:ir^ we arc doing. 
 
 T thou art doing. ^f%r5^ you are doing. 
 he is doing. ^f^as^r they are doing. 
 
 3rd. Past Indefinite Tense, formed by adding to the root 
 the terminations ildm, Hi, ild or ilele, for the singular ; and 
 i lam, ild, ilcn, for the plural : thus, 
 
 ^f%rfsT I did. ^f?srfsr AVG did. 
 
 % thou didst. ?-f?cTl you did. 
 
 or -^ he did. ^f?n/5TV they did. 
 
 4th. Imperfect Tense, formed by adding to the present 
 participle the terminations chldldm, chldli, chhild or chhiielc, 
 for the singular ; and chldldm, chhild, c/ihilen, for the 
 plural : thus,
 
 OF THE VERB. 45 
 
 ^ I was doing. ^-f^rsf^rt^ wo were doing. 
 
 tliou wast doing. <-f<i(:ir^^1 you were doing. 
 or -4- he was doing. ^f?ref^T^ they were doing. 
 
 5th. Perfect Tense, formed by adding to the past or con 
 junctive participle the terminations of the present definite : 
 thus, 
 
 I have done. <<r<iyTfV we have done. 
 
 tliou hast done. <T<iyt'^' you have done. 
 he has done. ^f^irnr^T they have done. 
 
 Gth. Pluperfect Tense, formed by adding to the past par- 
 ticiple the terminations of the imperfect tense : thus, 
 
 I had done. ^fwfft ^'e had done. 
 
 tliou hadst done. ^f^rtf^n you had done. 
 or -^ he had done. <-f<tiltf^(^T^ they had done. 
 
 7th. Future Tense, formed by adding to the root the 
 terminations ild, ill, lie or ilcJc, for the singular ; and ild, 
 ild, ibcn, for the plural : thus, 
 
 -r<t< I shall or will do. <f^$ we shall or will do. 
 
 tliou wilt do. <t-T<i<1 you will do. 
 
 or c^? he will do. <-f<l<:<M they will do. 
 
 8th. Conditional Tense, formed by adding to the root the 
 terminations itdm, ill or it is, itu, for the singular ; and Ham, 
 ltd, iten, for the plural : thus, 
 
 I did or would do. ^f^stsr AVC did or would do. 
 
 \ 
 
 or ^-FfifiiH tliou wouldst do. ^f?T| you did or would do. 
 
 \ .' 
 
 he did or would do. -r<t<:J they did or would do.
 
 46 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 9th. Imperative Mood, formed by adding to the root the 
 terminations i, is, uk, for the singular ; and i, d } aha or io 
 and un, for the plural : thus, 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 3 let me do. 3-f? let us do. 
 
 <r or <?f<iii do thou. ^<r, ^3^? or ^f?^ ao ye. 
 
 let him do. <$w* let them do. 
 
 The remaining parts of the verb are 1st. The Infinitive, 
 to do," or "make," which is the same as the pre- 
 sent participle already described. 2nd. The Verbal Noun, 
 ^?ro " the act of doing" (already mentioned), and ^<rj u the 
 doing," in an abstract sense. 3rd. The Present Participle, 
 3f?HT5 (already mentioned), and contracted ^^ " doing" or 
 " making." 4th. The Passive Participle, ^s " done," 
 which is borrowed from the Sanskrit, and not reducible, like 
 the other parts, to any general rule. 5th. The Conjunctive 
 Past Participle, ^f%, ^ferrl, ^?J|, 3RT?, "done," or "having 
 done." 6th. The Adverbial Participle, qfgtt "on doing," or 
 "being done," formed by adding He to the root. 7th. The 
 Gerund, Nom. 3f?Rl "doing;" Dat. <Ff?Rt<r "to do," or 
 "for the doing;" Gen. ^f|Rt? "of doing;" Loc. ^rcfr? 
 " in doing." 
 
 40. As a further example, we here subjoin the verb 
 \** ct> ha-ite, "to be," or "to become," which is quite 
 regular and, like our own verb "to be," is of frequent 
 occurrence as an auxiliary. It will, at the same time, 
 serve as a model for any verb formed from, a root which 
 ends in a vowel.
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 1st. Indefinite. 
 
 T am or become. 
 T thou art, etc. 
 he is, etc. 
 
 ^ o we are or become. 
 ^ you are, etc. 
 ^ they are, etc. 
 
 2nd. Present Definite. 
 
 I am becoming. ^^"d-ftfV we are becoming. 
 
 thou art becoming, ^o (.^ you arc becoming. 
 he is becoming. ^3* cic^* they are becoming. 
 
 3rd. Simple Preterite. 
 
 I was or became. ^o cripsr we were or became. 
 thou wast, etc. ^p dl you were, etc. 
 
 he was, etc. ^^c^^ they were, etc. 
 
 4th. Imperfect. 
 
 ^it I was becomin, 
 
 ? f% thou wast becoming. ^ 
 or -Ji he was be- 9 
 
 comn. 
 
 n. 
 
 5th. Perfect. 
 
 I have been, etc. 
 thou hast been. 
 ho has been. 
 
 Gth. Pluperfect. 
 
 sr I had been, etc. 
 thou hadst boon. 
 he had boon. 
 
 we were becoming. 
 
 you were becoming. 
 
 they were becom- 
 
 we have been. 
 you have been. 
 t they have been. 
 
 ^ we had been. 
 you had been. 
 the had beeu.
 
 48 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 7th. Future. 
 
 SING. 
 
 I shall be or become, 
 thou shalt be. 
 r or -^ he shall be. 
 
 8th. Conditional. 
 
 s I would be. 
 
 or ^$ P**i thou wouldst be. 
 he would be. 
 
 we shall be. 
 you shall be. 
 the shall be. 
 
 we would be. 
 you would be. 
 they would be. 
 
 9th. Imperative. 
 
 3ft" let me be or become. ^t" let us be or become. 
 
 ^e be thou, etc. ^ or ^>e be ye, etc. 
 
 ? let him be, etc. ^%^ or d^ let them be, etc. 
 
 or 
 
 The remaining parts are The Infinitive, ^T5 "to be," 
 or " to become." Participle Past, ^ " been," " become." 
 Conjunctive,, ^, ^? til "being," " having been," or "having 
 become." Adverbial, 3^"&s\ a on being," or "becoming." 
 Gerund, ^Tl "being;" ^t"Tfr? "to," or "for being;" 
 3^~3t<r " of being ;" ^^tc? " in being." Verbal Noun t ^^ 
 or ^-sirl u being," or "becoming." 
 
 Of Causal Verbs. 
 
 50. Any verb may be rendered causal by adding ^rl 
 to the root, as ^ "do," wl "cause to do." If the root 
 end in ^ originally, it is made causal by adding ^Tl ivd 
 (soe 9), as *n "eat," <TT>e?1 "cause to eat" (feed). All 
 causal verbs arc conjugated after the foregoing example; 
 but for the sake of making the subject quite clear, the first
 
 CAUSAL VK1U5S. 49 
 
 person of every tense of the verb $4t^C* u to cause to do," 
 
 JL J ' 
 
 or " cause to make," is subjoined : thus, 
 
 1st. Present Indefinite, <-<itQ " I cause to do," etc. 
 2nd. Present Definite, <r-<il diffe> "I am causing to do," 
 etc. 
 
 3rd. Past Indefinite, ^t^rt-r "I caused to do," etc. 
 
 J \ 7 
 
 4th. Imperfect, ^t^T^f^rf^ " I Avas causing to do," etc. 
 
 JL *f J \ O 
 
 5th. Perfect, ^T^"?tf% "I have caused to do," etc. 
 Gth. Pluperfect, <J?<U<? illHj^fsr " I had caused to do," etc. 
 7th. Future, Wl^"3 " I shall or will cause to do," etc. 
 8th. Conditional, W$W~5\?{ " I would cause to do," etc. 
 9th. Imperative, ^?tt" " let me cause to do," etc. 
 
 The remaining parts arc 1st. The Infinitive, -<i|5> CA "to 
 cause to do," or "make." 2nd. Vc rial Noun, ^rfl Jcardnd, 
 
 i , ' 
 
 in which the inherent final d is alwavs to be sounded, 
 
 V / 
 
 "the act of causing to do." 3rd. Present Participle, 
 <$4l9 Cxi " causing to do." 4th. Passive Participle. ^Tjrf 4 ! 
 
 ^ o J. i 
 
 " caused to be done." oth. Conjunctive Past Participle, 
 <><1|9 , ^-fU^yl "having caused to do," or "to be done." 
 Gth. Adverbial, <Hl9 t*r " on causing," or " being caused to 
 do." 7th. Gerund, ^T^Ti " causing to do," <-<t|$ <tl<:<l "for 
 causing to do," ^tR"^1? " of causing to do," ^ttXft? "in 
 
 O / N \ * ' / > 
 
 causing to do.' 
 
 " 
 
 . We may here remark that in all verbs whose root ends in 
 ^5 whether they be eausals or not, the second person plural of 
 the present and imperative is formed by adding ^ to the root: 
 thus ?T<r|^ "you cause to do," or " cause you to do." The third 
 person singular of the present indefinite tense is formed hy 
 adding IT to the root: thus, 3F<rtrr "he causes to do." The same 
 rule, as we may observe, applies to the verb jj^TS lia-itc, "'to 
 be," whose root ends in the short a.
 
 50 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 51. The following alphabetical list of roots of the most 
 common transitive and intransitive verbs will prove highly 
 useful to the learner. They arc therefore here given, partly 
 for exercise in conjugating the verb, and partly for the 
 purpose of being committed to memory. By subjoining 
 ^TT5 to any of these roots, the infinitive may be formed ; 
 and the verbal nouns in ^r and ^rl may be made by add- 
 ing these last terminations to the root. In forming the 
 verbal noun in ^rl with roots which end in a vowel, the 
 termination ^fl, and not ^, is subjoined to the root, to 
 
 / / \} j 
 
 prevent a hiatus in the sound: thus ^ u be," makes ^jl 
 "the being." Any root, as has been mentioned, may be 
 made causal by subjoining ^rl to it. The last letter of 
 every one of the following roots, if a consonant, is deprived 
 of the inherent short d : even when preceded by another 
 consonant ; thus the word ^^ as a verbal root, denoting 
 "mark thou," is sounded auk] but as a substantive, de- 
 noting " a mark," or in the second person plural, denoting 
 " ye mark," or " mark ye," of the verb, it is sounded anJcd. 
 
 mark 
 worship 
 ~5Tsf earn 
 inherit 
 
 !i -serve 
 come 
 r attack 
 
 dash 
 respect 
 bring 
 invite 
 
 begin 
 
 irto worship 
 
 ^sri abate 
 
 :?t^" mount 
 
 ^t tremble 
 
 ?fT^r converse 
 
 ^? do 
 
 %^ embrace 
 
 ^ tighten 
 
 tfm cheer 
 
 <^" say 
 
 if wish 
 
 ^f& cut 
 
 arise 
 
 f T*T tremble 
 
 fly 
 
 ^T1 earn, sh 
 
 ? alight, arrive 
 
 ^T^f coim'h 
 
 CJ 
 
 ft? belch 
 
 f%^ buy 
 
 i? overset 
 
 3n> pound 
 
 ^Tt thunder 
 
 W% pardon
 
 VF.HHAL ROOTS. 
 
 51 
 
 ^ ooze, drop 
 
 fFsr recognise 
 
 FF snap, break 
 
 ^fsT wash, purify 
 
 / i. */ 
 
 fFTl chew 
 
 "&? fear 
 
 Csp^f cast, iling 
 
 / u 
 
 fF<r tear 
 
 w% grind 
 
 ^^ break, efface 
 
 j; ooze, leak 
 
 ^5T^ call, send for 
 
 T| eat 
 
 5^ err 
 
 ^T drown 
 
 *T?r open 
 C*f5T sport 
 
 JT kiss 
 CFFl scream 
 
 FrT cover 
 Ff^T pour 
 
 C<fli5f seek 
 
 CF51 make aware 
 
 TTs beat 
 
 Crt?1 lose 
 *T5f roar 
 
 (F? split, rend 
 (Ff^ suck 
 
 fs^r stay 
 CTf^r gladden 
 
 I fashion 
 
 ^T deceive 
 ^1 cover, thatch 
 
 CTj^T weigh 
 rs? abandon 
 
 *tl count 
 
 ^fs quit 
 
 tt^ dwell 
 
 *tT melt 
 
 Wt*r knead 
 
 tf*T see 
 
 *fl sing 
 
 ^ escape 
 
 ifsT tread on 
 
 sri? elapse 
 
 C^1~5 fire a gun 
 
 trts[ burn 
 
 5T rub 
 
 : Sr3T produce 
 
 Or give 
 
 frT% perspire 
 
 W? decay, digest 
 
 C?^ sec 
 
 w? revolve 
 
 : srR know 
 
 Ott^ swincr 
 
 j 
 
 C*T? surround 
 
 W[^\ lii;ht 
 
 *J 
 
 (Ff^; milk 
 
 FS mount 
 
 fsrsotJT ask 
 
 OTl"? run 
 
 Fsre start 
 
 fsr^ will 
 
 st^ snub 
 
 F? graze 
 
 ^tn revive 
 
 sr? seize 
 
 F5T move 
 
 fSftFj yke (cattle). 
 
 ^rr? hold, keep 
 
 * J taste 
 
 r5ff"5 join 
 C^rfi; till 
 
 C*fi wash 
 ^1F dance 
 
 FtJ1 lap 
 
 "^r burn 
 
 rf^r descend 
 
 Ff^ lick 
 
 WT5 brush off 
 
 ^T^f destroy 
 
 Ff^f compress 
 
 <^rT s win 12: 
 
 Ov 
 
 tF mature 
 
 Ff^r remove 
 
 C^rt^ bend down 
 
 *f read 
 
 Ft^l phnm-h 
 
 I o 
 
 w 
 
 Ff^ stitch 
 
 ^5 fall, read 
 
 Ff^; wish 
 
 Ff^T pull 
 
 n^T1 iiee
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 arrve 
 *fl get 
 ^ ripen 
 
 be able 
 sT nourish 
 
 slip 
 ask 
 bury 
 worship 
 fill 
 drink 
 arrive 
 bury 
 rear up 
 ? put forth 
 blossom 
 
 engage (in 
 any act) 
 enter 
 praise 
 Trf? beat 
 
 ?r wash, purify 
 entreat 
 ? send 
 ?f^ bear fruit 
 f^<f turn round 
 wblow (as breath) 
 ^^?l bawl 
 ^ burst, boil 
 
 <r-vT > \Vrli 
 
 ; !;np; 
 ~r<3 deceive 
 
 FT^I grumble 
 
 change 
 kill 
 
 venerate 
 bind 
 s forsake 
 q describe 
 ST tell 
 ST sit 
 
 3" carry, blow, flow 
 survive 
 sound 
 bind 
 <t<[ hinder 
 like well 
 scent 
 return 
 , T spoil 
 
 investigate 
 strew 
 split 
 perforate 
 annihilate 
 bring forth 
 young 
 oppose 
 delay 
 mourn 
 delight 
 <T lay open 
 "J forget 
 comprehend 
 
 drown 
 
 weave, sow seed 
 sell 
 enclose 
 
 pace up and 
 down 
 bore 
 sit 
 
 perceive 
 plant, sow 
 overspread 
 worship 
 r be full 
 ST abuse 
 break 
 fry 
 think 
 wet 
 ITS? enjoy 
 ^T forget 
 f5 be ornamented 
 c^T roam 
 5T5F sink 
 ^r<[ die 
 5T5T rub 
 beg 
 obey 
 measure 
 strike 
 be effaced
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 CsrTs twist 
 
 fast write 
 
 OFt toast, warm 
 
 *n go 
 
 W| conceal 
 
 ON. 
 
 THS rot 
 
 *rt5 beg 
 
 o 
 
 e?n> plunder 
 
 sr^t gratify 
 
 / 
 
 (*rt< give battle 
 
 C=T4{ write 
 
 ipT^ give in charge 
 
 ?^1 colour 
 
 (cTft plaster, smear 
 
 l3ln converse 
 
 <TF compose 
 
 over 
 
 "^ endure 
 
 ^ remain 
 
 C^rf^ tumble 
 
 ^Ttsf be in order 
 
 <P5P preserve 
 
 C^Tt^t obliterate 
 
 C^n? sprinkle, irri- 
 
 ?T*t keep, put 
 
 J. 7 J. 
 
 C?rl~wl cause to covet 
 
 gate 
 
 (<rfrF ward off, pre- 
 
 "*rt*f curse 
 
 : * 3 5T*f touch 
 
 vent 
 
 f*ft learn 
 
 f be 
 
 C?Hf weep 
 
 "^ dry 
 
 ^ fall back 
 
 (Tf*t plant 
 
 "^^ smell 
 
 ^? seize 
 
 (Tfa be enraged 
 
 O 
 
 ^ hear 
 
 ^t^ bawl 
 
 T take 
 
 C*lir sew 
 
 frtl pant 
 
 CTW cling, hang 
 
 r*Tti? grieve 
 
 ft? lose 
 
 fight c*tT^ pay (a debt), ^TT laugh 
 
 join, apply correct (a writing) f^ "^ injure 
 
 O/" Irregular Verbs. 
 
 52. There are but three verbs in Bengali which arc 
 irregular, and that only in a very slight degree. 1. The 
 verb fif^s " to give," makes W^ "they give," in the third 
 person plural of the present indefinite, and Of^ in the 
 verbal noun. 2. The verb ^rif^TCij " to come" takes ^" 
 after its first syllable ^rl in the indefinite tense, and in the 
 imperative, as ^|Q f^ 1 u I come," etc. ; and the simple pre- 
 terite may be formed by adding its terminations either 
 to ^rfTT or to ^rl, making either ^rff^Tt^r or ^rf^rT^T etc. 
 3. The verb *rf^"re " to go," in the perfect and pluperfect 
 tenses, formed, as we have already shown, from the con- 
 junctive past participle, changes *rrv?rl " having gone" into
 
 54 BENGALI GBAMXAE. 
 
 as frf?rif^TT^ " I had gone," etc. But f^n and 
 are both correct when the conjunctive past participle is 
 used alone. The simple preterite and adverbial participle 
 take crt instead of *ri, as c^f^tsr " I went," (*fr=T " on being 
 
 gone." 
 
 . In poetry the simple preterite and adverbial participle are 
 very often contracted in such words as have a semi-vowel for 
 their second consonant, as G3FsTt*r for ^f^TTsT, t^TfST for *jf<jsnt?r; 
 
 S N \ S 
 
 so Z$Z*T for ^T*T, etc. The expression *r| ffff^TS "not to be 
 able" is sometimes contracted to Tff^TS, and then conjugated 
 like a simple verb. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 53. The passive voice may be formed in two different 
 ways in this language. The first is formed like our own, 
 with the passive participle of a transitive verb, and the 
 auxiliary ^iTs " to be," as sr ^*-cs " to be killed." This 
 form is peculiar to verbs of Sanskrit origin, which on such 
 occasions borrow the regular passive participle of the latter 
 language, which commonly ends in "3 fa for the masculine 
 and neuter, and ~5\ td for the feminine. The second or 
 common Bengali mode is by conjugating the verbal noun 
 that ends in "^rj, such as ^<r| u the doing," with the auxili- 
 ary irf^TS " to go." When this last form is used, it im- 
 plies that the object attains the result of the action, that 
 the noun implies, which is just the equivalent of what the 
 other forms express; for when we say "he is killed by 
 the man," we infer that " he is gone to the state of death 
 by means of the man : " thus, ^ 3-Jft ^sT^T spit >R-<:cl<t 3Frff 
 TtTi "5TR1 srtrr i u mistress ! the good and bad qualities of 
 all yo to discovery by words, ?>., arc discovered by words."
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. O-) 
 
 a. There arc two other ways of making a sort of passive voice, 
 but not so common as the preceding forms. One is by conju- 
 gating the conjunctive past participle of the causal verb with 
 $ C 4 u to become :" thus, isrfsfsr "Tf fw$] ^fyyl >i<"v1 f^ra" ^f^ y1 
 
 ^oci 1 " Having applied his mouth, and sucked, all the poison 
 irus extracted." The other, which is apparently a Hindi idiom, 
 is formed by simply using the transitive verb, and throwing the 
 agent, or what ought to be the nominative case, into the instru- 
 mental form: thus, ^JZjyCA vj?(iu TT~?rf^, "The man was 
 devoured by the tiger, or the tiger devoured the man/' In this 
 example, it will be seen that the instrumental (~5 is used for the 
 Hindi ne\ and in the latter tongue the expression would be, 
 " liugli tie tnanitsh ho khiiija luii" 
 
 h. The verb *tt^T5 " to eat," and metaphorically to suffer," 
 is very frequently employed with a noun expressive of some 
 affliction to form the passive, as ^8T *Tf^ {. A " to suffer pain," 
 i.e., " to l>e pained." 
 
 c. When the verb *tT<r5 "to get" is conjugated with an 
 infinitive or past participle, they may together be considered as 
 forming a sort of passive, as eft^t^ **% *ff^"T| "you icill be 
 destroyed by grief." 
 
 54. The first or indefinite tense of each of the two modes 
 of forming the passive is here given ; and all the other 
 tenses may be conjugated after the same analogy. 
 
 First or Sanskrit Form of the Passive Present Indefinite. 
 
 W$ ^q" I am made. "5T5 ^" we are made. 
 
 "ST5 ^~?T thou art made. ^s ^ you are made. 
 ^~5 ^r he is made. '5T5 ^ they are made. 
 
 The other tenses are to he conjugated by subjoining the 
 remaining tenses of ^e (,-t ' to become," to "5T5 "made," or 
 any other passive participle.
 
 56 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Second or Idiomatic Form of the Present Indefinite. 
 
 ^r\ *rf$" I am made. ^1 srt^" we are made. 
 
 ^?1 irff"*T thou art made. ^?1 *rf you are made. 
 
 \ */ 
 
 ^31 *rtir lie is made. wi ^rf^ they arc made. 
 
 a. The other tenses are to be formed by subjoining the re- 
 maining; tenses of srio (.3 "to go,'' to ^"^1 "the doing," or any 
 similar verbal noun. The two other forms of the passive, alluded 
 to in 51, a, require no further notice here ; a reference to what 
 we have already stated will be sufficient to make them com- 
 pletely understood. 
 
 55. As the past and passive participles are not formed 
 according to the rules of Bengali grammar, but are bor- 
 rowed almost at pleasure from the Sanskrit, it has been 
 thought that a selection" of those in most common use may 
 be of service to the learner, and they are here accordingly 
 subjoined in alphabetical order. 
 
 Past and Passive Participles. 
 
 marked, superscribed wlrfPsgrg desirous 
 attached to "srf^ approached, come 
 
 not favourable, not ^rf^ obtained 
 propitious, unpropitious ^RiJlftt-s rejoiced, delighted 
 2f^r5 not prepared, taken ^i? pained, afflicted 
 by surprise ^rt^r^ attached, addicted 
 
 known, understood ^^Tffirs pleased, elated 
 bent down, prostrate ^ wished, desired 
 
 remained, left ^"^ said, spoken 
 
 not able, unable ^sfg" produced, arisen 
 
 not polished, clownish ^f%$ dejected, sad, vexed 
 t fatigued, laborious ^rg crazy, crazed
 
 PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 instructed, initiated 
 arrived, alighted 
 entered, seated 
 fitted to, proper 
 arrived, at hand 
 fs earned, acquired 
 made, done 
 re enraged, incensed 
 purchased, bought 
 angered, angry 
 fatigued 
 
 wearied, harassed 
 wounded, cut 
 pacified 
 
 (over-)thrown, frantic 
 wasted 
 
 composed, fashioned 
 gone, elapsed 
 
 sung, chaunted 
 seized, devoured 
 cut off, divided, severed 
 wt~5 born 
 
 rsT93fr>i3 asked, inquired of 
 fsrs conquered, vanquished 
 
 known 
 pleased 
 
 abandoned, forsaken 
 given 
 ^ pained 
 spoiled, corrupted 
 seen 
 tied, begirt 
 
 destroyed, perished 
 sleepy, drowsy 
 fixed in, appointed 
 gone out, issued 
 blown out 
 formed, constructed 
 conducted 
 cooked ; ripe 
 learned 
 fallen 
 overcome 
 manifested 
 blossomed ; elated 
 entered 
 
 pleased ; favourable 
 bound ; set 
 
 blown (as a flower), 
 expanded 
 
 renowned 
 split, rent, torn 
 ~& estranged, alienated 
 f?f*f distinguished 
 
 spread out, detailed 
 surprised, astonished 
 known, comprehended 
 increased, enlarged 
 
 surrounded 
 5 pained 
 agitated 
 eaten 
 
 thoughtful, melancholy 
 divided, broken off
 
 58 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 terrified, frightened 
 
 eaten 
 become 
 
 adorned (with jewels) 
 fallen, strayed 
 conceived 
 drunk 
 
 liberated 
 
 deprived of reason 
 dead 
 fought 
 
 deprived of, void 
 hindered, confined 
 ashamed 
 
 able 
 
 quieted, placid 
 
 polished, polite 
 
 dried, dry 
 
 tired 
 heard 
 
 joined together 
 pleased, delighted 
 
 given in charge to 
 agreed to, approved of 
 accomplished 
 brought forth 
 slept 
 
 *[ created 
 bathed 
 
 fixed, settled, placed 
 remained 
 
 assented to 
 remembered 
 
 $ destroyed, slain, killed 
 5 offered (as an oblation) 
 ^f pleased, elated 
 
 Of Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 50. The impersonal voice implies the natural and spon- 
 taneous occurrence of anything, or the necessity of the 
 performance of any act. It is either inflected like the 
 passive voice, but only in the third person, or it is made by 
 
 to be, 
 
 n 
 
 conjugating any infinitive with the verb ^9 
 the third person, as in the following example : 
 ^*f|^T ^f?n/3 ;>T3" i "It will now be proper to put in force some 
 other stratagem." "When the ordinary operations of nature 
 are to be described, the neuter or passive verb is employed 
 as an impersonal ; but only in the third person. When 
 Hie moral necessity of an act is to be described, the infini- 
 tive of an act to be done is employed, as the gerund is
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 59 
 
 in Latin, being in general preceded by the noun or pro- 
 noun in the dative case, of the person who is influenced to 
 do the act ; and the auxiliary verb is always in the third 
 person : thus, 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 ill 9 C4 sir it is necessary for me to go. 
 srffr-5 5^1 it is necessary for thcc to go. 
 
 it is necessary for him (or her) to go. 
 
 sir it is necessary for us to go. 
 
 it is necessary for you to go. 
 r it is necessary for them to go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ^T~5 ^t~*T it was necessary for me to go. 
 *rTT3 ^R~T it was necessary for thee to go. 
 it was necessary for him to go. 
 
 ^^r it was necessary for us to go. 
 ^-^r it was necessary for you to go. 
 CT it was necessary for them to go. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 d it had been necessary for me to go. 
 
 it had been necessary for thee to go. 
 =T it had been necessary for him to go. 
 
 T it had been necessarv for us. etc. 
 
 " 
 
 T it had been necessary for you, etc. 
 ffT it had been necessary for them, etc.
 
 60 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Future. 
 
 it will be necessary for me to go. 
 it will be necessary for thee to go. 
 it will be necessary for him to go. 
 
 it will be necessary for us to go. 
 it will be necessary for you to go. 
 iU ke necessary for them to go. 
 
 57. The conjunctive past participle may be conjugated 
 with the auxiliary verb sttfes "to remain," throughout 
 every tense, to imply the probable occurrence of any event ; 
 and preceded by the sign sfft "if," of the conditional, it 
 will form a compound subjunctive mood : thus, 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 die. *rf%n sflf^ we die. 
 
 thou dicst. srf^rl fli? you die. 
 he dies. srf?r?n T|T^T they die. 
 
 The other tenses of this compound verb are conjugated 
 like any of the preceding examples : thus, *lz? C^r|" "$ft srcw 
 3fjr?re o$ c^tn yP<iyl Tff<-<:<<t- 1 u The woman then thought 
 in her OAVH mind, ' the parrot will (most probably) be dead.' r ' 
 
 58. The verb fwtt "to give" is very frequently used 
 after a conjunctive past participle, and seems to add 
 nothing to the sense of the simple verb in the same tense 
 thus, ^re <& wtfr wfsf 5 ? ^tfr? yr^^rrf^t ^t~^ f^stf? ^T(^rf^ 
 ^fwi fwc~s ^iasl ^%^ 1 " For this reason I will accompany 
 my husband (to heaven) ; let therefore an order be issued 
 to prepare the funeral pile," etc.
 
 THE NEGATIVE VERB. 61 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 ft I make. <*f<itl1 fir wo make. 
 
 fir*T thou makest. <-f<iyl ( or <&$ you make. 
 3f?nrl Of he makes. <T<iyl Of^ they make. 
 
 a. The otlicr tenses of this compound verb are to be conju- 
 gated with the remaining tenses of fjfTTS " to give," as flrCif^ 
 " I am giving," fwf^ " I gave," ftfref^rfsj " I was giving," 
 fifnf^ " I have given," Hryin^!^ " I had given," fTR " I will 
 give," fTTjrfsr " I did or would give." 
 
 It. When the verb Hf^T3 is conjugated with the conjunctive 
 past participle, the compound verb has very much the same force 
 as an English verb followed by the words " off," or " away," as 
 sis *i1 *T|3 "carry off," in the foregoing passage, and in tf y? \ 
 in the following one : f%ir ^fsr "WTWT^ ?1~5rr? fW^ ^9 yl 
 1 " But do you, having carried me 
 
 aicay into the King's presence, try my medical skill." 
 
 c. The verb f^f^RTS "to fling," "cast," is sometimes conju- 
 gated with the conjunctive past participle of an active verb, to 
 express that an act has been done thoroughly, as <-f<!JI1 C^f^r 
 " I do (it) thoroughly." This auxiliary may be used throughout 
 all the tenses. Similar to the analogy of the foregoing examples, 
 many other verbs, such as ^TfefiTS " to keep," etc., may be em- 
 ployed as auxiliaries to conjugate the conjunctive past participles 
 of verbs. 
 
 Of the Negative Verb. 
 
 59. Any verb may be made to express negation by sub- 
 joining r| "not" to it, as ^f^rfsr n k 'I did not make." 
 AVhen *rft", or r|f^; instead of *n, is subjoined to the inde- 
 finite tense, it gives it the sense of any past tense, accord- 
 ing as the context requires : thus, *rfa^
 
 62 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 1 " As long as this nosegay shall remain fresh, so 
 long you may be certain that I am pure ; in no way shall 
 I have fallen (from virtue)." 
 
 The negative -r is very frequently inflected in the inde- 
 finite tense like a verb, to express the same sense as 
 u to be," when followed by the negative ^ri : thus, 
 
 visit my lover, yet without your consent it is not proper 
 for me to go." 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 rf^", or rf^ 1 1 am not. rfir, t^'j or^rf^weare not. 
 or ^rf^FT thou art not. r^ ^ you are not. 
 or rtT^' he is not. SR n^w they are not. 
 
 Of the Defective Auxiliary. 
 
 60. The present definite, the imperfect, the perfect, and 
 the pluperfect are conjugated, as we have seen, by means 
 of an inseparable auxiliary. This auxiliary is a corruption 
 of the Sanskrit root ^pr "to be," into ^t^, and is very 
 commonly used as a descriptive verb. There are but two 
 tenses to this auxiliary, the indefinite and the simple pre- 
 terite, each of which takes the terminations laid down for 
 those tenses in 46. 
 
 Present Indefinite. 
 
 I am. ^rTf^ 1 we are. 
 
 thou art. ^T^" you are. 
 
 he is. ^rl7:^ they arc.
 
 DEFECTIVE AUXILIARY. G3 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 srfsr I was. ^rffwfsr wo wore. 
 
 ^T thou wast. '--ail 1^*11 you were. 
 
 si he was. ^rff^dsH they were. 
 
 Following the same analogy, the particle ^ u truly," 
 " indeed," is inflected, and agrees as a verb with the 
 agent. 4*& ^ift fenr5<rsr? ^fifrtC"T ^|P til 
 
 % =r| i "I am now going to 
 my best beloved, and shall first try his understanding, 
 whether he is truly clever or not." 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 ?i^ I am indeed. ^ we are indeed. 
 
 thou art indeed. ^ you are indeed. 
 
 he is indeed. ^c^ they are indeed.
 
 64 
 
 SECTION IY. 
 
 OF PARTICLES AND NUMERALS. 
 
 61. Under the term Particles we include Adverbs, Pre- 
 positions, Conjunctions, and Interjections, each of which 
 we shall here briefly describe in their order. 
 
 OF ADVERBS. 
 
 62. The adverbs form by far the most numerous class 
 of the particles. They may be conveniently arranged 
 under three heads, viz., first, those relating to time ; second, 
 those relating to place ; and lastly, those denoting quality ^ 
 manner, etc. 
 
 G3. Adverbs of Time. These are expressed by a word 
 denoting time, cither in the nominative or in the locative 
 case, but more frequently in the latter. It would be quite 
 superfluous here to give a long list of adverbs in general, 
 as they belong more to the Dictionary or Vocabulary than 
 to the Grammar. The following are of frequent occur- 
 rence : 
 
 to-day WtF, WffFt, C^Ffa, ^t=T at 
 ill the meantime any time, some time 
 
 now ^It?" 3 - as long as, whilst 
 
 stcrday, to-morrow "St^ so long, that long 
 
 F( when? <F*Jv, ^i(*r| ever "S^^lT^T at that time 
 
 when fiffr* daily, day after day 
 
 then fsr^r constantly
 
 ADVKHHS or xmi:. 
 
 
 after, afterwards <iWT?, < ST5nrr<r, <tf*f?f*f , tsi<Mii 
 
 ^.^IZ?, 3t?*T?, ^~5?, again 
 
 afterwards, hereafter ^j^t "src^r, TH^f before (in 
 
 rrsr, c tc? early in tlie time or place). 
 morning <Tlf3 at night 
 
 n9, *nr* the day before *reTC*T, 2T~Tr5 in the inorn- 
 yesterday, or the day after ing 
 
 to-morrow THr^n:^T, c^^TTsr in the cven- 
 
 ?^, ^5?^f two days ago, or ing 
 two days hence ?tw\. WrTfa always 
 
 V / 
 
 . Many adverbs of time arc formed by annexing ^F| " a 
 moment,' 7 Tf? and ^f^T etc., "time," or their locative forms ~. :(, 
 < f c'<i , <-f<:^, etc., ^t^t 5 ^ and C^Tl- Th words ^q and ^T^T arc 
 atlixed to ^"5, ^T5, 3T5, ^5, ^T5 and TT^, and to several other 
 words. ^i is added to the above words, as also to J), $$~, 4, 
 Tfl5, to some adjectives, and (in poetry) sometimes to C^T^^' 
 C^T^j C^T 5 C^T^"? C^T md C 5 ^". TT? and TftT? is added to the above 
 words and to numerals. And <fr'fC5T is annexed to many nouns, 
 and also to the particles ^ST , "3T, f? or c^", and to the above words 
 except numerals. Sometimes the names of day, ni^ht, week, 
 month, year or any other portion of time, are, in their nomi- 
 native or locative form, added to the preceding words, to form 
 adverbs of time, in the same manner as in English, as ir-frr* 
 "to-day," C*T^-?lf3f ''that wight," J^-TRTT '-now," "at this 
 time/' etc. 
 
 b. The difference between ^q or ^q and Ff^T or ^tT^T in such 
 composition is, that ^| or ^>^i signifies a time limited to that 
 portion of one d<ti/ or night which its preceding word may ex- 
 press ; whereas ^T5T or ^-TC^T conveys the idea of <i long time 
 (generally) beyond a day or night. The following examples will 
 illustrate what we have just stated : ^l-^FCT ' now,'' .^-^q in- 
 stantly," "at this moment," J)s-^ J l "by this time," -till now," 
 "now," "at or by this (long) time," ^T5-^l "so long,"
 
 GO BENGALI GKAMMAR. 
 
 qsrs-*FCT " by that time," ^5-^l " how long ?" ^5-^l " at or by 
 what time ?" *T5-^1 " as long as," TTS-^q " by which time," ^5- 
 ^M! " so long," ^5-^El " by that time," (Tr^-^cl " the moment 
 when," C^-^SI " immediately," " instantly." (fl^ClCT " at this 
 time," ^-^TC5T " at that time," J)^5-<Ft^ " so long (time)," ^-^tSsT 
 " after so long a time," ^T3-^t^ " so long," <3r5-3Ft5T " by that 
 (long) time," ^5-^TT^ "how long?" ^5-^1ZT "by or after what 
 long time ?" *F5-3rr*T " as long as," *H5-^tCT " at or by whatever 
 (long) time," C^r-^t^T, OT^"-^t^T "at which time," "when," 
 (Tr^-^t^T "at that time," Tnrl-^TsT, 7IT-^t=T, f^-Wfttf "always," 
 " at all times," fF?-<FfsT "long time," " ever," Tt38-Tfr*T " m tne 
 morning or morning-time," "3TWJ-^1ZT, '7rHl -^lTcT "in the even- 
 ing or evening-time." ^-TT^j^^-TUr " this time or year," C*T-TT? 
 C^T-Tt?, ^-Tf? "that time or year." c 3 ^"-"^!?, ^-Tf? "that very 
 time or year." ^-Tf?, ' : 54-Tf?, ^T5-Tt? "so often," "so many 
 times," ^5-^T? "how many times?" "how often?" ^F5-Tt? "as 
 many times as," " as often as," ^r^-^t? " so many times." >[$- 
 ?t? " once," ^-<rf?r " twice," and so on. 
 
 r. The difference in signification between the nominative form 
 of a name of time and the locative form of the same when com- 
 pounded, in the adverbial sense, with another word, is the same 
 as in English, as fsfsr (T ^gfsj f^r Tf? *n? Vt'^ " he has three 
 times taken that medicine." f~sfr c"^ ^^"fk f^ TlT<r ^n^ylT^^ 
 " he has taken that (quantity of) medicine in f/irce times" 
 
 (I, ^t^fr is an adjective in Sanskrit, but in Bengali it is gener- 
 ally used in composition with the verbal nouns in j or r. with 
 Sanskrit verbal nouns, with 3^ and *r<t, and sometimes (though 
 inelegantly) with c^T? C" 3 ^^ > an( ^ ^? and is taken in the meaning 
 of 3TCTj the locative of ^T "time." The word (Wl. in the 
 locative or adverbial sense, is used after the genitive form of the 
 words fT<T, "5TWT1 or yft^. ?tf^ or <rt3, and of the gerunds in 
 *n, and after tlic words ^, 4, fetw. C5l?> ^TWJl, fet^T or 
 r^T^T, ^r^t^T, ^f? (from ^^^j, j), <?, ^-5, ^BT5, 7T5, C^, ^T, 
 and <t"5. When used alone or preceded by one of the last ten
 
 ADVKUliS OF I'LACK. 07 
 
 words, it moans a "day time;" and in all other instances it gives 
 the idea of that time which may be specified by its preceding 
 word, as fT?r-(Wi, fwlT?<r-C^n "early in the morning," <Jt'Ci<l- 
 (T5T| u in or during the night time," f^Tt^-C^n, >K-|?1-CTsTl "in 
 the morning," ^nr-CWl, "at noon," jps-CWl "by this time (of 
 the day)," jre-c^cfl, ^T5-C^?rl, r 53-C?^rl "so long (time of the 
 day)," vffs-cwl " by that time," 7T5-(^r| " as long as," c^T^-C^T| 
 "at which of the two parts of the day (i.e. forenoon or after- 
 noon)?" 3F5-CWI "how long (of the day) ?" <Ffa is sometimes 
 used after ^si, and after sj[^, FfJ, -2t^?r, f^r, *TST3T, TfT and 
 ^^T? generally preceded by a numeral : ^1-^fsT ^Tfa " stay for a 
 short time." 
 
 G4. Adverbs of Place. These, like adverbs of time, are 
 expressed by any word denoting locality, generally in the 
 locative case, but sometimes in the nominative form. The 
 following list will serve as an example : viz. 
 
 here Tff^Z? without 
 
 r there (in sight) f^lw, ^^FtTS behind 
 
 there ^srcif before 
 
 where ? ^5, ^<^? above 
 
 whence ? ^tTF down, below 
 
 where ^r? afar off 
 
 thence TI^C^I before 
 
 (>-. 
 
 on all four sides ^rpsFfre in the presence of 
 
 ri<:<l within C^^l , (^ hither 
 
 a. The word ^"t<H sthani' or ^ tni are also used to form ad- 
 verbs of place, as c sthiine, "here," "in this place;" o tithiim.', 
 " there," " in that place " (when in sight) -Je stliunc, "wherever," 
 "in what place" (relatively); k<m xtltum', 'where?" "in what 
 place?" (interrogatively); kottu st/idnc, "in any place," any-
 
 68 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 where ;" >iM "' everywhere," ^r^jf " in or to another place." A 
 number of adverbs of time and place admit of a possessive case, 
 and also of an ablative case, as ^"7^t? " of to-day," ^^fl^RTf? " of 
 this place," fe^^re " from afar." 
 
 65. Adverbs of Manner or Quality. 
 
 very (^ so 
 
 unexpectedly r^, cfrTK providentially 
 
 J. / ' */ 
 
 thus, in this way <5 t?" I35 t?f mutually 
 
 as ^f?"**!?! successively, one after 
 
 / * 
 
 so, in the same way another 
 
 how ? f*r?*f , ff?^ to no purpose 
 
 F a little ?7f, <[H in vain 
 
 much *TI^ separately 
 
 by decrees fsrsTJl falsely 
 
 / */ 
 
 successively ?r7 truly 
 
 =T well C^lT, ^t silently 
 
 :i finely 
 
 >TfTr almost ^u&f^, ^t^Q quickly 
 
 slowly, badly ^3^t consequently, of course 
 
 why ? 
 
 a. The words snrs, ?n:*f, ^53 and T| arc added to form adverbs 
 of manner, as Jjsrs " : thus," C^t^ ^^ "in anyway or manner," 
 ^R^lir^r "powerfully," TT"i^5S "diligently," JTZQ] "in all respects." 
 
 ' * > X 
 
 " is an emphatic particl(>, as c^T^T^*^" "in that very place," 
 (>UIC-i : 5 l ~ "' in that very manner." Adverbs formed from adjec- 
 tives especially append <t^t or ^3 to them, as -i^*H<t '-beautiful," 
 ^C^^W^^r "beautifully," literally, "in a beautiful manner." 
 
 l>. The words ending 1 in Ws and SR may have the adverbial 
 afh'x ^f%TTl added to them, as c^R-^f?"?Tl " how?" " in what man- 
 ner?" literally "in what manner havinji; acted." The words
 
 ADVERBS OF MANNER, ETC. CO 
 
 ending in *R are more common than those in 5T5. The adverl>s 
 beginning witli f% or ($ do not always convey the idea of inter- 
 rogation. When in a sentence, not interrogative, (<$1H is doubled 
 and uttered in a suppressed tone, it, though indirectly, means 
 " not good," as <s\Ty\ -iH^. C^T 5 * $*% " this one seems not to bo 
 good" The t\vo \vords c^fSR and (AJM together are taken for an 
 adjective signifying " common," " vulgar," as ("*T <& WT (*J4H- 
 (^x* (cfl^ snr " he is not a common or every-day person." Some 
 adverbs are formed by adding to some substantives the word 
 <4>GV , which in this case is sometimes translated by the preposi- 
 tion " by or according to," and sometimes by " ly," as in the 
 above examples. 
 
 c. Besides what we have stated, there arc several other ways 
 of forming adverbs of manner, of which the following are com- 
 mon. 1. By adding <t*T3F or <2~??TT * substantives, as 
 "humility," f<Hil-*N^? '-1)111111)1}';" f[W\^ '-respect," 
 ^CfTgTT^ " respectfully." 2. By adding 3T*f (the locative of 3f*f 
 ''manner") to adjectives and adjective pronouns, as sp?t '-'bad," 
 sr 7 ^-?^ "badly;" 4 "this," Ji-?^*f "in this manner," "so." 
 Sometimes after adjectives and adjective pronouns 3\*t is used as 
 ?fTC*t ; with this difference, however, that when ?f^f is annexed to 
 an adjective, the compound word is generally an adverb, and 
 when annexed to an adjective pronoun, it (?fi*f) serves rather an 
 adjectival termination, as ^T^T? (?" f^lT ^TflT^' ^f^'T^ i "FT5T-?i ? T 
 (i.e. ^T^T ^^j Ff^flTS ^rt^? " ^Vhatever business he has, therein 
 he is able to proceed in an excellent manner,'' <i)-?i^f iJt^ yj 
 " such a man." Sometimes K-TC<1 and iT^T^ are used instead 
 of ^^t and ^i^f after the words j). $. (7\. (Tf. f%. c-t-JJ. C^T^ and 
 CF(w, as ^rffir OTSffi^r f^-^T^lT? or f^-^^f TTTtTS *rrf? " how 
 can I go there ?" ^^f . <^^ and ^Tp'ST? in most instances, 
 and ^f^TTt in some, correspond with the English adverbial ter- 
 mination ly, as '5T 7 it'^-?i^ ?> f " beautiful///," fa^iT ^T^% or <y^i7r? 
 " huml)///," sr^-^f<jin "bad/y." When ^^"^ is compounded with 
 verbal nouns in w or <i, or with any other Sanskrit verbal noun,
 
 70 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 then the compound words are commonly taken in the same sense 
 as the conjunctive participle of the respective verbs : for example, 
 is equivalent to sfrR 3Ff?T?Tl "having gone/' TP^ 
 4^ <?r<iyl " having collected," ^^ ^^ = ^Hl 
 " having been or become." 
 
 (/. Many of the adverbs are repeated twice, partly to add the 
 idea of plurality to their meaning, and partly to convey a different 
 signification. In repeating an adverb composed of an adjective 
 pronoun and ?u:*t, <t^t<r? or a like word, only the principal word 
 (i.e. the first member of it) is doubled, as <f^ ?n:^f "in this man- 
 ner," <jj^" <& ^z^i " iu these various ways." The other adverbs 
 ending in ?iE*f , etc. arc not found in their duplicated forms. Of 
 the adverbs in ^-f^rl, only that which is formed by prefixing 
 WIH, (3SR or t|5R to ^fVlHj i* doubled by repeating the first 
 member, as (TrsK-csr^R-^f^ri. The adverbs formed by affixing 
 <3 ($T) or ^w are not used in their duplicated form. The 
 Persian word ^tSTfiaf " a thousand," is often idiomatically used as 
 an adverb signifying " in the utmost degree, or a great many 
 times." But it is to be observed that ^"f^TtlT is used in the first 
 clause of a sentence, the next clause of which is commenced 
 with \5T. " yet," and generally ended in a negative verb, as 
 
 r| 1 "Teach a heron a thousand (i.e., ever so many) 
 times, yet he will not repeat like a parrot. Hide an evil action 
 ever so much, still it will not remain concealed." 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 GO. The part of speech which we call a preposition does 
 not, strictly speaking, exist in the Bengali language. It 
 is true there are several prefixes corresponding to the pre- 
 positions of the Greek and Latin, but then they are all 
 purely Sanskrit, and used in composition with other words, 
 but not prefixed separately to substantives and pronouns,
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 7 1 
 
 and governing certain cases, as in the two former tongues ; 
 hence we may call them inseparable prepositions. They are 
 chiefly used in composition with simple verbs, verbal and 
 some other nouns, to form the compound or derivative 
 words which constitute the hulk of the Sanskrit language, 
 and consequently of those also of which Sanskrit is tin 5 
 parent. The words thus compounded sometimes retain the 
 meaning of the original, or more frequently have the sense 
 of their component elements, but in many instances they 
 express significations which widely depart from those 
 which they might be expected from their composition to 
 convey. The full explanation of them is the province of a 
 Dictionary or Vocabulary. All that can be attempted here 
 is to hint briefly: 1. The principal purport of each prepo- 
 sition, or the idea which it most frequently gives or adds 
 to the signification of the word to which it is prefixed. 
 2. The equivalents by which it is usually translated into 
 English and the classical languages. 3. Its exemplifica- 
 tions by words compounded of one or more of these prepo- 
 sitions, and of frequent occurrence in Bengali, as in the 
 following alphabetical list. 
 
 beyond, excess, as ^ Hi -$'*! " transgression," ^rfjf^s* or 
 
 T3" " superabounding," " excessive." 
 
 over, possession, as wfwf? "possession," ^rf*f*f, ^rfV^tsi 
 
 / L / J. 
 
 "a king or ruler," ''srfo'fl-s "come at," "known," "ac- 
 quired." 
 
 97 after, sequence, imitation, as ^t(E><l " a follower." wg~^Tf1" 
 "an imitator," ^t^tf "repentance," ^^^jfi "permis- 
 sion." 
 
 or w^o within, ccntricity, as ^5r^s^i "the heart," 
 the heart-searcher," ^-^<jf "a relative."
 
 
 
 72 BENGAL! GRAMMAR. 
 
 taldny away, privation, badness, as ^^f?t< " defect," 
 " sin," ^*T?t^ " detraction," " accusation," ^offit^ " dis- 
 grace." This preposition is identified with the Greek 
 
 O, the Latin and German ab, and the English off. 
 
 to, addition, exceeding, as ^rfsTF " moreover," (literally 
 "and in addition"), 'srfcfsrR "a covering," 
 " covered with armour." 
 
 towards, tendency to, superiority in place, etc., as 
 approach to," ^rfVgrst "facing," ^q-f^Tf^ "self-esteem, 
 
 pride." 
 
 doivn, degradation; Latin, de, dis, ex, as ^Wl "deteri- 
 orated," "bad," ^5r^5t<r "incarnation" (literally "coming 
 down"), ^<<;s=i1 " disrespect." 
 
 / / ^ -I- 
 
 unto, extent, limit, as ^srt? u a receiver," ^K-M 4 ! " at- 
 tracting," ^srT^nra "unto or as far as the sea." The 
 Greek grammarians have something similar, called the 
 a intensivum. 
 
 iip, elevation, excellence, as ^*tf% " production," ^^^x 
 " excellent," ^fs " elevation," ^Tt?t " industiy." 
 
 near, secondary state, hence inferiority, as ^fft^f " a 
 small island," ^5t^ r 4 " a bye- way," %Wfs " a paramour." 
 It is identified with the Greek OTTO, and the Latin sub. 
 r hard, difficult, deterioration, as fc^lbU " wicked," ^i*t 
 "trouble," ^fsr "hardly passable," ^^ "hard to be 
 done." It is identified with the Greek ou, the Latin 
 (It's, and the Gaelic do. ~si duh, vf dusk, ^ dus/i, ^f[ 
 dm, are forms which it must assume according to the 
 consonant with which the word to which it is prefixed 
 may begin, as we shall hereafter explain. 
 down, cntirc-ne.^, as f^rts "a. fall," "death," fsraT? 6 ! 
 "entire prohibition," firju "ceased," fsiftf "entirely 
 engaged in."
 
 PREPOSITIONS. I o 
 
 ji out, freedom, as fa<it<M? "without form," frsTT5 "gone 
 out," frvfa " faultless," frfaFS " thoughtless." 
 
 lack, re-action, as "^fir^ " opposing power," <T<rT^nr 
 " defeat," *l<H<i "return," *Hrr*r*f "advice," " caution." 
 It is identified with the Greek trapa.. 
 
 round, completeness, as <ff?r^<i "quite full," *ff?rfa " cir- 
 cumference," *ff?Tff u tired out," " completely wearied." 
 It is identified with the Greek Trzpi. 
 forth, progression, as f^t*T "display," <T^T^ "march," 
 fTf*f " majesty," 2Tirr " affection," " acquaintance." It 
 is identified Avith the Greek Trpo, the Latin pro and prae, 
 and the English for or fore. 
 
 re, reiteration, as ^rf^Sffr "echo," ^HiTS? "reply," 
 a reflection," or "image," ff5^5T "retribution." 
 in, un, mis, vicissitude, as foy "barter," f^^fw "misfor- 
 tune," ft^5 "undone," "altered," f?*f*nnr "inversion." 
 or TT ivith, conjunction, as "sr ^ " association," - 5T (^rt^f 
 "union," yr^T^ "offspring," 7p 3 s > tf% "wealth." It is 
 identified with the Greek <rw and the Latin cum or con. 
 well, excellence, as -s^Hi "well disposed," ^d w "easily 
 obtained, ^*tJTf% " fame," " good report," "^RtFT? " good 
 news." It is identified with the Greek eu and the 
 Gaelic so. 
 
 a. The following prefixes, viz.. ^ a } ^ kn, "^ su, and f^r| bind, 
 though not strictly prepositions of the same kind as the preced- 
 ing, may, for the sake of reference, be here inserted as well as 
 anywhere else. ^T is equivalent to the English negative not, or 
 to the particles in, nn, r//,v, and fr.v.v, and sometimes to u-itnout 
 and not, as ^fabt? ' ///justice," ^r?Trtf " ?u?just," ^>i ys; r//,v- 
 honour," ^^y^ir^ " child/(v,v," ^TrT? " without substance,'' ^wg 
 " not destroyed/' " not spoiled." Prefixed to a word, which is 
 the name of anything, it will convey the sense of deprivation, a<
 
 74 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 "not (having) a stain," "without stain." Added to an 
 epithet, it marks deterioration, as ^^P< " not a poet," " a bad 
 poet." Put before any noun which implies the result of an 
 action, it reverses the sense, as ^<-1*R1 "not a contrivance," 
 " improper contrivance." It is identified with the Greek a 
 alpha, privitivum. 'SR'W an : the same as the last, but only pre- 
 fixed to words beginning with a vowel, to prevent the hiatus in 
 sound attending the concurrence of two vowels, as ^rrf*K5 " not 
 arrived," from ^rf?f^5 " arrived." This form is identified with 
 the Greek av, the Latin in, and the English un. 
 
 The word 3? stands opposite to ^, as TS$,*t "beautiful," 
 " good-looking," ^W 5 ^ " ugly," " bad-looking." Placed before 
 substantives or after adverbs, ^ and ^ stand as adjectives, as 
 ^TJJJ- a good action," ?F^5T " a bad action," f^fsr ^fs ^ " he 
 is verv good," ff^ ^5 3? " he is very bad." "^r and 3? are some- 
 
 ~ (X ^ 6- 
 
 times used in the absolute manner, having hardly anything 
 understood after them, as ^t^t? ^f% "^, ^ITt? $T>\ 3? ^ is 
 variously modified before different words : it becomes ^W (or ^5) 
 in composition as the first member with a word beginning 
 with a vowel or with 3( " a chariot," as WiTf? " ill-shaped," 
 (^ -f <3pt) = ^pf^ a bad horse," 3Fflfh^f( " a bad medicine," 
 <-<jq<l8t "a bad jst." It is optionally changed into ^| before ^ft 
 " a path," and ^(^ " a man," as <F*fT or <3Ft*fi: " a bad road," 
 ^^C^T or ^t<^^ " a mean worthless man," " a coward." 
 
 The prefix TT so, is a contraction of the Sanskrit particle TT^ 
 " with," and seems to contrast very well with the preceding ^ a. 
 Prefixed to a noun, it will imply either possession or association, 
 as TT^fa "with life," "alive." It often governs the instrumental 
 case, as Tf^ff^f^ "with a family," "accompanied by a family;" 
 or the word it is joined to may take the letter ^ after it, which 
 is equivalent to the genitive case, as "Vijft^ " with a wife." The 
 word f^ is elegantly used only after the nominative form of a 
 Sanskrit word, as fsfr iffRTf? T^ 
 
 " lie, along \vith his family, has made a pilgrimage to the
 
 PREPOSITIONS. / 
 
 (shrine of) Pumsliottarna," i.e., "Vishnu." ^T is used instead of 
 7T3", but always as the first member of a compound, as f%ft Tf- 
 
 ^Ttflf 
 
 I). The \vord ftwl hind, " without," appears to be a preposi- 
 tion in our sense of the term, and generally governs the third or 
 instrumental case : thus, *rfif lift ft^T| *t?f vj"*TC 4 C^t 5 * 3PJT ^? 
 " If you shall undertake any enterprise without advice. The par- 
 ticles ffs and ^>T<T are also, not unfrcquently, used as postposi- 
 tions, like those enumerated in OS, and govern the genitive case, 
 as may be seen in the following examples : fsft "^rf^rfa <ff% or 
 " he (is) very kind to me," '^(T*Jt<l <tf^5 or 
 " he bears a great affection towards me," ( 
 
 "he ran against me," f^fsr ^TSTfil fepS or 
 " he is angry with or enraged at me," f^fsr 
 or ^<>f<f T^ ^ff " he (is) much pleased ivith me," 
 or ffs ^^ftTf 1^ ?tf<I^ " look upon him with kindness." 
 
 67. Let us now adduce a few examples in illustration of 
 the mode in which the preceding particles are applied. 
 The student will bear in mind that they are used only 
 with Sanskrit verbal nouns, etc. ; and even then they are 
 not indiscriminately used with every noun, etc., from the 
 latter language. Practice and the use of the dictionary 
 can alone enable the learner to form correct ideas on this 
 point. 
 
 a. The word srfa " honour," " measure," is compounded with 
 several prepositions. Example : T3Tfl " a proof," isr^fsrfa " dis- 
 honour," vtMjH " honour," ^j^nt^ " a guess," " an inference," 
 fsrerH " a making," " creating," f<wH " a chariot," ( 5lf^rfl " a 
 measure," -^Ps^H " self-honour," " tenaciousness of honour/' 
 
 a weighing," etc. 
 
 b. The particles f, ^r*f, ^, ft, ^ff^, ^ff^, ^*f, ft, ft^, and 
 are used in composition with sff? ' taking," a verbal noun
 
 76 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 from the root ^f " take/' and cause it to convey various signifi- 
 cations, as <2T$>T<[ " a beating-/' ^r*fs~f? " a taking- away by force 
 or unfair means/' 7Tft? " a killing," f^t? " a walking for 
 amusement," " a pastime," ^ff^T^ " a confutation," " a repulse," 
 <rf5^r? " a taking back," ( tffs + ^Tl + ^T?) = ^rrf^T? " a re- 
 sumption," ^j*n^T<r " a present to a superior," " a complimentary 
 gift," fs^t? "frost," "dew," ^rf^T? "food," "a meal," (*PT + 
 '3T| -f ^T<r) = Trsrf^Hr " aggregation," " a collection," (: an assem- 
 blage," (f^ + ^Tl + ^t?) =f s r?T^t? "without food." 
 
 c. The particles f, TT, ^r^, ^*f, ^f, ft, fr, fsr^, ^fis, ^, 
 ^TT, "^fk, tf^j *tf^ 3 and ^Tl are used in composition with several 
 verbal nouns from the root ?? "do," viz., ^f?T, ^T 4 ! "a doing," 
 ^F, faplTi " an action," ^t?^, ?rt?t or Wl " a doer," ft^ " a 
 hymn;" and the compound words and their principal significa- 
 tions are ^T^Tt<T, " an imitation," 7{ "^t? " consecration," " puri- 
 fication," "initiation," ^"^r^T<T "'an injury," "harm," ^f^t<f "a 
 benefaction," fwf<[ " a change," " a disease," " the change which 
 takes place in a person when dying." (fsr<r 4-^4. ^t?) 
 "without form," ^fwf<[ "possession," "dominion." 
 "a returning of an action," "a remedy," ^TtTf<r "a form." 
 i*t<Fi "a section of a book," "a prologue," "manner;" -*( ^ < <it 
 " an imitation," ^f^?^ " anything superadded to perfect a 
 thing," "a supplemental oblation," (r^ -j- ^rj + ^TR) = f^T^? 4 ! 
 " certainty." '^sjfw^q " the act of possessing," " the locative 
 case of a noun." (& 4- fw$] ] = ^f^n a bad action," nfjr>i]1 
 
 \ S b-v 
 
 " a good action." ^ST^fs " original and unformed matter," " na- 
 ture," " disposition," " a crude noun or verb before it has taken 
 any inflection," ^T^f^ " form," " shape," ft^f^ " a change from 
 the natural state," "transformation," "a bad shape." 
 m^sl " an injurer," "injurious," ^W?< 
 "'a benefactor." ^f^nft '"' :i i)ossessor/' "one who has 
 a riht to a thin." TT + ^tlR = >i *?( Q^ " a hmn." 
 
 08. In the Bengali language, strictly speaking, there
 
 POSTPOSITIONS. 
 
 does not exist any simple preposition such as our " to," 
 "for," "by," "with," etc. Such relations as the pre- 
 ceding are expressed in Bengali by terminations or cases, 
 as we have already seen. Such expressions as our "be- 
 fore," "behind," "above," "beneath," etc., arc expressed 
 by substantives which we may call diptotcs, because em- 
 ployed only in two cases ; or we may call them postposi- 
 tions, because they always follow the words they govern, 
 which are put in the genitive case. They are mostly 
 of Sanskrit origin, and are used chiefly in the locative 
 case, and sometimes in the nominative. "When they have 
 not a genitive case under government, they arc understood 
 to be in a state of composition with the substantive which 
 precedes them. The following is an alphabetical list of 
 the more ordinary postpositions. 
 
 in front, before 
 exceeding, beyond 
 l in conformity 
 
 */ 
 
 on account, for the sake 
 st in front, before 
 <l above, upon 
 ^or^1z^7$attheside,near 
 w, ^Ft?^, 3F3J, wz^J be- 
 cause, on account, for 
 or Mf^ 3 in the place, from 
 at the bottom, beneath 
 similar, like 
 a side (of the horizon) 
 a side (of the horizon) 
 , WTr<[ at the door, by 
 means 
 
 frw, fwCT? at the side, in 
 the vicinity, near 
 
 on account, for. 
 at the bottom, below 
 after 
 
 ^ up to, as far as 
 , *TT*t at the side, near 
 in the rear, behind 
 to, for, towards 
 sT in exchange for, instead 
 f%r<r on the outside, 
 without 
 
 f-6<:<t on the inside, 
 within 
 
 in the manner, conform- 
 ably
 
 78 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 in the midst, in ^Ffr^f in the vicinity, near 
 exactly on, at the instant *P3[*J, ^Parz*! before the face, 
 in company, with in the presence, opposite 
 
 in the vicinity, near nf^-i accompanied, along with 
 at the time ^"ft^ in the place, from 
 
 , ^wtZ^ like, equal 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 C9. Conjunctions in Bengali differ not in their nature 
 and use from those of our own language. I divide them 
 here into the two well-known classes of copulative and 
 disjunctive, with this protest, however, that a disjunctive 
 conjunction sounds to my ear marvellously like a contradic- 
 tion in terms. Perhaps the term oppositive or adversative 
 conjunction would be the more appropriate ; but we need 
 not waste time upon this, as the reader no doubt knows 
 the import of the word, which is simply this, that the dis- 
 junctive conjunction, while it connects the clauses of a 
 sentence, at the same time disjoins their meaning. The 
 following list contains the more ordinary conjunctions of 
 both classes. 
 
 , 
 " 
 
 if," 
 K3 
 
 Copulative Conjunctions. -s<, ^ "and," "both,' 
 "moreover," TJP "rather," ^T5-R "therefore," s 
 
 / / / 
 
 sra "then," T, csi "then," "consequently," ^r*[ 
 
 / / * ^- O * 
 
 "namely," "even," *rn "as for example," Wt? "also," 
 TtrHrs "thereby," "consequently," C% "that," C*R "in 
 order that,' 1 C<-*H1, Wte i<? "because," C^^T^ "as," (^7iT 
 
 / <x ' 
 
 " so," ^5T5 r?T " so that," <4~5fre/ or ^"i^f^^/ " on this account," 
 
 / / / 
 
 "hence," ^JW^^T? "after this," ^3T?'4 "for wliich reason," 
 
 f \ t 
 
 sttf^Bi " l)esides this," " besides."
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Disjunctive Conjunctions. foir "but," fa, T|, 
 
 "whether," "cither," "or," wfrf, 
 
 "although," wrfrt "yet," "nevertheless," *rs, srpn (for 
 T|, Wf) "if not," "then," "otherwise," Trfif *1 "if not," 
 "unless," Wfrf, WF, ^arrfn, ^3fF, ^T, "yet," "never- 
 theless." 
 
 a. The conjunction , like the Latin 6Y, i.s elegantly employed 
 to express our word " both," as well as its consequent "and:" 
 thus *i TtT5 ^2 7TWJT3 " both morning and evening," et mane et 
 vespere. In some instances the *? thus repeated gives the sense 
 of "both" only, and with a negative they are equivalent to our 
 words '-neither" and "nor," as may be seen in the following 
 examples : <rfa-^G (*fcT *2Tfa-^ (*fcT " Ram and Shyam both arc 
 gone," J)- spff, *?-> srsjf "both of them (arc) bad," ^fsr-<? C^f^T, 
 "he came just after or the moment after you went." 
 r 'arfsj'-^ sp^ snr "neither Ram is bad nor Shyam," 
 *J1$ < -Tlj flf^-^ ^irii6<< r| "neither I shall go nor he 
 will come." 
 
 1). In Bengali there is no word corresponding with the English 
 "whether;" but when f% is placed before one noun, and again 
 before another noun signifying a different thing, then the first f% 
 is translated by "whether," and the second by "or," as f% fr^ 
 f^ \[>l!ilH " -whether Hindu or Musalman. 
 
 c. When f% r| is used in the second member of a sentence, it 
 is generally translatable by " whether or not," as ^T^~fi^ f&SaT^n 
 3? f*f*Tf=r ^TC4' f< ^1 " ask him u'hether he will go there or 
 not,' 1 '' 3~?T f^fsf nr ^t? t^ sJtC^ "either he or his brother will 
 go." When rj or nr is used before one noun, and again before 
 another signifying a different thing, then the first -fl or sr?r con- 
 veys the signification of "neither," and the second of "nor," as 
 T| Ut=T srj sp'T or ^T?r r t=T T? SRt "' neither good nor bad." But 
 here this is also to be borne in mind, that ?~?r signifies " either" 
 only when it is followed by *'$. And sqr or rl conveys the idea
 
 80 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 of "neither" only when followed by srsr or sr|, and of "nor" 
 when preceded by WTT or r| respectively, as in the above examples. 
 d. irj. and (^1 are often mere expletives, and confined chiefly 
 to conversation, as \5i;f% ? " what then ? " ^rffsr TrT^" C^l or 
 C5\ ^Tf^" "then I will go (and see what that will do)," ^fsr 
 CS\ flrf*l Ti^" " I did not see a single person." The particle (\5l, 
 as we shall hereafter point out, is elegantly used in an idiomatic 
 sense, like the French done. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 TO. The interjections most commonly used before the 
 vocative case are, c^, C^l, f1, (?, Cr|, (T>, fe, si's?, and c^T? 
 " !" The first three are applied mostly to superiors, c? 
 to equals, c^r) to an inferior woman, c^" to a young woman, 
 fe to a child, and the last two to common people. When 
 the person addressed is at a distance, ^n, ^, or ^, is pre- 
 fixed to the above interjections, as ^?c^ ^r^ f^Tss " 
 Heavenly Father!" ^c$\ ^Ts\ "0 mother!" When the 
 person is present, the interjection is often put after the 
 noun, as <rW c*t1 " father !" 
 
 . Beside the above there are other interjections used to 
 express different emotions of mind, as Of distress and culling 
 for relief ^*rj, Tft?, TtC^tl " O mother ! " * T|T|, Tf*ft?, TtTlT? 
 O father!" arrf^^. "save! save!" ftTT^. "alas! alas!" Of 
 pain 1"8 , ^3 " oh ! " Of pity ^rt^l or ^ " alas ! " Of ,wr- 
 prise or encouragement TfoTfg "surprising!" "well done!" 
 Of joy and admiration ;Tfir ^fir "hurrah!" TlT! Tt?" Tf^"! 
 
 \ N V 
 
 <Tt^1 TT^"1 ! Tf^1 Tf^1 Tf^1 ! ^TlTl"5 ^t?T ! (Hindi, /.-//a 
 /) " O admirable ! " " wonderful ! " " surprising ! " q$j \ %$} 
 
 brave ! " " huzza ! " "bravo ! " ^IT^I C^t? Tt^l, Tt*f , or ^T^. Of
 
 OF EXPLETIVE PARTICLES. 81 
 
 vexation '-*rf$ ! ^8 ! jfrsi ?t^ ! "confound it! : Of surprise 
 or astonishment ^sr| ! "() mother!" ^^T) (~ST fa ! "O mother, 
 what is this ! " etc. ^W\ <3 fa ! f^fa ! sr^Tf^f ! fa ^srfF&fj 
 "amazing!" Of sudden recollection <j ! $(5~\ ! " hy-t he- 
 bye!" Of driving out ! '%$ *%$ \ "away with!" JHS r! 
 *Tl "3T ^ ! " begone ! " Of contempt or aversion f^i ! T?T|8 ! 
 or f^ f^ ! " fy, fy ! " 
 
 b. In common conversation the interjections are used after 
 verbs, or in connection with them, as ~zfy (^r ~$~\ r) cr| ? or (?* 
 Cft\ ^T ri ? "why don't you speak ?" ^<r (T act," "^rf ^ speak." 
 Gffa or (Jrftt is added to verbs to call attention., as CfrfsJ or 
 "see!" "now then!" 
 
 OF EXPLETIVE PARTICLES. 
 
 71. The following words arc often employed in a familiar 
 way in a sentence ; but practice alone can give any certain 
 rule for their correct application. T?1 Avhen subjoined to a 
 word erives the idea of exactness or limitation, as J)W| sff?r 
 
 O / 
 
 "a single purse." te gives the idea of diininutiveness, as 
 4^> ^^ " the smallest mouse." c*ttT>1 " altogether," when 
 prefixed, conveys the idea of indefinite number or quan- 
 tity. sTfa " a piece," when subjoined to a habitation or 
 
 */ ' 
 
 instrument, adds nothing to the original force of the word, 
 as &ft TR ^fft '' a house." *rffr " a piece," cives the idea 
 
 N * j. / C-/ 
 
 of parts, or members of a whole bodv, as "5"9~ TTf^ ^fw "the 
 
 i i/ / 
 
 two feet." <nf^ and Ffa "a little," subjoined to any- 
 thing divisible into minute parts, implies u some," as 
 feTi^fa "some water." ^^1, ^fa, ^f%^. ^^, "a heap," 
 
 (X \ ' d*n ' 
 
 u set," etc., are often prefixed to plural nouns, and seem 
 to convey little more than the idea that the number was 
 indefinite, as 3F53F ^f% ^P^J^ "some letters. ^"^T? "some," 
 is added to divisible things, as Ff^sT t3^t? "some rice," 
 
 n
 
 82 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 "some straw." ^ is an expletive frequently added 
 to words of one syllable, as ^rt<n5 "further." c\ "in- 
 deed," "in fact," "truly," gives emphasis to any asser- 
 tion, and thereby conveys the idea of doubt or hesitation 
 to the remaining complement of the sentence, which is 
 commonly understood, as 
 
 i "I didn't do 
 
 it indeed (but some one else may have done it)." Occa- 
 sionally it is found subjoined to the second person of the 
 imperative, precisely like the French done, as <<nc^1 " tell," 
 or " speak," or " pray speak," dites done. frrel is added 
 in familiar conversation to the indefinite tense, in a nega- 
 tive way, as <rffsr ^frfaw-1 " I have not done it." 
 
 OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 72. The following columns contain the Bengali cardinal 
 numbers, and the figures by which they are represented ; 
 and as the Sanskrit cardinal and ordinal numbers are fre- 
 quently met with, they arc likewise given. 
 
 FIGURES. 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ORDER. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 BENGALI. SANSKRIT. 
 
 SANSKRIT. 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 1st 
 
 *TO 
 
 2 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 fir 
 
 2nd 
 
 fipft? 
 
 3 
 
 \ 
 
 fai 
 
 3rd 
 
 ^ftir 
 
 4 8 Fff? 
 
 F^ 
 
 N 
 
 4th 
 
 ^5^ 
 
 P* ^ 
 
 ^fsp 
 
 5th 
 
 ^^^T 
 
 6 
 
 5, ^ 5PET 
 
 6th 
 
 ^ 
 
 7 i ffts 
 
 TT^ 
 
 7th 
 
 TT^ST 
 
 8 V ^5T|T? 
 
 ^r^ 
 
 8th 
 
 ^5T%^" 
 
 9 ?5> T5T ! "T^ 
 
 9th 
 
 5J^T
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 5.8 
 
 FIGURES. 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 
 16 
 17 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 23 
 24 
 
 9n 
 
 5(8 
 
 Vi 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ov 
 
 10th 
 11 til 
 
 12th 
 
 13th 
 
 14th 
 
 15th 
 
 16th 
 
 17th 
 
 18th 
 
 19th 
 
 20th 
 
 21st 
 
 22nd 
 
 23rd 
 
 24th 
 
 25th 
 
 26th 
 
 27th 
 
 28th 
 
 29th 
 
 30th 
 
 31st 
 
 32nd 
 
 33rd 
 
 34th 
 
 35th 
 
 36th 
 
 37th 
 
 38th 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 KANSK HIT.
 
 84 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 39 
 40 
 41 
 
 42 
 43 
 44 
 45 
 46 
 47 
 48 
 49 
 50 
 51 
 52 
 
 56 
 57 
 58 
 59 
 GO 
 61 
 G2 
 63 
 64 
 G5 
 GG 
 67 
 
 83 
 8d 
 
 8V 
 8* 
 
 a\D 
 
 d3 
 
 dV 
 dJs 
 
 ORDER, 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 39th 
 
 40th 
 
 41st 
 
 42nd 
 
 43rd 
 
 44th 
 
 45th 
 
 46th 
 
 47th 
 
 48th 
 
 49th 
 
 50th 
 
 51st 
 
 52nd 
 
 53rd 
 
 54th 
 
 55th 
 
 56th 
 
 57th 
 
 58th 
 
 59th 
 
 60th 
 
 61st 
 
 62nd 
 
 63rd 
 
 G4th 
 
 65th 
 
 66th 
 
 67th
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 n 
 
 <*?!> 
 
 FIGURES. 
 
 G8 
 G9 
 70 
 71 
 72 
 73 
 74 
 75 
 7G 
 77 
 78 
 79 
 80 
 81 
 82 
 83 
 84 
 85 
 86 
 87 
 88 
 89 
 90 
 91 
 92 
 93 
 94 
 95 
 96 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 V-8 
 
 vv 
 
 ORDER. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 SANSKRIT. 
 
 94th 
 95th 
 96th
 
 86 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 FIGURES. 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 99 
 
 100 
 
 1000 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ORDER. 
 
 97th 
 
 98th 
 
 99th 
 
 100th 
 
 1000th 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER 
 
 SANSKRIT. 
 
 a. When the Sanskrit ordinal numbers 
 and F^ qualify a feminine noun, they take ^ after them, as 
 ff$r| ; and all others, from five to at housand, inclusive, assume 
 3(, as ^fs^^t, etc., thus according with the analogy of other 
 adjectives. See 30. The termination ^[% may be optionally 
 employed from the nineteenth to the fifty-eighth of the Sanskrit 
 ordinal numbers ; but the usual way by which they are repre- 
 sented has been followed in the foregoing columns. 
 
 73. A particular form of ordinal numbers is expressly 
 employed to designate the days of the solar month. 
 
 the first day. 
 
 the second day. 
 
 the third day. 
 the fourth day. 
 the fifth day. 
 the sixth day. 
 
 the seventh day. 
 
 the eighth day. 
 the ninth day. 
 the tenth day. 
 
 the eleventh day. 
 the twelfth day. 
 the thirteenth day. 
 the fourteenth day. 
 
 the fifteenth day. 
 w 
 > the sixteenth day. 
 
 the seventeenth day. 
 the eighteenth day. 
 the nineteenth day. 
 the twentieth day.
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 87 
 
 the twenty-first day. ?Tl4to *t1 the twenty-seventh 
 the twenty-second day. day. 
 
 the twenty-third day. ^ f $ 1 *t 1 the twenty-eighth day 
 Ffr*fl the twenty-fourth day. ^far*n the twenty-ninth day. 
 the twenty-fifth day. fapfl the thirtieth day. 
 the twenty-sixth day. J)<ffa*n the thirty-first day. 
 
 (t. The preceding ordinals are used in mercantile and revenue 
 accounts. They appear to have been introduced into the Bengali 
 from the Urdu or Hindustani by the Musalman rulers of the 
 country. According to the anonymous author of the Bengali 
 Grammar alluded to, 21, a, "the Sanskrit names of day and 
 night are neither elegantly expressed nor understood after them ; 
 but instead thereof the Persian word ;., (?tSF 'a day,' or the 
 Arabic word f^Jtt ^3T?t^ ' date, ' is generally understood or 
 expressed;" and this, by the way, is a proof of their Muslim 
 
 origin. " Those ending in ^srl are borrowed in their masculine, 
 
 ^ 
 and those in ^, in their feminine forms, modified (from ^.*}. 
 
 They, however, do not undergo any further change in Bengali, 
 whether to agree with a masculine or feminine noun." The rule 
 for their formation appears to be this, viz., when the cardinal 
 number ends in a consonant without the inherent short a, the 
 termination ^sr) (sometimes j)) is added, as f?~*T| or f^Z*f "the 
 
 twentieth." If the cardinal ends in the short a, the latter is 
 
 , ,/ 
 
 changed into ^ and the termination ^ is added, as it is when 
 
 the cardinal ends in any other vowel beside the short a. 
 
 1). The learner must be prepared to find occasional deviations 
 in the orthography of Bengali words, and particularly in the 
 numerals. In this respect many anomalies are even* day met 
 with ; but these generally arise from the indiscriminate use 
 among the vulgar of *f, 3", and TT, or from the different modes 
 by which the diphthongs may be represented. The Sanskrit 
 cardinal and ordinal numbers, being employed chiefly by the
 
 88 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 learned, and their orthography being established, are rarely 
 misspelt. 
 
 Of Collective Numbers, 
 
 74. The number ten being multiplied by itself, and the 
 product being again multiplied by ten ; and the same pro- 
 cess being repeated till the amount is one thousand tril- 
 lions, the sums so obtained are denominated as beneath. 
 
 ff"*T ten. *fa billion. 
 
 hundred. *r^"f*rf ten billions. 
 
 thousand. "*l^f hundred billions. 
 
 ten thousand. sr^t^T^r thousand billions. 
 
 hundred thousand. ?1^1 ten thousand billions. 
 
 million. ^t^tfl hundred thousand 
 
 ten millions. billions. 
 
 hundred millions. *fT trillion. 
 
 S <K N 
 
 ^T^TT thousand millions, srrfasf ten trillions. 
 
 \ N O^. V 
 
 ten thousand millions. ^c-^f^t hundred trillions. 
 
 ^rsr hundred thousand mil- ^ ^T^f^qt thousand tril- 
 lions. lions. 
 
 a. The above collective numbers show us, en passant, the 
 extent to which the Hindus, the inventors of the decimal scale, 
 carried their enumeration table. The numbers themselves, with 
 the exception of the first half-dozen or so, are rather an object 
 of curiosity than of real practical utility. Their values are, in 
 some instances, occasionally explained rather differently: thus, 
 ^T^T is sometimes represented to he ten billions. The word ^f^ 
 " a score," is often used instead of fr*f " twenty." Reduplica- 
 tivcs are formed by subjoining ^i "a twist," "fold," to any 
 Sanskrit cardinal number, as f%^i " two-fold."
 
 FRACTIONAL NUMBERS. 89 
 
 Of Fractional Numbers. 
 
 75. Quarters and halves of any whole number are thus 
 denoted. If a quarter more than one of the units of any 
 number is to be expressed, the word *r*nfl is prefixed to 
 it, as ^r^irl "5^" " two and a quarter" (2^). If a half more, 
 Trlfs or Tft^s is prefixed, as 3Tff?r Fff^ "four and a half" 
 (4|); but if three quarters is to be expressed, as in " four 
 and three quarters" (4f), they then say "a quarter less 
 than five." The word c*n^r denotes a quarter less : thus, 
 
 V \2/ 
 
 C*T)sw *tfv is "four and three quarters" (4f); literally "a 
 quarter less five." When ^Tlf?, T^TTI, and c*T)<^ are em- 
 ployed with "*T5 " a hundred," or >i^^ " a thousand," these 
 last are taken as whole or collective numbers, and the 
 compound will therefore imply a half more, or a quarter 
 more or less than the hundred or the thousand : thus, 
 TT^TTI *T5 " a hundred and a quarter (of the hundred)" 
 (125), c*h^ *te " a quarter less than a hundred" (75). 
 
 a. The term c*tlTl by itself implies " a quarter" (5), ^ or 
 
 is "a half" (J), Or5 "one and a half" (U), ^T^t "two 
 and a half" (2 3) ; and these are to be considered' as used in an 
 absolute sort of way. In the common concerns of business it is 
 seldom that any number requires to be divided into more than 
 sixteen parts ; consequently the ^rfal unit, or sixteenth part 
 of a rupee, is assumed to denominate fractional numbers, whose 
 denominator is two or any multiple thereof by itself: thus, f^w 
 ^rfw| implies ^ths, *r$ ^rfal ^ths, etc. If any more minute 
 fraction is required, such, for example, as - b ^th, it is only neces- 
 sary to say ('TUT! ;; 5rfrl " a quarter ana"
 
 90 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 ON TEE JUNCTION OF LETTERS, AND THE DERIVA- 
 TION AND COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 76. In the Sanskrit language, which enters so freely into 
 the Bengali, certain rules have been established for avoid- 
 ing the concurrence of harsh or incongruous sounds, or the 
 unpleasing hiatus which might arise from keeping sounds 
 apart that are disposed to coalesce. For example, when 
 two or more words arc united together, either as sentences 
 or as compounds, some alteration may take place in the 
 final letter of the leading word, or in the initial of the 
 succeeding words, or by both of them suffering some 
 change as is sometimes the case in Greek, Latin, and 
 some other polished languages, though not so systemati- 
 cally as in Sanskrit. This euphonic change is called ^rf% 
 i.e. "junction," or "union," and is employed on three 
 occasions, viz. on the adding of the affixes to nouns or 
 verbs ; on the joining of two or more words so as to form 
 a compound word ; and lastly, on the simple joining of 
 words one to another as they occur in a sentence. 
 
 77. Junction of Vowels, etc. It is a principle in Sanskrit 
 composition, that when two vowels come together in a com- 
 pound word or in a sentence, as, for example, when one 
 word ends, and the next begins with a vowel a coalition 
 or modification of the vowels takes place, so as to avoid a
 
 JUNCTION OF VOWELS. 91 
 
 hiatus. In order to explain the rules to that effect, a con- 
 stant reference to the following Table of the Vowels, and 
 their cognate elements, will be of considerable service. 
 
 1. Short Vowels ... vfa^i^unri ^ Iri 
 
 2. Long Vowels . . . ^r| a ^ I ^ u ^ rl $ Irl 
 
 3. Guna Elements . 4 e ^ o ^r<Tr ^r al 
 
 4. Vriddhi Elements . ^rl d $ ai ^ au ^rt^ dr "srl^T dl 
 
 5. Semi-vowels ... *r ya ^ va <r ra sr la 
 
 a. The term gttna denotes conversion or change in the quality 
 of the vowel ; vriddhi a further extension or augmentation of the 
 same. Observe further, that the five short vowels in the first 
 line are similar, respectively, to those immediately under them in 
 the second line ; thus a and a, i and ?, u and u, etc., are said to 
 be similar, only differing in quantity. The vocal sounds e and o, 
 as well as ai and au, are considered by Sanskrit grammarians to 
 be diphthongs. Lastly, the four semi-vowels in the fifth line 
 bear a close relationship, as we shall immediately see, each re- 
 spectively, to the four vowels, etc., directly above them. 
 
 78. Junction of Similar Voiuels. When a word ends with 
 any one of the ten vowels, short or long, in lines first and 
 second, and the following word begins with the same 
 yowcl, short or long, the two vowels always coalesce into 
 one long vowel. For example : ^r -f ^r, or ^r + ^d , or ^r| 
 f ^ , or ^rj + ^r) , all make ^1 d : thus, f^n and ^T*t?tW 
 coalesce into f?rl*t?TC*t "without offence." In like man- 
 ner, ^ + ^, or t" + ^, or ^ + ^-, or ^ + ^, make ^ I ; 
 and so on with the rest. 
 
 79. Of the Junction of Dissimilar Voivcls. Dissimilar 
 Vowels are those which are pronounced by different organs,
 
 92 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 as <sr and ^; or ^ and ^r, etc. When a word ends in any 
 vowel but ^r or ^H , and the next begins with a dissimilar 
 vowel, the final vowel of the first word is changed to its 
 own semivowel; thus in srfff and ^^ the ^ of srfff is 
 changed to TT, which is the semi-vowel of ^: thus, wf*t 
 " although." The same rule holds with regard to the 
 remaining vowels, as may be seen in the following ex- 
 amples, viz. : 
 
 or ^ becomes TT as in TJlj? from tfo and 
 
 
 
 U> ? fW frf? 
 
 80. Modifications of ^r and ^RTI, followed ly Dissimilar 
 Vowels, etc. When a word terminating in ^ or ^rl is fol- 
 lowed by a word beginning with a dissimilar vowel, they 
 produce the change called Guna, and when followed by a 
 diphthong, that called Vriddhi, as *nrsr + ^^ = *f?W$t? 
 " the great God," ^ + ^^j = ^^Tsnr " great glory." So 
 in the following examples: viz., F^ + ^PT^T = ^755lW "the 
 rising of the moon," s[^1 + ^ft = sr^ft " a great sage," v5'^^ 
 a good Likiir," ^^f + ^^ = ^c*ti<^ u the 
 
 one and only God," ^4-^t*rj=3r^*fj "your supremacy," 
 ^n^-t + ^STTI = ^^-^-sfTT " a little light," ^^ + >^fk = STPJTl^fst 
 " a bad medicine." 
 
 81. Conversion of the Diphthongs. When a word ends 
 with the diphthongs 4, *?, ^, or ^, and the next word 
 begins with any of the ten vowels in lines first and second, 
 then the diphthongs are respectively changed as follows :
 
 JUNCTION OF CONSONANTS. 93 
 
 becomes ^r*r as in TJR from c*f and 
 
 
 
 *Tir* br 
 
 & <*mi vtf*$ csl 
 
 a. This rule is not of much importance to the Bengali student. 
 It is inserted here chiefly on account of the philosophic inge- 
 nuity it displays. In Sanskrit the diphthong Jj e is considered 
 to he made up of the two vowels a and i, as in our words " hair," 
 "fair," etc. The diphthong ^ is made up of a and u, as in the 
 French words "haute" and "faute." Again the vriddld diph- 
 thongs J? and ^ are supposed to be made up of the long a and 
 the i or u combined ; and this accounts clearly and satisfactorily 
 for the changes above mentioned; which consist merely in a reso- 
 lution of the diphthongs into their primary elements, and then the 
 conversion of the final vowels into their corresponding semi- vowels. 
 
 82. Junction of Consonants. In order clearly to com- 
 prehend tlie following rules, the student is particularly 
 requested to make himself thoroughly acquainted with the 
 following classification of the consonants, which, like the 
 vowels, are subject to certain euphonic permutations, when 
 coming in contact with each other. The thirty-three con- 
 sonants are divided into five classes, when taken hori- 
 zontally. Each class is named after the organ by which 
 its letters are uttered, with or without the aid of the 
 tongue : thus, 
 
 1 Gutturals ^ k *r kh *f g *r gli <8 n ^ h 
 
 2 Falatials F ch T% ch/i ~i j ^jh *& n *r ?/a *f s/i 
 
 3 Cerebrals T> t $ ill "S d u dh i n ? r *r sh 
 
 4 Dentals 3 t <t th if d % dh * n r I f\ s 
 
 5 Labials * p t$ ph ^ I ^ Ih *r m ^ v
 
 94 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 a. The letters of the first class are uttered from the throat ; 
 those of the second, by the tongue and palate ; of the third, by 
 the tip of the tongue pressed against the roof of the mouth ; of 
 the fourth, by the whole edge of the tongue pressed against the 
 upper row of teeth ; lastly, those of the fifth class are uttered by 
 means of the lips only. The letters of each of the five classes 
 are also named after the leading letter of each class : thus, 
 instead of guttural, etc., we may say the 3? ka-class, the F cha- 
 class, etc. 
 
 b. The first two letters in each of the five classes are called 
 hard consonants, the second being the aspirate of the first ; the 
 third and fourth are the corresponding soft consonants, the 
 fourth being the aspirate of the third; the fifth is the corre- 
 sponding nasal of each class ; the sixth and seventh are called 
 semi-vowels and sibilants respectively, and arc here arranged 
 under the classes to which they naturally belong. 
 
 c. Besides the above classification, there is another of a more 
 simple and general kind, to which we shall have occasion to 
 refer. In this latter classification the whole of the letters of the 
 alphabet are divided into two different orders, called surds and 
 sonants. The ten hard consonants, together with the three sibi- 
 lants, that is, <F, *f; ^, ; i>, ; s5, t ; *f, *P ; *f, *, ?T, are 
 called surds; the rest of the consonants, together with all the 
 vowels, are called sonants. 
 
 83. We now proceed to lay down a few general rules 
 respecting the junction and permutation of consonants. 
 The subject, in fact, belongs more to the grammar of the 
 Sanskrit language ; but as the latter enters so freely into 
 the Bengali, it would be improper in us here to overlook it. 
 
 Rule First. 
 
 "When a word ends with any of the five hard aspirates, 
 and the next begins with a hard letter, aspirated or other-
 
 JUNCTION Of CONSONANTS. 00 
 
 wise, the final letter of the first word is changed into its 
 own corresponding unaspirated letter : thus ft-^r^^ ^flfs 
 chitralikh Jcaroti becomes chltralik karoti, li the painter exe- 
 cutes." 
 
 Rule Second. 
 
 If a word terminates in any hard letter, and the next 
 begins with a soft letter, the hard is changed into its own 
 unaspirated soft, as wfa^ + Jf*TI = "^twTI "a living con- 
 dition;" so <1<K IT <t vdk-devl becomes vdg-dcvi, "the god- 
 dess of speech." 
 
 Rule Third. 
 
 When a word ends with any of the ten soft consonants, 
 and the next begins with any of the ten hard, the soft 
 is changed into its own corresponding hard : thus, <JT3[W 
 w&fs kumud phullati becomes Jcumut phullati, "the lotus 
 blossoms." 
 
 Rule Fourth. 
 
 When a word ends with a letter of the ^ class, and the 
 next word begins Avith a letter of the F class, the final of 
 the first word is changed into the F class ; when followed 
 by the i? class, into the T? class; and when followed by ef, 
 into cT, as *r?^ + F^" = ! ^^ "the autumnal moon," ?T^ + 
 ^T5 = *((^1^ " a good pupil," w^s. 4- w* = ^tfTW^ " people of 
 the world," ^ + vffr=^|fa "flying," ^<t + f%fcf = ^fwf^ 
 " that writing," 
 
 Rule Fifth. 
 
 "When the leading letters of each of the five classes, viz., 
 ^, F, F, v5, and ^ arc followed by any sonant letter, that
 
 96 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 is, by a vowel, semi-vowel, nasal, 9f, ^, ^, IT, ?:, or their 
 aspirates, they become *t, 3F, ^, w, and ^ respectively, as 
 ^fst^jf^ = f^9tfst5ff% "lord of the region," ^ + ^= 
 " the six seasons," ^ + ^*Tff = ^5^*f " sprung from 
 it," v5, + tffo = sw*fi% "that state." "When a nasal follows 
 any of the above letters, the latter are usually changed 
 into nasals of their own class to agree with it, as Tfa + 
 srir = ^t^ "wordy," ^ + frftd'-G = ^fsfwr^ "on that ac- 
 count ;" but the final of the first word may also follow the 
 general rule ; hence there are two forms : thus, ^50, + s^3J 
 may become either ^fci^iu or ^s^J " that man." 
 
 Rule Sixth. 
 
 If a word ends with ^s or if, and the next begins with 
 *f, the ^ and w become F, and t is changed to ^, and 
 both are then united, as ^ + *ft"35' = ^5^1^ "that shastra." 
 If a word ending in ^, ^ or Pf be followed by ^, the ^ and 
 \5 assume their soft sounds, and the ^ is changed into the 
 corresponding aspirate, as Tt^ + ^t^ = Tf*> ^tr "destitute of 
 speech." 
 
 Rule Seventh. 
 
 ? preceded by *,$,?, S 1 , becomes i; but =r preceded by 
 any other short vowel and followed by a vowel, is doubled, as 
 g|- + srfa = 2Nif " shout of applause," ^ + ^rt^n = 7r^t^n " a 
 good spirit." In the same circumstances, ^, ^, and i are 
 doubled, as W + ^t?Tl == ^"^tTl " shadow of a tree." 
 
 Rule Eighth. 
 
 ~s\ initial preceded by any vowel except ^, ^rl, by a 
 semi-vowel, or any consonant of the first or ^ class, is 
 changed to *r ; and ^ followed by the F class becomes *t ;
 
 irxcTiox OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 followed by the T? class, it becomes 3", as fr -f 
 "prohibited, "srsrJT 4- FtiF-5R x (?11P "graceful-minded," s 
 F^T? - 5f^^T? "twang of a bow." If <r iiiuil is followed 
 by any letter of the fourth or "5 elass, it changes that letter 
 to its corresponding one in the third or T? class, as <r*r -f '4 
 = *& "the sixth." 
 
 a. Let us now briefly recapitulate the substance of what we 
 have stated in the preceding eight rules, together with a tew 
 additional remarks. It appears that if two aspirated consonants 
 should meet according to rule tirst, the first must be changed to 
 its own unaspirated letter. The letters ^, T>, T?, and v\. when 
 they open on a nasal, are occasionally changed to their own 
 nasals, but they may retain their own unaspirated soft sounds, 
 as Tf3> + sr*T = ^t^ir or Tt^nr "wordy." Any dental letter opening 
 on a palatial or a cerebral, must be changed to a palatial or a 
 cerebral, as ^s^i, + F = isr^w , and ^s, -f w^J = *>'s&w . When a 
 dental letter opens on the letter T, it should be changed to oT, as 
 3T 1 ?, + C^ffa = ^ eff^ The nasals \g. i, ^, preceded by a short. 
 vowel, when silent at the end of a word, and followed by a 
 word commencing with a vowel, should be doubled, as ^f^r-f 
 ^"f% = <rt5ffrf% . The letter ^, when beginning a word and pre- 
 ceded by a word terminating in a short vowel, should be doubled, 
 as ~3^f> 4. "grfirj = 3" -if ^Hrl -^ letter over which a C?"^? *<'> the 
 symbol _ r, is written may be optionally doubled ; thus it is cor- 
 rect either to write <Tl or ''3, though custom has established 
 
 that it should be generally doubled. 
 
 b. The letter "3T is both the dental and the labial sibilant ; *f is 
 the palatial, and sr the cerebral and guttural ; that is. when TT 
 opens on a palatial, cerebral, or guttural letter, it must be 
 changed in due order to the sibilant of the same class, as ^T + 
 fF<^ = ^f5s,, where the letter "3T has been converted into the 
 palatial *f, to agree with the palatial F of f%5,. Further, the 
 letter f{ is convertible into ^ when preceded by any semi- vowel,
 
 98 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 the aspirate, or any vowel but ^ or <3fl. The letter | is gener- 
 ally substituted for *f, when in the same word it is preceded by 
 3 or ^, but not if the ^ should be silent at the end of a word, as 
 ^ do" + ^r = <F1 " the act of doing." 
 
 Of the Symbol Anuswarah and Visargah. 
 
 84. Strictly speaking, the anuswarah and visargah ought 
 not to be classed as letters of the alphabet. They are mere 
 symbols or substitutes, representative of other letters, viz., 
 the anuswarah that of one or other of the five nasals, and 
 the visargah that of ? or ~s\. I here, however, follow the 
 practical rules respecting their conversion as laid down by 
 native grammarians. It is a rule, then, that anuswarah 
 followed by a vowel is changed into ^ : thus, "3T and ^"t^f 
 when combined become ^rsrf^i . "When the anuswarah opens 
 on any letter of the five classes of consonants, it may be 
 changed to the respective nasal of the class, as f 
 what are you doing?" 
 
 85. The character s, or visargah, is susceptible of three 
 changes under certain circumstances. First, when fol- 
 lowed by any surd letter, it is changed to ^, as <r^s -f 
 >fp5 = <r?^tn5 "Jupiter." Second, the visargah is changed 
 to ^ <9, when preceded by the inherent vowel, and fol- 
 lowed by any sonant letter, as 5^?+?^ = ^^?^ u a wish." 
 Third, the visargah is changed to ? when preceded by 
 any vowel but ^ or ^r|, and followed by a sonant letter, 
 as sr^"8 + tFs = ^r^f ~s . "When visargah -is followed by 
 either of the first two letters of the five classes, i.e., by 
 ^ *f, ^ ^, T? %, x5 T, ^ f$, or by a sibilant, it becomes a 
 sibilant, as ^1 4- ^<r = ^^^ " UK^ sun," fr +
 
 VISA TIG AIL 0!) 
 
 " thoughtlessness," f*%+ ff%=f5r?rfe " completion." When 
 <$ <t, ft >5, or a sibilant follows, there are two forms, as 
 + ^t? = f5W^C8? or c^Sfsra? " glorious," 3IW8+-*rtf%-S 
 or 3r5r**rtf% " peace of mind." When the 8 is preceded by 
 the inherent vowel ^, and followed by ^r or any consonant 
 not included in the preceding rule, it becomes *?, as ^s + 
 ^rfe = "^rtfe "older," C53t8 + *nr = reratsnr "glorious." 
 When any other vowel than ^ follows, it is dropped, as 
 + 4?- = ^SFSJR u therefore." 
 
 a. It appears, then, from what we have just stated reaper! ing; 
 the changes undergone by the anuswarah and the i-ixarga/t, that 
 it merely consists in their re-conversion into the letters for which 
 they were originally adopted as conventional symbols. 
 
 b. In the older Latin compositions we find the final .v of the 
 nominative case of the second declension occasionally suppressed, 
 on a principle somewhat similar to that which in Sanskrit con- 
 verts it into a viaargah ; with this difference, however, that, in 
 Sanskrit Prosody the short vowel preceding the risarguh is long- 
 by position, whereas in Latin the vowel preceding the suppressed 
 5 is short. In fact, the >v in Latin seems to have been sup- 
 pressed, in order to have a convenient short vowel on an 
 emergency. This shews, however, that the final A- must have 
 been but slightly sounded, otherwise the Poet would not have 
 taken so much liberty : thus, in the Fragments of Ennuis : 
 
 Suavis houio, fanmilii', suo contcutii', bcatus, 
 
 Sceitu' secunda lofjiiens in teinpore, commodu', verlniui 
 
 Paucuin, etc. 
 
 c. The final * in the French words lex Las may be considered 
 as a species of visarguh : and the r in a vast number of Knglish 
 words is very nearly uttered like the same symbol: llius. the / 
 in the word dark, as we pronounce it, is scarcely perceptible 
 to a foreigner; and a Brahman would probably write the word 
 \5t8^. The Scotch and Irish pronounce the r pure, like the
 
 100 
 
 BENGALI GHAMMAR. 
 
 natives of Persia and India; a Frenchman, when he pounds the 
 r, perhaps overshoots the mark, particularly if he happens to 
 be in a state of excitement. The final > in a great many French 
 words (for instance, Infinitives and Nouns of Agency ending in 
 er] may be considered as a visargah. 
 
 DERIVATION OF WORDS. 
 
 80. In Bengali the derivative words consist principally 
 of substantives and adjectives. They are divided by native 
 grammarians into tvro classes, viz., those derived from sub- 
 stantives, and those derived from verbal roots ; a divi- 
 sion of little practical use. Before we proceed further, 
 however, we would request the student to form a clear 
 notion of the terms Guna and Vriddhi already alluded to 
 in 77, which he may the more easily do by referring to 
 
 the following Table : viz. 
 
 ^1 is the 
 change of 
 
 or 
 
 to 
 
 as when 
 
 becomes 
 
 55 ^ 5; 
 
 <f% is the 
 change of 
 
 to 
 
 as when wz becomes ^ 
 
 
 5, 
 
 * 
 
 n 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 55 ^\ 55 
 
 87. Derivative Nouns may be classed under eight heads, 
 viz. 1. Gentiles; 2. Patronymics; 3. Abstracts; 4. 
 Amplificatives ; o. Diminutives; G. Verbals j 7. Denomi- 
 natives ; 8. Miscellaneous.
 
 DERIVATION OF \OVNS. <) 
 
 (t. (h')itilcs, or such nouns as denominate a people or race 
 from the country or city in which they live, are formed by 
 (hanging the first vowel of the country's name by f'ridd/ii, or 
 by adding some termination, or both together, as from fsrf'snn 
 comes tsjfsT-T "a man of Mithila;" ^t, ("SH^t? "a man of 
 Tudi." The most, common terminations of Gentiles are ^~w and 
 sfcr, as SrTfq " IVihar," srf^fff (f%FT) "a man of Maghadha or of 
 Bihar," T^", <JtptV " a man of Bengal." Instead of these the 
 words OT^t and C?*TV*r may be added, as '<] y (M *Tt or <T^<>*rtlT- 
 If the name of the country ends in ^T, ^r), ^ or %, the termi- 
 nation 1 ^ is added: thus, ffa "China," makes cF^t "a Chinese." 
 !>ut if the name of the country already terminates in "5f , the 
 letter IT must be subjoined : thus, from ^t*ft " the city of 
 Benares/' comes ^t^ftlT " an inhabitant of Benares." 
 
 l>. Patronymics, or such nouns as mark the descent of a person, 
 are formed from the original word by lengthening the first syllable 
 of it by /"/vV/r////, as fTftT^T " name of a celebrated sage," CH}T3 - a 
 descendant of Gotama;" f*T3", ^^ "a votary or follower of 
 Shiva;" SfSfj Tr'R " a descendant of Mann;" (fi^Tf~s u a man's 
 name," tTRTtfl! "a son of Devadatta." In addition to lengthening 
 the first syllable, some words take a termination like 
 J)TT or IT, and sometimes change their final letters, as 
 'a descendant of Nara ;" PT*r?^, FfT?fr ' a descendant of 
 Dasharatha;" ^sfa. "^IT^T "'a descendant of Atri;" ^t^f, f^U 
 "a descendant of Garga;" ^tSf| , ?tT5f?r "a descendant of a 
 kin;" 5", ^^"J "relatin to Indra." 
 
 
 c. jJhsfrfictti, which arc equivalent to English words ending in 
 -s-.v, hood, ship, etc., arc generally formed by the addition of 
 ^TT| or TT, as ^T "long," ft^T^I -length;" ^5 -good." 
 "goodness;" srf*^ "a man," 511^^" manhood;" -f~5 
 
 Cv, (>^ ^ 
 
 "a lord," T^ "lordship;" ?$& "white," ^f^Tj (%*(} "white- 
 ness;'-' ~g~5 "'a messenger." ~%aJ or OtW " a message." Sometimes 
 they arc formed by lengthening the fn>t syllabic of the word by
 
 102 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 Friddhi and changing the last; and at others by lengthening 
 
 it and adding IT, as <3<F "great," C$}J3 "greatness," "glory;" 
 5T^ "mild," STfJR "mildness;" f^<[ "steady/' fc^aj "stcdfast- 
 ness;" STsr? "sweet," ^Tf^r "sweetness;" ^H<l "beautiful," 
 " beaut." 
 
 r/. Amplificatives, which convey the idea of increase or multi- 
 tude, are formed by lengthening the first syllable of the word 
 by Vriddhi and occasionally adding ^ or TT, as C=TjT "people," 
 C^)^ " many people ;" C^F^F " a field," c^F5 " many fields ;" <3^R" 
 "a man," (<Tl<FWsr "many men;" (3T*f "hair," kpsr "much 
 hair." The most common way of forming them, however, is by 
 simply adding ^"^t, 3|, or IT!, as *T% "a lotus," stf^Tt "a col- 
 lection of lotuses ;" w^ "a man or person," ^fsnsl "a multitude 
 of persons ;" ^<| " grass," 3^/1 " much grass." 
 
 e. Diminutives, which are expressive of something small or 
 contemptible, arc formed by adding to the word the termination 
 
 ^, ^*r, 3?, ^ft, *ft*T, or 3, as <T5p "a tree," <P5FF "a small 
 tree;" ^f^: "a poet," ^fe:^r "a poetaster;" ^s^ "a horse," 
 ^"Si"^, ^Tf"5ft " a mule ;" f^^ " a doctor," f^^sfK " a quack 
 or a miserable doctor ;" <$\ "a hut," ^fcfa " a poor or miserable 
 
 Os. dK " 
 
 hut," "a cabin." 
 
 /. Verbal Pfoiins arc such words as are formed from verbal 
 roots, and signify cither the simple act of the original verb, 
 or the instrument by which the act may be effected. The 
 termination ^w is added to a root, generally converted by gnua, 
 to form verbal nouns implying the act of whatever the root ex- 
 presses : thus, ^je\ "the act of doing," from ^f "do," and ^^ . 
 Tbe termination 3f is added to roots converted by ^i to form 
 nouns implying the instrument or vessel by which any act is 
 accomplished, as (^3 "the eye," from ^t "to lead;" C^fT^l "the 
 ear," from '-hear." The terminations fs and iri form nouns
 
 VKItHAL NOUNS. 
 
 103 
 
 denoting the result of an action: thus, ^gtfs the action or 
 done," from ^f "do;" frwi "knowledge," from fsw "know." 
 The termination ^srl when suhjoined to a root forms nouns which 
 often imply the result of an action : thus, ^$~] " a search," from 
 3($f "seek;" but occasionally the noun thus formed has a more 
 general acceptation: thus, TS7T1 "old age," from "ST "waste away;" 
 and \5t?T! "a star," from 35 "pass." There are also several other 
 terminations, as may be seen in the following list : 
 
 ROOTS. 
 
 ^T to shine. 
 ^5 to cross, 
 to see. 
 *t to pierce, 
 to hold. 
 ^ to surround. 
 
 speaking. 
 ; to speak. 
 i to be angry, 
 to be splendid, 
 to move, 
 to be drunk, 
 to breathe. 
 
 X 
 
 ' to bear. 
 
 to sound. 
 
 to bind, 
 j to break down, 
 
 to tame. 
 
 to hear. 
 I to know. 
 
 to understand. 
 r to produce. 
 
 to crv. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 3 
 
 gold. 
 a wave. 
 
 the eye. 
 
 pain. 
 virtue, justice. 
 an orb, circle. 
 
 murmuring. 
 a word. 
 ^T man of low caste. 
 
 lightning. 
 
 conduct. 
 
 wine. 
 T air. 
 the arm. 
 cr iR a bow. 
 
 tx 
 
 a wife. 
 
 a sword. 
 a rod, punishment. 
 
 the ear. 
 
 a relation. 
 understanding. 
 an animal. 
 the throat.
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 to sleep. 
 
 to request. 
 ^1 to shine. 
 < to screen, 
 f to cut. 
 
 \VORDS. 
 
 a sleep, a dream. 
 
 a petition, 
 the sun. 
 armour. 
 
 a hole. 
 
 g. Denominatives, or nouns of agency, are formed from verbal 
 foots by various terminations like the preceding. The termina- 
 tion \51 is added to a root converted by ^| to form a concrete 
 noun implying an agent, as ^u1 " a doer, maker, or agent," from 
 ^f " do." Observe, however, that when words formed by ^51 arc 
 in a state of composition, this termination takes the original 
 crude form ^, as when ^ir^ " agency " is formed from ^ul " an 
 agent." The terminations ^5RF m. q^] /. when added to roots 
 augmented by 3"f% also form concrete nouns implying agency, as 
 
 F " who causes to do," from ^ "do." The terminations^ m. 
 
 /. are, in like manner, added to roots augmented by <rf% to 
 form nouns of agency, as ^t^t * <ttf?^t/. " a speaker," from ^ 
 speak." The terminations ^s^ in. W^t/. are likewise added to 
 roots to form concrete nouns of agency, as <lSi<? )ji. " a washer- 
 ma:!," <nr^t/. --'a washerman's Avife," from <r^ "colour." The 
 syllables w\~$ m. ^tft/. are likewise terminations deduced from 
 f "do," and added to nouns to form concrete epithets, as ^[^t^ 
 '' a blacksmith." A few other modes of forming derivatives of 
 this sort may be seen in the following; lL<t : viz. 
 
 TERMINATIONS 
 
 to do. 
 r to produce. 
 
 to beg. 
 to rejoice, 
 to receive, 
 to bind. 
 
 an agent. 
 it father. 
 ? a beggar. 
 a son. 
 
 (ft] a receiver, 
 friend.
 
 0- V 
 
 DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 105 
 
 TERMINATIONS. VOU1;S. 
 
 to bark. ^ ^T3 a dog. 
 
 <^<X' 
 
 ^cT to kill. ^^ ^7i^ or Nf^<t- a bear. 
 
 ff^T to go. v51 *T$1 a traveller. 
 
 Two nouns, or a noun and verbal adjective, are often used to 
 form nouns of agency, as "j^ffo, "$*ft3, ~*$?, ^^s?, "if^^f "a 
 
 //. Miscellaneous. There are many nouns which cannot be 
 classed under any of the preceding denominations, and which 1 
 have therefore called miscellaneous, as sr<t, srfu^rl "earth;" 
 ^Jj<j " undying," " ever-living," ^ V fi'fa^st " the immortal place," 
 " heaven," etc. The rules hitherto given refer to words either 
 purely Sanskrit, or at least of Sanskrit origin. The following 
 remarks apply to native words or those used in an idiomatic 
 sense. When the mutual performance of the same thing is to 
 be expressed, the verbal noun ending in ^STI denoting the result 
 of the action is reduplicated, and the letter ^" is substituted for 
 the final ^rl to end with, as^t^tfe "a mutual cutting;" srHrfrtf^ 
 "a mutual beating." Substantives arc also reduplicated in a 
 similar manner, as ^j^t^Tf^ "from ear to ear;" ^3[*rf^[f*t '-face 
 to face." A sound of no perceptible meaning is often made to 
 rhyme with a word to denote such things as generally accompany 
 it : thus, !f5nj5T * water," etc., the same as ^fT " water." A svl- 
 
 " N \ 
 
 lable is often reduplicated to imply an imitation of certain sounds, 
 as ^rwqrw "anv pattering sound;" ^r^T "the tinkling of bells." 
 
 \ \ V S 
 
 The following example will show how such reduplicated words 
 are used : viz. ^rfosfl'^ *ft^ (FT& ^r? ^rf^ffr 1 ^^W 
 STT3 'rf5T n " \Vounds fall without ceasing and inflict 
 
 <X 
 
 gashes ; I hear only the din and clanking sound of the battle." 
 DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 88. Derivative adjectives are of two kinds, those formed 
 from nouns like our adjectives ending in able, iblc, ate, cut,
 
 106 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 ous, y, ly, ful, some, etc. ; and those formed from verbs like 
 the English participles ending in ing. The terminations 
 ^T m. Tl / form adjectives, but the ^r of the masculine 
 is generally dropped in Bengali, though retained in San- 
 skrit: thus, fsrersTw. fsrefsrl/. "pure," "immaculate." The 
 terminations <sr m. ^ /. are of frequent occurrence ; but 
 generally the ^ of the masculine is altogether dropped 
 in Bengali, though retained in Sanskrit : thus, "37n| m. 
 -y.'kfft 1 /. "beautiful." The terminations <ST m. $ f. when 
 joined to nouns whose first syllable has been augmented 
 by <rf%, form adjectives with a meaning implying a rela- 
 tionship to what the noun implies : thus, srfsra " marine," 
 from *mjq "the sea." The terminations ^ m. ^t/. are 
 added to nouns, to imply the being possessed of what the 
 noun signifies: thus, ^lift in. <J?tP^^l /. " lustful," from sefT 
 " lust." The terminations ^ m. Tit/, or *rt^ m. *rft/. also 
 form adjectives denoting the possession of what the noun 
 to which they are added implies : thus, <J(^Tt^ m. ^C^T^ft f- 
 "holy," from <9f "holiness;" iT^fa in. Tf^rsrft /. "intel- 
 ligent," from "5J% "intellect." The terminations v^ m. 
 ^ft/. are added to nouns augmented by <rf% to denote the 
 possession of what the noun implies : thus, sflfsfe m. 
 " pious," from w " piety." The terminations tr in. 
 or ^ir m. ^rrl / or <[$ m. <($} and ^Tft /. or TT m. ^rl /. are 
 added to nouns to form adjectives implying some kind of re- 
 lationship, either general or particular, with the word which 
 they qualify. The words to which they are added are often 
 augmented by <rfw, as (*t1<K4iy " male," from <itW^ " a man." 
 The terminations ^o and^t^ arc often found joined to roots 
 and nouns to form adjectives denoting the having a ten- 
 dency to what they imply : thus, vif^a having a tendency 
 to sii/cr: "patient," from ^ "bear or endure,"
 
 DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES. 107 
 
 "compassionate," from inn "pity." The terminations ?? 
 and ^ form adjectives denoting possession or propensity ; 
 as ^T? "a lord," from ^*f "power;" fs^ "a beggar," 
 
 from f^sp "beg." 
 
 . A very great number of adjectives expressive of having or 
 possessing the thing indicated by the substantive, is formed by 
 affixing -^, SR, ^TT, *rT^fr, Ttf?w "holder," and the Hindustani 
 termination ^TrfcTl ; and a few by affixing faw, ^r, ^?r, '^its? , 
 cT, ^cT, ^r, ^r, *f, 3 to nouns: tlius, -$*t "beauty," 3t-3^ 
 "beautiful;" ^fsf "a wave," %f?T-3R "wa\T;" wf^T "know- 
 ledge," wff^W "possessing knowledge," "sapient," "wise;" ^cT 
 "strength," ?^T-*rt1%^ "possessing strength," "strong;" TjfH 
 "a cap," gf*f- v S^Tt?n "wearing or holding a cap" (a tcmi applied 
 to Europeans and Christians in general); c^^Tl "memory," 
 CTiTl-f^ 3 * or csrfk? "possessing a good memory," "having capacity 
 to learn;" 3Tf^ "an arrow," ^|4t<[ "having an*ows;" tf-g" 
 "a tooth," w^<[ "tusked;" ffiH "kindness," inrtfj "kind;" 
 "matted hair," snft-cT " having matted hair," " a devotee ;" 
 " hah-," ($ft-*t " hairy." 
 
 b. Adjectives formed by adding f3f*f " having," " possessed 
 of," ^^5 1C^ "joined or connected with," ^psi^ "possessed 
 of," 'STf^Ta' " having," " seized or affected by," and Spg " swallowed 
 by," "involved in;" though not literally or directly, yet in 
 effect, are of this class, as <Qi "quality," <Ql-f%f*r, WfiW, 
 
 "having or possessing qualities ;" <rf?f "anger," 
 "possessed of, or seized by anger." ^rt^T 
 and -^'|^<i " distressed," are generally annexed to nouns signify- 
 ing passions or consequences thereof, as CS^t 5 ^^ " distressed by 
 anger," c*Tf^tfcT "distressed by grief." 
 
 c. The following Past Participles arc often employed to ex-
 
 108 BENGALI GEAMMAE. 
 
 press the existence in some individual or thine;, of what the 
 noun implies, viz.,, "g^, -535,, ^f^5, f^f^^s, STS^, ^l^FS or 
 <j(|^x. all signifying "joined or attached;" ^f^"93s possessed of 
 faith: "confiding;" %535 possessed of glory, etc. : "glorious;" 
 *f^r|f^5 jwssessed with fear : " afraid ;" (^jyiyff^S possessed of 
 youth : " youthful ;" TSi?t-i U.^ possessed of shame : " ashamed ;" 
 ^CTtC^S possessed of good qualities : " accomplished ;" 
 
 addicted to vice or debauchery : "vicious/' "dissolute;" 
 "turned/' 3TW turned to what is good: "well-disposed;" 
 "pained/' (tftft^j pained by sickness : " sick;" ^f^5 "afflicted," 
 f*TtTff*tf afflicted with grief: "sorrowful;" p$ "seized," (-2^4^ 
 seized with love : "in love;" ^Krt^sT "filled," fF^t^T filled with 
 
 O^ IK 
 
 anxious thoughts- "sad;" ^Tf^lT "attained," f^"^nrW^ over- 
 taken by surprise: "confounded;" Tp^Tg" "gifted," WtT5f^" 
 gifted u'itJi knowledge: "wise;" "^5 "become," T*ft^5 become 
 obedient: "suhmissive ;" ^Tffti^ "filled," C^ft^tf^ filed with 
 splendour: "resplendent;" 3^3 "understood," %%??$ before un- 
 derstood : " forementioned ;" ^5 " devoted to," ^sr^^T^ devoted 
 to benevoloice : "benevolent;" ~%(~5 "done," ^3~T5 formerly 
 done: '-former/' "previous;" f^TS "'situated," ST^jf^s situated 
 in the middle: "medial," "central;" ^if^TS "pained," 
 pained at heart : "grieved;" <2fT^| "obtained," 
 lias been changed: "altered," "disfigured;" T3\ "'acquired," 
 
 acquired through favour : "bestowed;" f^5 "kept," 
 kept u'ithin : "concealed;" W\~s "born," ^^["SfT^ legit i- 
 li mutely born: "legitimate;" f^fir^ '-caused/' f^t^^f^f^r^ 
 caused by prohibition: "preventive;" Wffz53 "moistened," 
 moistened with pity: "affected;" nr^[ " effected," 
 
 effected by proof : "demonstrated;" ^tf^~S or ^5 > {Tf^lf"5 
 " earned," ^" 4 iTf^f^5 acquired through good works : " deserved/' 
 "merited;" "^f^TJ^rfferS acquired through a husband : -'marital," 
 "conjugal."
 
 DKKIVATIVE KHTHETS. 100 
 
 (1. The following epithets imply "fitness": "5*^, 
 
 or ^flT5 "lit," thus, fsRff?" deserving of hl<ime: "culpable;" 
 r : i "fit for empire;" '^qfCOft' Jit for work : "capable," 
 " active ;" HZnf^ as is Jit : " suitable," " much ;" ^| " wished," 
 (is '.v wished : " sufficient," " satisfactory." 
 
 K. Epithets arc very often formed from a past participle 
 and a noun implying a substance, to express some new con- 
 nection of one subject to another : thus, sift's " adorned," <l 3 n f<3~5 
 adorned with gems : "jewelled;" $jf^5 " inlaid," srft^lfF^ inlaid 
 with gems: "jewelled;" frfsrs "fashioned," C3\$ffiw$ formed 
 of iron : " of iron ;" ^T^5 " covered," <l<^j^7T ^"3 covered with hark: 
 "dressed in bark;" ^Ti^5" taken place," C^Tt?^ri^5 impregnated 
 with iron : " chalybeate." 
 
 /. The absence or loss of whatever the noun implies is often 
 expressed by subjoining the following participles : viz. ^fa " des- 
 titute," fTSTf^fa destitute of knowledge: " illiterate ;" ^f^5 " de- 
 serted," ^5T?<rf^5 without food: " foodlcss/' " destitute ;" ^fsfs 
 "abandoned," "at^T^fsf^ without reflection: "heedless;" ^z 
 " fallen," Wff$^ fallen from hirtlmght : "outcast ;" ^5 "' de- 
 stroyed," WH^4> bereft of consciousness : " confounded." 
 
 g. Epithets implying 1 similarity are very frequently formed 
 with the following terminations : viz. TfWtsr, ^2T, ftlT, ^i^f, WT9" 
 or ir*f "like," thus, f^js.TT^Tf'f like lightning: "quick," "nim- 
 ble;" F^"^" moon-like : "lunar," "beautiful;" ^t5flf^?T5f^ftir 
 like an emperor: "imperial;" f^FSl^f like a father: "fatherly," 
 "'paternal;" ^ffetTT heaven-like: "heavenly," "celestial;" ^nv^f 
 like the good : " virtuous," " worthy." 
 
 h. The word ^ literally denotes "form" or "'shape," hence, 
 "similitude;" but in composition it further signifies "composed
 
 110 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 of," or "consisting 1 of;" hence it is in a very limited degree 
 equivalent to a genitive sign, as thus stated by Dr. Yates : ' The 
 possessive case is supplied by 3^ " form," when the language is 
 not natural but figurative, as *l>J4*f ^f " the cords of death," 
 sff^rt'Wf *rn3 " the cup of salvation," c*ft^W*l' *stf$ " the fire 
 of distress." This word <s*t must not be confounded with its 
 cognate ^3f*f : the former may always be explained by " having 
 or assuming the form of," as C*Tf^?f^f ^f?f " fire having the form 
 of grief;" the latter, ^W*^ may always be explained by "being' 
 a peculiar form of," as ^"f^f^^t C*fft? " grief being a peculiar 
 form of fire," \4t^t? *fjrfa*f ftra^S^T sHT " his advice is poison," 
 that is, " a peculiar form of poison." 
 
 i. The subjoined epithets have a word implying an agent as 
 the last member of the compound, and no remark need be made 
 respecting them, except that their feminines arc formed by 
 ^"ft like other attributives in ^ . See 88. Wtf\ " making," 
 ^rsDtfs^fft making dishonour: "dishonouring;" ^t^fft "help- 
 ing," ^nr^t^ftFllft helping another: "kind," "humane;" 
 "speaking," fastJlTffft speaking falsehood: "lying;" ' 
 "censuring," ^t^t^t^tft censuring others: "slanderous;" 
 "going," ^sffffsft going before: "preceding;" ^Renft " Ac- 
 pending," ^5^fjt"5cT"^t depending on firmness: "patient;" ^ift 
 "abiding," ST^R^t abiding in the middle: "centra]," "medial;" 
 "ft^t " disposed to," ^^Ff^Tt^t disposed to assistance,: "bene- 
 ficent;" sp'srt "destroying," ^t^t?^"^t destroying kindness: 
 "ungrateful;" tf^t " seeing," ft^HP^t seeing long (before] : "pro- 
 vident," "cautious;" ^twt "desiring," ^T^^t^t^t^s^t desiring at- 
 tachment: " affectionate," "fond ;" ^"|7Tt " staying," ^^ft 
 staying in the atmosphere', "aerial;" ^^t " desiring," 
 desiring food: "hungry," "destitute;" rf*rt "abandoning," 
 abandoning right: "reprobate;" 3JTft " consuming,"
 
 DERIVATIVE EPITHETS. Ill 
 
 consuming ichat\s ascertained: "economical ;" <Tffft 
 " passionate," ^wi^|<rffTt passionate from moment to moment : 
 "peevish;" ^^4f6rt " delight ing," ^$*i1t(<l1f?t delighting in 
 his oivn acts: "vain-glorious ;" ^>it^<^t "following," "^fSSTtflft 
 following orders: "obedient;" ^^vil^t "following," 
 
 following the ordinances: "orthodox;" "sr^nfTft "following, 
 ^ t 93'ft^ \ijft following orders: " obedient ; " 
 
 -well-wishing: "benevolent." 
 
 A-. The following; epithets arc likewise formed by a termination 
 implying an agent: viz. tftlRF " giving," f^^tFf^ g> 'ring alms : 
 "charitable;" ^R? "producing," v ij ) <^ producing fear : "ter- 
 rific;" If *T?F " shewing," ^fVglf*^ .shewing ichat\s not desired: 
 "ominous;" "^"^<f " wishing," ^^CUJi^^ desiring power: "am- 
 
 s d-* (S. 
 
 bitious," "worldly-minded;" ^<r^ "fulfilling," IftftqfjR fulfilling 
 wishes: "kind," "humane;" STfW "destroying," f^^Tr^rf^ 
 destroying confidence: "treacherous;" ^|lft'f^ "exhibiting," 
 7^15f^t*t<f exhibiting self-qualifications: "ostentatious,," "vain- 
 glorious." 
 
 /. The following inseparable terminations serve to form epi- 
 thets, that are of very frequent occurrence ; they are all either 
 past participles, or the contractions of words implying an agent : 
 F<3[ "moving," ^f5TF moving in the icuter: "aquatic;" ^ 
 "doing," ^JfCi|'f^<-^[ causing uneasiness: "persecuting;" ^"stand- 
 ing," ?w^ standing in the middle: " medial," " an umpire ;" ft 
 "going," ^5f>5fft "going before: "preceding;" ft "singing," 
 ^TfSTff "singing the Sfima Ved;" w "knowing," Tf^w knowing 
 all things: "'omniscient;" ^ "destroying," 'tsf*^ "killing the 
 foe ;" ^<[ " seizing," sn^Tf^T captivating the heart : " fascinating;" 
 If "giving," ^T^l? giving food: "charitable;" ^f "born," ^-t^TSf 
 arising from lust: "libidinous." 
 
 fn. When the inseparable terminations XfiT m. srft/. are added
 
 112 BENGAL! GRAMMAR. 
 
 to a substance, it implies the being made up of it, or tlic being 
 filled with it: thus, "srg "composed of," ^W^T made of wood; 
 "wooden." The termination ^ " empty," "void of," seems 
 very much the opposite of 5r?T, and is of common occurrence : 
 thus, "g^J "empty," srjT^W destitute of men: "uninhabited." 
 The inseparable termination -^T implies a natural disposition to 
 any quality to which it is subjoined: thus, *rt=T "disposed to," 
 disposed to fear : " fearful," " timid." 
 
 n. The following adjectives being added to words, form at- 
 tributives : viz. 3T3R? " having cause," <s^C<rf*r^<rre effected ly 
 complaisance: "complaisant," "kind;" ^TtlT^ "'inherent," 
 F^irt^r^ consisting of four : " quadruple ;" ^A " being pre- 
 vious," f^TTT^^ with previous humility, "humble;" ^^ 
 "having an agent," ~^&$~Q^ having another for an agent i 
 "done b another." 
 
 o. The adjuncts <T~^ and ^ij^ will require some further 
 illustration, as they are peculiar in their use : they both are em- 
 ployed in place of the instrumental case, as we stated 23. The 
 first implies the manner how any act was performed ; and the 
 latter describes the agent by whom anything was accomplished, 
 and therefore requires the verb in the passive voice : thus, (^ 
 flrTSl ~*FF3 **>T\Fsf fe^^F frwtH 3f^r5f% 1 "O ye host of 
 Cods ! I make a ]i\nn\lit\-j)receding representation." The above 
 ( x unplc is therefore equivalent to "a representation preceded 
 hy humility," i.e. " an humble representation." Again, ^ff^lRRj^' 
 1 "that is declared by the Pandit," or "the 
 
 Pandit being the agent that is declared." 
 
 ]>. We now conclude with two lists of adjectives formed in 
 various ways, the first from nouns, the second from verbs.
 
 IiKUIVATIVi: AD.TECTIVKS. 
 
 11:5 
 
 1. Adjectives fanned from \ouns. 
 
 xorxs. 
 5P lac dve. 
 
 TLKM I NATION'S. 
 
 knowledge. 
 
 end. 
 
 hind part, 
 a race. 
 
 hell, 
 wind, 
 work, 
 fear. 
 
 
 wisdom, 
 a tooth, 
 honey. 
 5 coldness, 
 fear. 
 Pf hair. 
 
 knowledge. 
 ^ brightness. 
 TTfa" hair, 
 pa work. 
 
 '2. Adjectives formed from T'crlis. 
 
 The largest class of this sort is that ending in ^ (^w\ as 
 p-w), " standing/' ^T?Tt (9"^), "doing," gfSJTrt ( ^sj ) ' k bc- 
 lieving;" but there are many other ways of forming adjectives 
 from verbs as may be seen in the following table: 
 
 *T 
 
 r <^ dvod \\-ilh la<-. 
 \\"i<e. 
 
 r^r last. 
 
 "3 slippery, 
 honourable. 
 rt~5" hollisli. 
 ^t hypochondriac. 
 3-"*iJ# diligent. 
 ^fr terriiic. 
 ^snr sinful. 
 
 wise. 
 
 ^J dental, 
 sweet. 
 ^ cold. 
 ^t^T^j ^t^^ timid, 
 hairy, 
 wise. 
 
 (TSpfj" (^v) bright, glorious, 
 hairy. 
 
 f^t diliii'ent. 
 
 ROOTS. 
 
 to go. 
 
 to live, 
 to fear. 
 
 \YOHDS. 
 
 ^^ moving; a v/>iy. 
 "v living. 
 r terrifyins:. 
 
 8
 
 114 
 
 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 TERMINATION'S. 
 
 tf?r to pity. 
 TT^ to bear. 
 
 N 
 
 sTff to be soft. 
 
 - \ 
 
 ^^ to break. 
 ^ff? to awake. 
 *W to be bold. 
 
 *^ V 
 
 to eat. 
 sr to bow. 
 
 s 
 
 *T to perish. 
 1 to stand. 
 Sf to conquer. 
 
 pitying, 
 bearing, 
 mild. 
 
 breaking, brittle. 
 
 waking, 
 daring. 
 
 ravening, 
 yielding, humble. 
 <[ perilling. 
 
 standing, stationary. 
 
 conf{ucring. 
 
 DERIVATIVE VERBS. 
 
 89. We have already explained, 50, how causal verbs 
 are derived from their primitives ; it remains only to say 
 a few words on the derivation of Bengali verbs from 
 Sanskrit roots. As a general rule, if the Sanskrit root 
 ends with a consonant, the Bengali verbal noun is formed 
 from it by adding '^r, and sometimes changing the vowel 
 of the root by guna or vriddhi, especially such as end in 
 the anomalous vowel *n n, thus : 
 
 VERILVL XOUX. 
 
 worshipping. 
 
 counting. 
 
 taking up. 
 
 or C^T^R writing. 
 
 vomiting. 
 happening. 
 blazing. 
 
 VrilRAL NOUN. 
 
 bearing. 
 laughing. 
 doing. 
 
 si<r<i taking hold. 
 (-lying. 
 taking by force, 
 
 stealing.
 
 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 11" 
 
 Roots ending witli a double consonant, the first of 
 wliieh is a nasal, usually change the latter to *' and 
 lengthen the preceding vowel, as "STST, Nsft^sf " marking," 
 ap 7 *, ft^ "weeping," ^, ^f^ "sharing out," w, Tf'<^ 
 " binding." 
 
 The following may be regarded as irregular in their 
 formation, though with one exception regular in their 
 conjugation after they are formed: 
 
 fcr 
 
 vfl 
 ^ 
 
 VERHAL NOUN. 
 
 obtainin 
 with 
 
 speaking, 
 buying, 
 selling, 
 singing, 
 awaking, 
 knowing, 
 flying, 
 standing, 
 giving (irregu- 
 lar, vide 52.) 
 
 VERBAL NOUX. 
 
 seeing, 
 washing, 
 taking, 
 being, 
 measuring. 
 
 o* 
 
 coming, 
 keeping. 
 
 learning, 
 lying down. 
 
 hearing, 
 or f^r 
 
 or 
 
 being situated. 
 
 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 
 
 90. It is one main peculiarity of the class of languages 
 called Indo-European that they all, more or less, delight in 
 compound words. The Sanskrit, in this respect, stands 
 decidedly at the head of the family ; as there appears to be 
 no limit to the number of the words that may thus be 
 combined into one compound word. It is a general rule 
 that when two or more words are compounded, all the com-
 
 1 1 (1 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 ponont members, except the last, reject their characteristic 
 signs of gender, number, and case, and the intervening 
 conjunction copulative, if any, and then unite by ^rfw, if 
 applicable. 
 
 . The compound words, vivjt^ samusa, agreeably to the 
 nature of their construction, arc arranged under the following 
 classes by native grammarians ; viz. the W^ ; the ^*sr*TlT?r ; the 
 ; the ^<^3" ; the T^"3ftf^ ; and the 
 
 91. Is the aggregation of nouns in the same case and of 
 the same sort under one head, by omitting any intervening 
 copulative conjunction which is equivalent to our "and:" 
 thus, instead of <rfa "^T? P*srl they say ?tw*5T<l " Eama and 
 Lakshmana;" so instead of jfrc^ ^<r ererire they say 
 ?t^r^T 4 if^^^ "to Ililma and to Lakshmana;" so in the 
 following sentence, where we have a dwanchva consisting of 
 four words, : ^n5 <R < t T f^Tf3 << ^f^rj ^^ ^flttf? w^j ^sr^r^t^ 
 9ff%rrl ^t?T9 x 1 " Por tliis reason, having formed ornaments 
 for the cars-necJc-hands-fcet of the image, let nic decorate 
 it with them." 
 
 a. In Sanskrit this form of compound is divided into two 
 sorts,, called Harctdr and Nfutta/tard. The itdrctar consists (f a 
 combination of two or more nouns ending with a dual or 
 plural termination., as in llama-JLakti/tmatia-dig-ke, so also in 
 the oblique cases (;f t!ie following, viz. fsfStSTflJl "fatlier and 
 motheiy' ^^f^trrj " master and scholar." Again, the xdinulivra 
 consists of a similar combination of words forming a singular 
 or collective noun: thus, srt "^?"^ "flesh and blood/' sfff^rfff 
 ''hand and foot," ^|^TT'5tW"* >! T*f " form, taste, smell, and touch'' 
 (collectively).
 
 COMPOUND WOIJDS. I 1 
 
 02. The compounds of this class consist of adjectives 
 prefixed to their substantives in conformity to the rules of 
 stuulhi, as of?w + -sTtin = ^T^rtrrt "the Holy Spirit," "God ;" 
 srtsr + ^t5T = ^Rtcwr^^T u the blue lotus." 
 
 ft. The first member of a Kar mad /id ray a may al<o he a noun, 
 which, when t!uis prefixed becomes equivalent to an adjective. 
 or a substantive in the genitive case, as : 5^'^~5 ' a gold chain," 
 fJT^ir^? "the holy book," <ri5r<-srf<r" the kind's son," l ^^fp" the 
 preceptor's house," *f gj <! .in 3 tr\ 3 <l<- y tf^RT* ft "Fl " the beauty of 
 shoots, fruits, flowers, clusters and buds." In compounds of this 
 kind, words ending with *?y retain their original form, a 
 'father's religion," srlic-q^ "'mother's affection." 
 
 l>. Words denoting excellence, or used metaphorically for that 
 purpose, arc placed after the object, as ^f-T^rnR?- " an excellent 
 king," 5T^-f^T c ^ " a man-lion," or " a man bold as a lion," 
 "'a man-elephant," i.e., 11 powerful as an elephant," 
 " a man-tiger," "ft^?^" " the king of heroes." 
 
 c. The words <lt&H "a king," and "3HfT "'a day," when pre- 
 ceded by adjectives, drop their (final) ^, as ^irsrtT " a niu> day," 
 ^T^TtT ' ; a holy day," 3T^T?Tf5f "a great king." The word "sr?"^, 
 however, becomes W^ after tbe word 7f^ "all," and any word 
 signifying a particular part of time, as TTTts? '* J dl day," 
 " mid-day," ^JFrfTrT^ " evening," ^Tf^ "' forenoon." 
 
 93. A compound of this class is always preceded by a 
 numeral, which gives the idea of an aggregate number of 
 whatever the noun implies, equal to the value of the 
 numeral: thus, feirsw " the three-worlds," from fbr >; three," 
 and 1R~^ "a world;" ^l^t u the four-ages," from 
 ''four," and ^f u an age."
 
 118 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 , When applied to the names of weights, vessels, weighable 
 objects, SR is usually changed into irfsr or ~%f*l ; C*f? into (*f<fl ; 
 3F into ^Ffr^ ; s"F5 into ^tfl5 ; *fgf into sfsrl ; *<?i into i^tsi ; 
 into ^srf^^sT . FlTT-srfsr " containing or weighing four 
 
 ^o- < 
 
 mans or maunds," fs^-C^T^Tl " containing three seers," Tffc ^ut<? 
 'weighing fivq chhataks." J^We Appendix on Weights and 
 Measures. 
 
 4. 
 
 94. Tatpurusha samdsa is the compounding of two sub- 
 stantives by cutting off the inflective sign of the first ; 
 somewhat like our words "steam-navigation" and "Thames- 
 Tunnel:" thus ^-<Jt^ for tOT <jf^ "the son of the ^<F," 
 for ^r^sc?? TTft " the house of father-in-law," 
 for STST f^Tsl u my father," ^pzn5t~5l for ^tsrlTTf? T3t5l 
 our brother," Wfw for ^3R ^t^r "thy word," ^?5|^ for 
 "his house," ^t^f ^? for ?T"5rt? ^ "the king's 
 taxes," sits C^ or 5i1~sT? C^T " mother's affection." 
 
 a. Observe that in such compositions ^t5fl or ^tSf 5 ^ is changed 
 into <rtf, and "his," "thine," "mine," etc., assume what in 
 Sanskrit is called their crude form, viz., \5^$, ^~<?,, and 3^5, etc. 
 
 " 
 
 5. 
 
 95. Wlicn two or more words or compound terms being 
 put together form such an epithet or attribute as indicates 
 the object of attribution endued with or possessed of what 
 is signified by its component elements, and not their 
 respective significations singly, such composition is called 
 ^ifHx--yr?rm : thus, from *fhs " yellow" and ^rr? " cloth," 
 are formed *ft^T3T the epithet which means "clothed in 
 yellow," one of the denominations of Krishna, from his 
 generally wearing yellow clothes. As a general rule, re- 
 garding the order of the words in the above compound,
 
 COMPOUND WORDS. 1 1 1) 
 
 the final member is generally a substantive or that term 
 which indicates the subject of attribute ; the initial, a 
 substantive 4 , an adjective, a preposition, or a participle ; 
 and a medial, if any, generally an adjective ; for example, 
 onar-CWTF^ "lotus-eyed," a^Hif* "high-minded," if*rt^ "ten- 
 headed,'' '<^k " good-hearted," whence, " a friend," 9 
 "bereft of sense or understanding," ^ft^w ^<*1 (or 
 having a beautiful young wife." 
 
 a. When the compound word is an epithet of comparison, and 
 both the members are substantives, then the word compared to 
 is used first, and that compared, last, as F5"-?if^ " having a 
 moon-like face or person," i.e. "having a face as beautiful as the 
 moon." Compound words of this class are also formed by com- 
 bining with any substantive a passive participle ; in which case 
 the substantive is always used first. Such compounds are very 
 numerous, being:, in fact, formed at the pleasure of the writer or 
 speaker, to imply some new state of what is described ; a lew 
 specimens of which we here subjoin: ^5t ''arisen, 
 arisen from sleep: "awakened," <3STt3FfaJ" overstepped," 
 overstepped by an enemy: "invaded;" ^Nr" spoken," 
 declared in the Ordinances: "ordained;" f^f^~5 "directed," 
 HI 3 T<J ^ -4 directed iti the Ordinances: "decreed;" RlF^f "op- 
 posed," "*T| 35 T< <? % contrary to the Ordinances: " heteredox ;" 
 "^srf^TJ "' mounted," ^sp^tST? mounted on a horse : " riding," "eijucs- 
 trian;" ftf^S "proud," sjsrTffr? proud of -wealth: "purse- 
 proud;" ^5TN~5 "arrived," fetr*rt^rs arrived from abroad : 
 "foreign;" ^5^*8 "subjected," ^n?EtlT'Q suJtjeeted In fate: 
 "predestined;" W|~5 "'known," Vi^^fS who is acquainted* id th 
 all things: "omniscient," "wise;" R^ "pierced," 
 pierced Jty an arrow: "transfixed;" ^[%3 "marked," 
 marked with a name: "superscribed;" !fl? " i;iven," 
 "given by a goddess;" z^ "acquired," or ^Tfg "got," 
 obtained from a god;" jftu '' composed,"
 
 120 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 "composed by a Pandit;" <^f^5 "filled," ^T^f^S "filled with 
 bran;-' ^^ "eaten," si^lr^ "eaten by an elephant;" cTtf 
 "fixed," Wffffl "stuck in the mud;" *ff%3 " fallen," ^cfff^ 
 "fallen into the water;" Wt ' " wasted," ^5^t ' wanted in body: 
 " emaciated." 
 
 I). Every compound word of this class, being' an epithet, must 
 agree in gender with the word to which it is related, and there- 
 fore its final component part, if of a different gender, is to he 
 changed into the form of the same gender of which the object 
 (qualified) is, and the rest generally into their crude or neuter 
 form : thus, Masc. ^^b^:4 (<J(<Fsr) "black coloured," or " a black 
 man;" Fein. 3^3 ?'l (ift) "a black woman;" Neut.^a 3' (3"5[) 
 "a black coloured cloth." 
 
 r. If the last member of a Bahurrlhi compound end in $ , 
 or be a feminine noun with a final ^ or ^, then 3? is affixed to 
 it, as wir|53? "without a mother," "having no mother;" TT^^? 
 "'having a wife," "with one's wife." The letter 3? is generally 
 affixed to the words ^?T5T '-chest," ^TTTT "age," Tif^r "ghee," 
 ST "fame," ^rf "'object" preceded by the privative particle 
 and usually to 3T?T| "an instrument;" also to ^^ "be- 
 fore," ^ " root," " origin," <j2f " a son," ^rf preceded by TT, 
 and some others, when they form the last member of the Bahu- 
 rrllti compound, The ^ is optionally added to SRTT " niind," and 
 a feu' more, when similarly situated : thus, ^JTJ+ ^ 
 "broad-chested," xsrfw + ^"^ = wfe^"^ "aged," 
 = fniTTfW '-ioiul of ghee," ^ + ^ = ^W^ "useless," 
 <??i<p "by means of," ir^s + IP 5 )^! = sr^tlT^r^ "very famous," 
 ^f _j_ ^^r == ^[^,7^ " without an olycct." ^ -f ^T = = ^T^^I^ 
 'without foundation," ^ + <^ = ^5\<?j~33- "without a sctn," TT 
 
 ^ s5[f = -yrf^% " successful," ^^j + 5[^^r = ^na/sr^ng or ^sr^;s^^ 
 
 " differently minded." Finally, observe that ^"4 preceded by 
 f^<T is used in Bengali both with and without 3?, as fif^^ or 
 f*f^^j; ' usehvs. " The former, however, is not correct according 
 to some Sanskrit icrammarians.
 
 COMPOUND VKIU',8. 
 
 G. 
 
 9G. These require very little notice, as the term applies 
 to any of the five preceding words when used in an 
 adverbial sense. They are formed either by prefixing 
 some indeclinable word to a 1101111, simple or compound, 
 
 as irfa^ ^fa^ or srfasspfasr " as long as life lasts," Trfa 9 - ^ndj 
 F^" "as long as the sun and moon endure," W1"*rfs* "to 
 the extent of one's power ; " or by adding to the same 
 some adverbial termination (see G3, etc.) ; thus, ^it^r^. 
 " like or in the manner of a flower." 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 97. In Bengali there is really but one species of com- 
 pound verbs, although the grammarians have extended 
 their number to no fewer than sixteen, to the great per- 
 plexity and disgust of the student. Verbs of this kind 
 arc all formed by combining with the conjunctive past 
 participle of the leading or principal some other verb 
 regularly conjugated, tending to modify the sense of the 
 former. Such compounds may be neatly classed under five 
 heads as follows : 
 
 a. Intensive^. These are formed by adding* to the conjunctive 
 past participle such verbs as (^r-d-j " to throw," (% ^ ' to give," 
 or Tfl<ir < to go," (and some others to be acquired by practice), 
 and signify the mtcnscncss of the act ; as ^fsfSTl CWZ\t u to re- 
 move,'"' ^fsrsrl (Jr>Sf "to call," cT^TTl *Ti^T "to take a\vay." In 
 all these expressions, although t\vo verbs are employed, there is 
 but one single action described, and that in an intensive decree. 
 It sometimes happens, lunvcver, that they signify t\vo distinct 
 acts though closely connected together, as Sff^TJTl ^T^*T to seize 
 and bring-,"' literally, having sci/ed to bring," ^ff^r\ ^^ " to
 
 122 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 tell and call," *firr| *rt&W "to send and tell (i.e., to send 
 word)," Sff?rrl sait^*M "to seize and come." As a general rule, 
 the second member of the intensive verb loses its own proper 
 signification ; and, at the same time, conveys to the leading verb 
 an idea which in English may nearly be expressed by adding 
 such words as up, off, down, away, etc. : thus, *t1^ii1-c*peif "to 
 eat up," ^iPbVl-Cff^ "to leave off," 3ltfwi- <? ff^ "to knock 
 down," tfcriiil sr!^ " to go away." 
 
 b. Statistical. These are formed by the conjunctive parti- 
 ciple with the verb ?Tfr, and signify the becoming of what is 
 expressed by the participle, as ^fsrrl *T|^J "to be flying," ^H^jTl 
 STl^R "to be rising." According to the anonymous Bengali, a 
 species of statistical verb may also be formed by repeating the 
 present participle and adding to it some other verb regularly 
 conjugated: thus, f%fsr fft'^T^ ^'tf^'Sf:^ "he or she comes 
 (in the state of one) singing," Oft ^tf^^5^ fltlf%*T "he or she 
 ran (in the state of one) weeping." This, however, is probably 
 an imitation of the Hindustani, which forms its statistical verbs 
 in a manner precisely similar. 
 
 c. Frequentatives, These arc formed by the conjunctive parti- 
 ciple with the verb sff^FW "to remain" or "continue," and signify 
 the habit of doing what is expressed by the participle, as ^f^rrj 
 STfcW " to be in the habit of doing," flflfwl *Tf^ " to be in the 
 habit of running," f<d<ib!l ^f%TT| srf^ "to be in the habit of 
 reflecting." In like manner by combining with the participle 
 the verb ^1"$ *ij the sense resulting will be that of a persevering 
 or unremitting action: thus, fjfr *Ta ^f?<Tl "^Tfcnrsc^ "he has 
 been exerting himself all aloni;'." 
 
 (1. Conijrtetives.Tlicsc arc formed by adding j^ "to have 
 done," or "to settle," regularly conjugated to the conjunctive
 
 COMPOUND VEItlW. 123 
 
 past participle of a verb, as T|i? V1-J^ "to have done eating." 
 I have inserted this fonn of compound verb on tlie authority 
 of the anonymous grammarian alluded to in 21, a. It is 
 apparently a Hindi idiom ; and I cannot say I ever met with it 
 in the few Bengali works I have read. The literal meaning of 
 JT&3 in Bengfdl is "to mistake," or "to err;" but in Hindi 
 chuknd with the u short signifies "to have done or completed," 
 whereas the verb "to err" is chuknd with the u long. This 
 double sense of chtikun in Bengali sometimes leads to an am- 
 biguity : thus, the expression r stfz'ft f^fsnrl $f<- *1 1 f^T may signify 
 " I have completed the purchase before," or it may mean " I 
 have erred or done wrong in (this) before now." When the con- 
 junctive participle is preceded by the negative r|, the verb 
 chnkaii retains its literal meaning, as ^Tfa^t r) fl>yi j^R-^tf^ 
 " I have done wrong by not selling it before." 
 
 e. As a mere matter of curiosity I subjoin, with a few remarks 
 of my own, the following list of compound verbs from Dr. 
 Yates' Grammar and that of the anonymous Bengali : 1 . 
 jVoininals 'which are formed by uniting any noun or past parti- 
 ciple with an auxiliary verb, as Spir 3^*1 " to buy," 
 "to sell," *tSR ^1 "to go/' ^5rt5ttr=f <^$e\ "to come," 
 "to judge," "consider," W9 C?^ " to punish," ^5 ^l "to 
 humble," ^r^ ^ZT 4 ! " to bear." ; Now not one of these can be 
 called a compound verb; it is a simple expression in which a 
 transitive verb governs the accusative case. 2. 'Double com- 
 pounds, which are formed by the union of two or more nouns 
 with a verb, as (i&H ^Tfa ^^ " to eat and drink," 
 ^q " to nourish and cherish," fftH' ^rfTf^r^ ^i or 
 " to come and go." ' This is precisely the same kind of ex- 
 pression as the preceding ; the only difference is, that in these 
 last the accusatives governed by the verb kuran, arc Dwiindwit
 
 124 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 and not single words; but the principle in both is the very 
 same. 
 
 /. Dr. Yates goes on to say, ' besides the preceding 1 , there arc 
 several other kinds which arc by some denominated compounds, 
 and considered to be formed of the present participle ending 
 with ^T5 and the following verb/ The reverend author here 
 falls into a mistake by confounding the present participle with 
 the infinitive. The fact is that the following so-called compounds 
 are in every instance simple expressions in which one verb 
 governs another in tlie infinitive mood, as Lindlcy Murray hath 
 it. Dr. Yates then proceeds, 'among these are reckoned: 3. 
 dcqnisitives, as Cff*tT3 ^Tl<jr "to obtain leave to see," 
 *tl*?r "to have leave to go;" 4. Desideratives, as ^f%< 
 "to wish to do," (iffsfcS Ff^-T '-'to wish to sec;" 5. Inceptive*, 
 as '$p<ir-5 rf*fT " to begin to do," (&rf*ftT ^^ " to begin to sec ; " 
 G. Potentials, as ^f?Z3 ^fT?^ " to be able to do," (^fsft~5 ^rt?^ 
 "to be able to sec;" 7- Pcrmi.ssircs, as ^Tf^"^5 C^^^ "to allow to 
 go," ^rtf^HTS C?^'^ '' to allow to come." '
 
 120 
 
 SECTION YT. 
 
 SYNTAX, OR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 OS. The Syntax of the Bengali language is extremely 
 
 */ 
 
 simple, both as regards concord and government. Before 
 we (niter upon the subject, however, it may not be amiss 
 to state in a few words what we mean by the term sentence. 
 I take it for granted, that, when properly analysed, it will 
 be found that in all languages a simple sentence must 
 necessarily consist of three parts, expressed or understood : 
 1st, a nominative or subject ; 2nd, a verb'', and 3rd, a predi- 
 cate or attribute] as " tire is hot," " ice is cold." In many 
 instances the verb and attribute are included in one word, 
 as " the man sleeps," equivalent to "the man is sleeping;" 
 in which case the verb is said to be neuter or intransitive. 
 "When, the verb is expressive of an action, and, at the same 
 time, when the sense is incomplete without stating the 
 object acted upon, it is called an active or transitive verb, 
 as "the carpenter made a table;" in which sentence it is 
 evident that something is required beyond the verb to 
 complete the sense, for if we merely said "the carpenter 
 made," the hearer would instantly ask, "made what?" 
 An intransitive verb also frequently requires some ad- 
 ditional words to complete the sense : thus, if we merely 
 say, " Tmmr came," the sense is very vague; but if we 
 say " Tlmur came to India," the sentence is complete. In 
 a sentence whose verb is active or transitive, we shall de-
 
 126 EEXGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 signate the three parts as nominative, verb, and object : thus, 
 the carpenter is the nominative ; made, the verb ; and a 
 table, the object. When the verb is intransitive we shall 
 denote the three parts of the sentence as nominative, verb, 
 and complement : for instance, in one of the above examples, 
 Tlmur is the nominative ; came, the verb ; and to India, 
 the complement. 
 
 . It appears, then, that the shortest sentence must consist of 
 three words, expressed or understood ; and it will be found that 
 the longest is always reducible to three distinct parts, which 
 may be considered as so many compound words. For example : 
 " The scorching 1 fire of the dark thunder-cloud utterly consumes 
 the tall and verdant trees of the forest." In this sentence the 
 words fire, consumes, and trees, are qualified or restricted by par- 
 ticular circumstances : still, the complex term, " The scorching 
 fire of the dark thunder-cloud " is the nominative ; " utterly 
 consumes " is the verb ; and " the tall and verdant trees of the 
 forest" is the object. The Sanskrit language, the most philo- 
 sophic of human tongues, or, as the Brahmans not unreasonably 
 say, "the language of the Gods," would easily and elegantly 
 express the above sentence in three words. "The scorching fire 
 of the dark thunder-cloud " might be thrown into one compound 
 in the nominative case ; the verb " utterly consumes " would be 
 expressed by an appropriate preposition in composition with the 
 verb to consume- and, "the tall and verdant trees of the forest" 
 might be formed into one compound in the accusative plural. 
 
 1). In the arrangement of the three parts of a sentence, dif- 
 ferent languages follow rules peculiar to themselves ; for instance, 
 in the sentence, "the elephant killed the tiger," the Latin, Greek, 
 and Sanskrit languages have the option of arranging the words 
 in any order that may best please the car. The Arabic and the 
 Gaelic put the verb first, then the nominative, and lastly the 
 object. The English and French follow the logical order as we
 
 CONCORD OF SUBSTANTIVES, ETf. 127 
 
 have given it; and the Bengal!, like the Hindustan!, and most of 
 the dialects of India, has also an arrangement of its own, which 
 we shall now proceed to explain, as our first rule of Syntax or 
 construction. 
 
 99. The general rule for the arrangement of the parts 
 of a sentence in Bengali is, first, the nominative or agent ; 
 secondly, the object or complement ; and, last of all, the 
 verb : thus, <rfa uts t^x^-J " llama is going," ?T5r *f3 ^iiUb? 
 "Rama is gone," 3t*T ^s/t*^ %r$(.** "llama caught Shyama," 
 
 "the king addressed his sons, who were ignorant of the 
 shastras, and continually going astray in forbidden paths." 
 In this last sentence we have a fair specimen of the Ben- 
 gall arrangement. Sc rclj'd, "the king," is the nominative ; 
 kahilen is the verb, placed as we have stated at the end 
 of the sentence; and all the intermediate portion is the 
 object. 
 
 CONCORD OF SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 100. When two substantives refer to the same person 
 or thing, they are put in the same case, as ^st^t? <5H 
 
 tf^cT "his brother Gopal told me," f%fr ^^P 
 <K<M "he counts his brother an enemy," 
 "the river Ganges," ^fa ^lf%TfT*r "Kalidiis the poet," 
 
 C-> / JL / 
 
 J?CT "the mango fruit." 
 
 a. The name of a thing and that of the quantity, measure, 
 etc. it implies, are put in the same case, as in German : thus, 
 ^Vi<l i^. " two seers of milk," pffF ~s^ 5c\ " five maunds of 
 oil." In like manner, the name of a vessel and that of the 
 thing it contained or may contain, when not declined are used 
 in the same ease, as ^ *f|T[ ^cT " a glass of water," flR
 
 128 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 " three boats (filled with) rice," <<& Tf^pr T?W " a quantity 
 of rupees contained in one box." 
 
 b. The name of a place, animal, or thing, and the word sig- 
 nifying; it, when not declined, are, with a few exceptions, put in 
 the same case ; as s^f*tPffatP? f^f or ^? ^C?f*fFt^t? " the city 
 of Murshidfibad," ^f?Tt? t*f "the holy place (called) Haridwar," 
 C4TTWt?|Tf stit " the elephant (named) Khodadad." So, also, the 
 generic name of a tree, when not declined, is either put in the 
 same case with the word which signifies the tree or part of it, or 
 is governed by the word, as ^fttf^ w\% or "zfrftt W& "the soondari 
 wood," TTcT ^TS or *ftsT3 *TT3 '-'the leaf of the shal-trce," 
 or CT'^ Stf" " the teak tree." 
 
 c. The two words mentioned together, and agreeing with one 
 another in case, as shewn in the three foregoing rules, are in 
 declension considered as one word, and inflected accordingly ; 
 only the last of them admitting the different inflective termi- 
 nations : thus, Nom. Tj"5f| rcrt '' the river Ganges ;" Gen. 9f^"| 
 ^rift? " of the river Ganges." Nom. '5^'SR ^$ " two maunds of 
 milk;" Loc. "S^R ^^Z^ "in two maunds of milk." 
 
 d. When in a sentence, between the name of the thing used 
 first, and that of its quantity placed after, a numeral (excepting 
 the numeral ii)3? "one") intervenes, the sense becomes definite, 
 as fe -5ftTl ft "three jars of ghee," ft f^r ^rtr| "the three jars 
 of ghee." The numeral ^ " one," always renders the noun, to 
 which it is prefixed or atlixcd, indefinite in signification, as we 
 have already shewn in 14. 
 
 101. As a general rule, the adjectives in Bengali, as in 
 English, arc placed before their substantives, but do not 
 vary with regard to the number, gender, or case of the 
 latter, as Latin and Greek adjectives do : thus, 
 "a good boy," ^ <rfac<^1 "good boys; 11
 
 CONTOKD OF ADJECTIVES. 120 
 
 good girl," ^T TTfet?1 "good girls; 
 liouso," "stsT Tfft TR-eT "good houses; 
 good l)oy," UtcT <JH<T-<><1 "of good hoys, 
 a good girl," TST Trfwrf^Tre " to good girls ; 
 " in a ood house." 
 
 " 
 
 
 a. Pure Sanskrit adjectives reecive the feminine termination 
 when qualifying 1 animate feminine nouns, but they do not receive 
 the plural and oblique terminations when qualifying such nouns 
 in the plural number or oblique eases : thus -i^*it<l <y^ET " a beau- 
 tiful man," ^H^t "3ft "a beautiful woman;" Xom. phi. ^^T3 
 ^C<^(:y<11 '-beautiful men," '.(.kfl "3?t?fl "beautiful women ;" (ien. 
 sing. ^H<1 ^iC^W? > v <**t<il "5ft? ; (ien. phi. ~3^%~3 ^t^y^lr 
 but not " 1 ^<rj| ^?^^?1 > ^ J dft?1 "t?T| etc. 
 
 b. When another word signifying 1 plurality is added to the 
 feminine noun, the adjective agrees with the former, and not 
 with the feminine, as "SftTft "3Jf<F5T ^~9"^Tl ^T^TTir-f ^^fpT "the women 
 being afraid fled." Here ^Jt^T agrees with *ti, and not with 
 "3ft , which would have required 
 
 c. Inanimate nouns with a feminine termination (which are 
 often personified) have the adjective occasionally in the feminine, 
 even when they arc not so personified, as 
 " the earth is filled with people." 
 
 d. Dr. Yatcs on this subject says, ' Some writers go so far as 
 to make the adjective feminine when it qualifies any noun that 
 is feminine in the Sanskrit, as i*)"^" ~%fsf or wp^K-1 ?1"?t<r5 <5> ff?' < f e i1 
 ^IC^ "this soil is full of sand." This is an attempt at refine- 
 ment which is never observed in common discourse, and which 
 even in writing appears pedantic. It seems most according to 
 the genius of the language, and therefore best, never to alter 
 the termination of the adjective, unless it agree with a noun 
 
 animate of the feminine gender.' 
 
 9
 
 130 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 c. Passive participles, being purely Sanskrit, have the same 
 concord as adjectives : thus, <5t<^ "sj^sp ^Tl "9T5 ^P^=T f%lf "3ft 
 ?.9 yl tft^ C^T " the man being released fought, but the 
 
 woman being released went home ;" 
 
 ^^ ^1 "although he 
 
 had great wealth, yet seeing his various other friends richer he 
 was not satisfied." 
 
 102. The relative pronoun usually precedes its correla- 
 tive or antecedent (as it is termed in our European Gram- 
 mars) : thus, f*rfr Wt$ fwtT^w f~sf^ ^srf^t? ftr<:<H " he who 
 hath given (thee) life, will give (thee) food;" literally, "he 
 who hath given (thee) life, that same will give (thee) 
 food : " so c*T <$*& 3PU ^f^s *Tfr? (^ "*R ^f?^^ <p ft^ u he who 
 can do such a deed as this, is capable of doing anything;" 
 ftfo ^fr?re Wt*r wc$* fsf^ ^:^t ^? <:<H " he who trusts in 
 God will be happy;" Trl^l ^fsr t^l ^? ^1 ^Tfsr f^ "I will 
 give you what you wish ;" ^rt^tjl ^"W? f*WC ^T^rsr ^T^t?1 
 ^^tCTr^ *fiT^ u they who come to me shall obtain instruc- 
 tion." Observe that the correlative of ftfr is always f%fr, 
 and the correlative of c*T is c^ ; the former being the more 
 respectful, and the latter inferior. 
 
 a. From the preceding examples it will be evident that the 
 relative pronoun in Bengali is used in a manner totally foreign to 
 the idiom of the English language. In English we say "This 
 is the man whom I saw," putting first the demonstrative or cor- 
 relative "this," and appending the relative " whom." But the 
 idiom of the Bengfili language requires the construction to be 
 inverted : thus, ^ffr *rTTTC<F (Tff^tf^Tt^ ^ (7^- ^jf^J literally, 
 "whom J saw, this is that man;" or isTtf^T C*T ^jf^pE^ (iffanrff^t^r 
 CTT ^"P" literally, " what man I saw, this is he." In these sen- 
 tences irtTtS^F and C^T are the relatives, and (^~ and OT the de- 
 monstratives. To place the relative after the correlative is con-
 
 CONCORD OF VEIJIIS. l')l 
 
 trary to the idiom of the Bengali language,, and nothing short of 
 necessity ran excuse it. 
 
 I). In sentences like the following, the correlative may option- 
 ally he used before the relative, as t<i i<l<:*f<I C*T^~ ~5T "*IZ^ 
 
 ; or, 
 
 "that part of India is called Bengal in which the Bengali lan- 
 guage is current." 
 
 c. When the relative is in the first or second person, it must 
 be combined with the personal pronoun in the nominative case, 
 as *ftf^5 (H ^tfw '^TsrfS ^T5 *lf^s 5Tf^" " I who am ill, have not 
 
 such strength." 
 
 CONCORD OF VERBS. 
 
 103. In Bengali, as in other languages, the verb agrees 
 with its nominative in person, but not by any means in 
 number, except in the first person, which is the same in 
 both numbers. In the second person, the plural verb, as 
 among ourselves, is generally used with a singular nomi- 
 native. On the other hand, a plural nominative will have 
 a singular verb, when the speaker intends to mark supe- 
 riority in rank, station, etc., on his own part, or contempt 
 and disrespect towards the persons he addresses. The 
 third person singular may always have the verb in the 
 singular, without necessarily indicating that any disre- 
 spect is implied. At the same time, when great respect 
 is intended, the singular nominative has the verb in the 
 plural ; and lastly a plural nominative takes the singular 
 verb, when disrespect or inferiority is implied. 
 
 a. Drs. Carey and Yates, also the anonymous Pandit, have, 
 I think, very needlessly and even inaccurately, in their Bengali
 
 132 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 grammars, innovated the good old terms of plural and singular 
 into honorific and common, respectively. In the paradigms of 
 the conjugation of the verb, I have followed Halhed and 
 Ilaughton, whose systems arc in accordance with common sense. 
 Why in the name of goodness puzzle the student with new and 
 incorrect terms, when the old ones are infinitely better ? The 
 use of the plural for the singular verb, and vice versa, is not 
 peculiar to the Bengali alone. It is equally applicable to the 
 Hindustani, the Marhattl. and, in some degree, to the Persian ; 
 also to the German and other European languages. 
 
 Use and Application of the Tenses, etc. 
 
 104. The following remarks on the tenses of the verb arc 
 chiefly adopted, with numerous additions and corrections, 
 from the last edition of Dr. Yates' "Bengali Grammar." 
 In that valuable work they are prematurely introduced at 
 page 52 ; and, by consequence, at too early a stage of the 
 student's progress. I conceive them to belong more to the 
 Syntax than to the Etymology of the language. 
 
 a. The Present indefinite tense is used for general statements, 
 and has no definite reference to any particular time, as fsfr 
 <K<M "he reads," ^t^t^l iHjrr ^~$ "they labour," <?rf%?1 
 "birds fly." The student may here observe that in this first 
 example the singular nominative has a plural verb, out of respect 
 for literature. In the second and third examples the plural 
 nominatives have a singular verb, for reasons that will be obvious 
 from what we stated in 103. 
 
 In familiar conversation and vivid description, it is sometimes 
 used in a past sense, as wf^tfr C<T ^T^ fesR ^ITT? ^Tfa "Sf^Tt^ 
 Tj " I did not understand the meaning of the letter you wrote," 
 ^~3J ^srff^T rT"5R ^fTT <^R ^WST *Ttfy5 s^cTT^T "I became sick just 
 at the time 1 was dining yesterday." It is also sometimes used
 
 ATl'IJCATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 ill the sense of the future, as ^f?r f% Tfbt *Tf^"31 "will you go 
 home ?" ^srlfir *rtt" " I KO" '<' " "'ill go." 
 
 b. The Present definite is used to express an act or event now 
 in progress, hut not yet completed, as ^srtfsr forfeit ifV " I am 
 (no\v) writing," f%fr <TT^ ^T^Cii^*? "he is (now) reading." This 
 is as much as if the speaker had added, " I have not yet done 
 writing or reading." 
 
 c. The Past indefinite tense is used to express time past, when 
 referring to an event or act which is spoken of as being only one 
 in a scries or narrative. By using this tense the speaker indi- 
 cates either that he will immediately tell what came next, or 
 that he supposes his hearer to know what followed. It is there- 
 fore used in narratives, as f^sfsr \5f$ ;U<> <3^~ 3-3T1 f&i % t *1'1 <T<JC?H 
 " he asked him this question," c^T ^T^tW <^" ^1F? fw " he gave 
 him this answer." 
 
 This tense is also frequently used to denote an event which 
 has happened just now or very recently, and sometimes even one 
 which is expected to happen the next moment, and then it cor- 
 responds with the perfect, the present, and sometimes even with 
 the future in English : thus, ^flfsr ^1^1<r S-f^sllW " I have taken 
 my food, just now ;" t >\'s^ ^f^TtfT >iwy ^ y\ '-'it is time to go;" 
 ^rrf^r ^ f3r f%fmt5T '' I write this letter;" ^H ^Tfr (Tfwt? 
 ^^TT? ^r-2ft^r Tf^TT^ "now I understand the meaning of your 
 discourse;" ^rjfsr Ff^Tl^r " I am off, or on the point of going;" 
 that man will be tumblin into the water.'' 
 
 (/. The Ini])crfect tense represents an action or event in pro- 
 gress at some time past, but not then finished, as fjfsr "^rfrrfi!^ 
 
 ; ^rr*rt5 ^fesfe^ t"fe^^ ^ ^ni\^ c^ri " y u camc U P J usit 
 
 at the time he was striking me." 
 
 c. The Perfect tense represents an action as recently com-
 
 134 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 pletcd, and at the same time as unconnected with any subsequent 
 act or event, as ^rffr 4>]^id<t? C^ ^Ti <t-f\yif^ " I have told him 
 that affair ;" ^1 CTt^jl ^ftirf^ "that you have heard." Occa- 
 sionally, as in the French language, it denotes an event which 
 took place some time ago, as <(s^ 3F2t1 ^s^lc^; "such a report 
 has spread abroad or has become (common) ;" ^f% f% C^tSH 
 ^f<I*rr&>; " have you dined ? " Cwt^ <-f<iyir[ " I have " (that is, 
 some time ago). This differs from the imperfect, yfa f% *tt^Tl 
 "have you dined ?" Tt^rf^ " I have " (just now). The perfect 
 and pluperfect are compounded of the past indefinite participle 
 and the auxiliary verb, as 
 
 /. The Pluperfect tense represents the action as prior to some 
 other point of time, usually specified in the sentence, as f\ifa ""<[ 
 
 T| "'he had come from a far country, but the people were not 
 prepared to receive him." The pluperfect is sometimes used when 
 no other point of time is specified ; in these cases it shows, either 
 that the event took place in ancient times, or that it has now 
 lost its importance, as <TTFt<<n ^^" ^fl ^f^lTtf^T^R " this was a 
 saying of the ancients," literally, "the ancients had proclaimed 
 this saying;" ^t^T? T5 \^ ^irff^r "he had great trouble." 
 
 g. The Future tense represents what is yet to come : it may 
 be used definitely or indefinitely as to future time, and admits of 
 no distinction for slid 1 1 and trill, as fsfa J)"^" ^~tT^ "5Tfr>i<H " he 
 will come hither ;" ^^ ^Z*fj ^R? ^T3; " the sun will rise to- 
 morrow;" ^t^?1 T3~5 3$~3. "^'e shall be ready." In respectful 
 language the future is used for the imperative, as sr^t*nr ^r-^ifsr 
 ^f<r?rl "^rt^TtZ^ ^^ ^J^S^ fwtt^t "be kind enough, sir, to give me a 
 book." In predictions it is used in the same manner, as
 
 be desolate." 
 
 APPLICATION OF THE TENSES. Io5 
 
 " his house shall be desolate," or '< let his house 
 
 h. The Conditional tense is employed to represent the fre- 
 quency of any action, i.e. to signify what has been the usual 
 course, custom or habit of the agent, as fsfr TTrPF ^IT^T st'zWT 
 "he was accustomed to pay great attention to 
 
 study in his youth;" 
 "at that time he used to come to me daily." It is also used 
 much like the French conditional mood, in which case it should 
 always, in English, be translated by the subjunctive mood and 
 pluperfect tense, as ^ifa VT^T*T f%lf x *i<l<t-t*f ftTo^rjTr r| " ] 
 would or should have gone, but found no opportunity." 
 
 i. The Imperative mood is confined in its application chiefly 
 to the second and third persons : (?<t " see," Of*f^ or (tf*to " let 
 
 * (S^ V <K V 
 
 him or them see." The forms c?*t and 0ff*t<? of the second 
 person plural differ a little. (Tf^t refers to the present occasion 
 only; (Jff*t is of general or permanent application. 
 
 105. As the difference between the Past Indefinite, the 
 Perfect, and the Pluperfect, presents not a few difficulties, 
 the following remarks may not be unacceptable to the 
 learner. In the first place, they differ as measures of the 
 distance of time. The Past Indefinite states what has hap- 
 pened/?^ now, or a little wldle ayo ; the Perfect that which 
 has happened some time ago ; the Pluperfect that which lias 
 happened long ago. Secondly, they diii'er as to the objects 
 lo which they direct attention. The Past Indefinite directs 
 attention not so much to the act or event itself, as to its 
 attendant circumstances, such as time, place, manner, ra- 
 pidity, recency, or to that which foil need next. The Perfect, 
 directs attention to the fact itself, as being- either important 
 or historically true. The Pluperfect directs attention to
 
 136 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 the circumstance that the fact is of an old date, or no longer 
 of any great interest or importance. Lastly, they differ in 
 this, that in connected narratives the Past Indefinite and 
 Pluperfect alone arc used ; the past indefinite being the 
 leading tense. The Perfect occurs chiefly in conversation 
 and argumentative discourses. 
 
 . The following examples will in some degree illustrate what 
 has been just stated: viz. f^fsr C^^ti^S 'srf^CcTT "he came by 
 boat." Here attention is directed to the mode of conveyance; 
 he came by boat, not by land. f$fr C^1^1T^5 ^ifvi^U^ " he 
 came by boat." Here attention is directed to the fact of his 
 having 1 come, as one that admits of no doubt, or that is impor- 
 tant to the hearer, fsfr c^l^TTS ^tf^Vtf^C^ " he came by 
 boat." This implies cither that his having 1 come is an old story, 
 or no longer of any great importance, or else that he subse- 
 quently exchanged the boat for some other conveyance or place 
 of abode. Again, 3F=2T ^rff^T ("5T ^"Hr^r (Tf?Tf^ I went there yes- 
 terday." Here attention is directed either to the place or the 
 time, but not mainly to the act itself." 3-^j" ^5flf*T CT ^~1TT fVfrnf^ 
 " I did go there yesterday." Yesterday being so near the present 
 time, this phrase would not be used, except to call attention to 
 the fact that I went, as being either important or unquestionably 
 true, ^w ^TffsT (^ ^T^ f*nrrf^rfr " * wcnt there yesterday." 
 This at once implies that my going there yesterday was only 
 introductory to, or has since been followed by, some other event 
 of greater importance or interest. Lastly, ^tfa st^rt^ f5T^~ ^T| 
 ^fTTff^ " J told him that affair." Here the speaker supposes that 
 his telling may be of some importance to the hearer, or else that 
 the fact should not be doubted. So 3t^1 C*T^?1 ^sf^^T^" $*& ^Tl 
 3.9. TTf> '-you heard that such a report has spread abroad." Here 
 the report is important to the hearer, or else its having spread 
 has been doubted, ^ttft^l ^t~ W ^f^TtfesR " the ancients 
 said this." Here the tense indicates that it was verv Ionic airo.
 
 USE AND APPLICATION OF T1IK VKUI5AL NOUNS. Io7 
 
 1). In the following examples the Past Indefinite is idiomati- 
 cally employed to express present time: vfsrsr ^-f^TffT >l*jy ^o ^ 
 "it is time to go." This indicates, that a little earlier might 
 have been too early, and that a little later might be too 
 late, $,^VlC5[ would not imply either. ^srffa <i)^~ *f3 fsrfarsrfsr 
 " I write this letter." Here the writer fancies himself talking to 
 his correspondent when opening the letter, and saying to him, 
 " I wrote this letter." 4*R ^~ffr C5t*Tt? ^Tf? ^rf-2filT if^rfr 
 " now I understand you." The exaet idea is, " now I have 
 caught the meaning of your words." ^tfa bfarf'Sj " I am 
 going." Here the speaker fancies himself walking otf already, 
 and turning round to tell the hearer, " I am gone." <? srT3~ ?r 
 SrCciCxi tf^f "that man will be tumbling into the water." Here 
 the speaker is so excited that he anticipates what he expects to 
 see the next minute. This idiom, however, is very rare. 
 
 r. We only add one important remark more; viz. that the 
 consequences of an event stated in the Pluperfect, are supposed 
 to be completely past ; and those of an event in the Perfect are 
 supposed to have continued ever since; those of an event in the 
 Past Indefinite are supposed to follow it immediately, and there- 
 fore not to continue long; they may be Past or Present or 
 Future. As an illustration of the three ways of expressing the 
 Present tense, we subjoin the following examples : ^sffr ^TfTl 
 ^fsTEcR, ^T^l ^Ttfr ^f%sTT^T " I understand what you say," literally, 
 "I have understood what you have just said." ^rf^rf^ *Tf^1 ^5R, 
 ^\^\ ^tfa Wtf*T " 1 know what you say," i.e. " what you are apt 
 to say or in the habit of saying." ^Tf^ffr *rf^1 ^fac^gr^, 31T1 
 ^rffsr ^f^Tsf^; " I understand what you say," i.e. " my compre- 
 hension keeps pace with your words." 
 
 Use and Application of the Verbal Nouns. 
 
 100. Under the term vcrlal noun, I include the gerund 
 in Tl (ride p. -1C) : thus, the forms <TT<^, (f*n and (*ffm all
 
 138 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 denote "a seeing;" they are mostly used in the genitive, 
 instrumental, or locative cases, but seldom in the nomina- 
 tive: thus, OrftW?, 0?*tT?r, (W^n^ "of seeing;" offttttre, 
 C*F*T|7T5, C*f*lW-4 "by or in seeing." The form CJffl7T5 most 
 commonly means " in consequence of having seen," or 
 " because of having seen." 
 
 a. The gerundial form of the verbal noun ( O?f*ft1 ) is never used 
 in its simple state as a nominative; but the other three cases of it, 
 as given above, are most commonly employed like the Latin 
 gerund. Its genitive case is sometimes followed by another 
 noun, and sometimes by a postposition, as ^t"g ?5f*fTt? ^tT " the 
 time of sowing the seed," flff^ftt? 3Ft?1 or W& or frfsjw " for 
 the sake of seeing." 
 
 b. The gerund in Tl and the verbal noun in ^r| when in the 
 locative form, do in most instances stand in the absolute state, 
 and convey nearly the same signification as the participle in 9 tz\ 
 (of which, more hereafter), as ^tfij i*)^ 3?fl <tftf<f^ or ^f^TTtTr 
 (or <fl<:cri) fifa <Tff^n ^f3ZcTT " I having said this word, he flew 
 into a passion ;" <3rf*rf<r ^ ^T| t&fcs or -g^rjir f%f^ ?Tf^?n 
 
 'upon my saying this word, he flew into a passion." 
 
 Use and Application of the Participles. 
 
 107. The Present Participle ending in ^T5 is sometimes 
 employed like the ablative absolute in Latin : thus, fw*i 
 i "work while it is day;" Fsfr srrtrs ^rff^ 
 when he departed, I came." It is also employed 
 by repetition, to express the continuance or repetition of an 
 act, as c*T ^Tterl ^f?lT!^ C*tre fft^ ^rf^/5 5^\ u he continuing 
 liis journey at last arrived at home;" fsr fr^l ^f?^"5^. <r$ 
 ^5T "he continuing to have cares grew old," i.e. "grew 
 old by anxiety."
 
 USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 13 J 
 
 a. With regard to the second form of the present participle in 
 as ^<T5 " doing," Dr. Vates says, ' It is to he regarded as a 
 corruption of the Sanskrit present participle ending in^^,as 
 wt^ " to live;" ^ffa 1 *, "living." By whom the corruption was 
 introduced is uncertain, but it is not found in the earliest poetical 
 writings in Bengali. The form ^<T5 etc. is as abhorrent to the 
 genius of the Bengali language, as it is contrary to the Sanskrit. 
 In the Sanskrit it is 3^t " doing," and the Bcngfdi scarcely ever 
 
 <S. 
 
 admits a final a, as karata, at the end of a word, except it be a 
 Sanskrit past participle, or a word ending with a double con- 
 sonant. Any one who wishes to be satisfied that it is a corrup- 
 tion contrary to the genius of the Bengali language has only to 
 apply it to verbs in general, and say Ot*T5? ^|<-4, TTt^S, ^S^rs, 
 C<E>vj>, srH3, etc. He will soon perceive that there is some great 
 defect either in his language or in the understanding of his hearers. 
 The grammarians that have admitted this form have not ventured 
 to apply it to more than one or two verbs, which shews that it 
 is a corruption ; and as such it ought to be avoided by those who 
 wish to attain a pure style. It is to be regretted that in the 
 case of two verbs, 3F?*! and ^^, this barbarous participle should 
 be extensively used by the writers of newspapers.' 
 
 108. The Past Conjunctive Participle in irt serves to 
 connect all the members of a sentence having the same 
 agent, and so supersedes the use of copulative conjunctions, 
 as ^1^U<i? Off^Tl F^ 4 ! *n%m ^cws"^? 3-f^ef "having seen him 
 and fallen at his feet, he cried with a loud voice;" 
 
 ^s *ii 
 
 ?=T "afterwards, having obtained no redress, and 
 being sadly distressed, he returned, weeping as he went, 
 and entered into his house." This participle may also bo 
 followed by, and in point of time relatively agree with, a 
 verb in the present, past, or future tense, as csr frf?fl 
 " he goes and sees," c^T frfni (wfs^T u he went and saw,"
 
 140 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 " lie will go and see." It is sometimes con- 
 nected with the infinitive mood, and stands in the place of 
 an infinitive, as ?rtefl ^Tc* sfert ^tfrre ^TT^1 %*T^ " the 
 king ordered them to seize and bring him ;" so that d?m 
 ^rtfsnrs is equivalent to *\Tn-i> ^ "^rff^s . This is not an 
 anomalous but the regular use of the participle, for it 
 always agrees with the verb that follows next : hence, as 
 
 is equivalent to srf?TCsR ^ ^rtfrs^, so 
 is equivalent to 
 
 a. Whatever number of participles in TTl may occur in a sen- 
 tence, they are never to be connected together as in English by 
 conjunctions, as <&*! ^T| ^f^TTl f^TSf (ff^r^TS *t*rtTTW ^f?Tl ^T^ 
 CPfT*t fayl <2JTf^t 5,0 'ill <ytf%^T " hearing tliis account, fleeing from 
 his country, going into another country, being a sojourncr, he 
 remained/' i.e. "when he heard this account, he fled from his 
 own country, went into a foreign one, and there remained a 
 stranger." 
 
 b. The past conjunctive is often combined \vith the participle 
 in cT to prevent the too frequent repetition of the former. In 
 such cases the participle in ^"?n is used in the former parts of 
 the sentence and that in (^ at the close, as ^rff^r (T^T ^ITW fVjrrl 
 ^iTft^ "ST^lT? f^?1 ~5Tt?T?T *T3 C5T < 'i^) r ^f%5T " after I had gone 
 thither, given him the information, and returned, he departed." 
 
 109. The Advcrlial Participle in c^T may have the same 
 agent as the verb that follows, or a different one. The 
 latter is most commonly the case, as fsrsTJl 3?H ^f$T 
 
 "what good will you get by lying?" 
 *rf^ " when ho comes, I will go." In the 
 former case it is usually put before the nominative case, 
 and almost always indicates an uncertain contingency, as 
 
 if or when I get leave, I will
 
 rsE AM) APPLICATION OF THE PAKTiriri.ES. Ill 
 
 come;" but ^rTfsr f^Ft? er^n srTfrre moans, " I will tako 
 leave and come." Sometimes *t? or *rc? must be supplied, 
 as ^rt^T? *r<idl (*>!?) ^BTtfa srftN' " I will go after I have 
 eaten;" but ^rffr ^T^t? *f?m ^5< means, "I will eat 
 and o." 
 
 r/. Where if and W/ew arc used in English, this participle in 
 is commonly used in Bengali, as fsfr ^f^t? <Tf^1 fsTW ^f?^T 
 "if he grunts me my desire, I shall he satisfied;" 
 
 "when he stretehed 
 
 out his hand, it was made whole or well." 
 
 b. If the conjunction ^? is added to this participle, it gives the 
 idea of aft/iong/1, and is equivalent to having employed the con- 
 junction irjf^f " though," at the beginning of the sentence, fol- 
 lowed hy ^rtft "yet," in the latter part, as c^T <T^t5R ^f?^T 
 ^ ^?r =r|, or irgn% (^ C^tSt^ ^?, ^5TlfH ^ ^[ *r\ " though he 
 may cut, he is not satisfied." 
 
 c. The postpositions ^ or *ft? may optionally he added to 
 this participle, as SfT C^iZ=T (*f<r) ^t(^Jdk<l "5^i*t ^T "when pro- 
 perty is lost, men are in trouble." It is sometimes, particularly 
 in conversation, used to express option or choice, as Off^T^T 
 Gff^S *Tf? " he can sec, if he chooses," or " if he would look, 
 he might see." 
 
 d. The adverbial participle corresponds in most instances with 
 that which is called in Sanskrit, the locative absolute ; in Latin, 
 the ablative absolute ; and in Greek, the genitive absolute. It 
 is, however, to be observed in Bengal], that the noun or pronoun 
 nominative to the participle, in the absolute case, is never modi- 
 fied into the locative, ablative or genitive case, as in the above 
 learned languages : thus, ^Trfi?!I ^T5f ^TW^t? "J ^T "the sun 
 rising (i.e. while the sun riscth), darkness Hies away;" or, as 
 old Ruddiman hath it, " Sole orientc fugiunt tcncbracj"
 
 142 BENGALI GRAMMAE. 
 
 ] "be speaking they do not 
 attend," i.e. "when he speaks or while he speaks, they do not 
 attend;" $t<tfl C^fel <?F<l?:c1 pf <2ftS ?AT "they seeking, obtained 
 wealth." 
 
 110. The Perfect passive or intransitive participle ending 
 with ^5 is derived entirely from the Sanskrit, and is used as 
 in that language, or as the past or passive participles of 
 verbs in English and other languages, as ( 
 
 "lie being fallen is not able to rise; 
 
 f?cT " he having been defeated fled." It is 
 often used instead of a substantive with the verb "to do," 
 as (Fl? \5T$fTc^ ^s ^rf^cT or c^t5 ^tc^ %w\ <?f<ici u the thief 
 killed him." 
 
 111. The Sanskrit Adjectival Participles formed by 
 adding TT, ^ftir, and \5^J, are employed to express the 
 necessity, capability ', or fitness of the thing to be done, as 
 ^t}/*jy "that must be inferred;" ^^t?T "that is capable 
 of being done;" ?$^t? "that is deserving of being 
 punished;" ^^^J " what ought to be done;" 4^><J "what 
 should be spoken." These greatly resemble the Latin 
 passive participle ending in dus. 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 112. One substantive governs another, signifying a dif- 
 ferent thing, in the genitive case ; and, as a general rule, 
 the governing word is placed after the word it governs, as 
 ?tw fari " Kama's father," ?tc*T? frfsrrs " for the sake of 
 Kama," ?tw^ fW? ^T^ " with Kama's father." The same 
 rule applies to all postpositions ( 68) Avhich, as we have 
 shewn, arc substantives, generally in the locative case. At
 
 GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS. 143 
 
 tlic same time, we may observe, that the governing word, 
 Avhether noun or postposition, is frequently combined Avith 
 the nominative case of the word governed, as a Tatpurusha 
 compound (vide 94). 
 
 a. When a vessel is mentioned, as containing a tiling, or spe- 
 cially constructed for one particular use, then the name of the 
 thing or use is put in the genitive case, as ^C^j<r Tti^ " a milk- 
 cup," or "a cup made to contain milk specially;" ^Tf? VSWN "a 
 cotton godown (or warehouse)," i.e. "a godown containing cot- 
 ton or built to hold cotton ;" ^1ZT? F3" " a bathing-tub/' or "a 
 tub specially made for or used in bathing." 
 
 b. When a vessel is mentioned, as specially constructed to 
 contain a thing, which is not then contained in it, the word ^tfl 
 "keeping" or <Ttf^Tf? " of keeping," is often placed after the 
 name of the thing (which is used in the accusative form without 
 C^) and before the noun signifying the vessel, as ^^fsfjf f*rf*T, 
 ^"sfk <rf*fl f*ff*T or *Nf*t ?rtfet? f*rf*r "a small medicine- 
 bottle," or "a small bottle wherein to keep medicine;" 
 
 " an indigo-box," " a box for keeping indigo." 
 
 c. When an adjective, in qualifying a person or thing, has 
 concern with another, then it generally requires the latter in the 
 genitive case, as f^ifr s-H-dd? ^rTw, fer?T, orfvf^vS "he is respected, 
 beloved or blamed by every body ;" (3T <1"?5<r ^Tfr, ^cfJ or 5T5 
 "he is similar to a beast;" fsfsf ^1"? ^^"STa 1 "he is worthy of 
 this;" ^l^q^rl ^US^ ^^J " Bruhmaus are venerable (in the 
 eyes) of the Shoodras." 
 
 d. Adjectives meaning necessary, fit, becoming, incumbent, or 
 the like, require the noun (expressing the person, thing, or use 
 for which it is necessary, etc.) in the genitive case, and the verb 
 (if any) expressing the action which is necessary, etc. in the form 
 of the verbal noun in ^1, and not in the infinitive, a^s in English :
 
 141 EEXGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 thus, <<15F5 Wl f5t*Tt<r ^rt"^S2^ or fF5 " it is necessary or proper 
 for, or incumbent upon you to do so;" f$f^ ^Iff? ^*nciJ "^c is 
 worthy of or fit for this;" CSt^Tf? (^T^tTE^ ^rf^frl ^f^5 or <??<u 
 "you ought to go there." 
 
 113. The comparative degree is expressed by construing 
 the adjective with the noun in the ablative case ; the super- 
 lative by construing it with 3JW, as 
 
 there is no one dearer to me than you;" 
 ^ " you are the best or one of the best 
 of men." Numerals also require srcsj, as ( J Wt <5 tC 4 l^ 
 "five of the boats sunk." 
 
 a. The various modes of forming comparative sentences, are 
 hest illustrated by a few examples : thus, ^jTT ^S/tw^s C4> Foa or 
 f<S3\t)<l , or ^s/T^T ^"C^t^l <Tf^ f<"53 or f^aa4<i " Rama is wiser than 
 Shyama;" ^^UW? ^TC^T^I (?9(T5 or C^T^T) ?1^T CWW or <Tt^ 
 etc. (^w "Rama is younger than they;" 
 
 r^ft^r refS' or sr^ft^f *ft%^cc?^ c^rr c^ 
 
 "Nuddia is smaller than Santipur;" j^ TT^T ;:; 5n:^f : 5Fj fr& or 
 ei Rama is the wisest of all;" ^T^tCTT? >l<t-?1^s> d-4 ftw or 
 <Tt5T Rama is the wisest of them all ; " <jr>iyl '5T^T C^ 
 
 r*r? c^^ir <?r>i^i TS, ofr*r?[ sn:^; ?Ff^nri ^^ or 
 
 ? ^ <^riJl " Russia is the largest of countries ; " <r 
 
 or sT3 , ^Fffff T^ef "^sni^rsFl or e c 
 
 " Rama is the best of all ;" (Tjrrw ^t~r J) (iiJ^ sr 7 ^ " this is just 
 as good as the other is bad;" 
 
 r<[ rs^r or c^r^^ 
 
 Tf^f5T<r " such as is our Kalidasa, so is Shakespeare among 
 the English." 
 
 l>. r J"hc onl difference between ^rc^T^I, y"CS and c^rr is,
 
 f;ovi;uNMi:vr OF vi:i;i;s. 1 i-") 
 
 that $"^T~5 and "sr^r^Fl arc used after the nominative singular and 
 genitive plural form of nouns signifying rational objects, and 
 after the nominative form of other nouns singular or plural, 
 whereas (FTT is used after the genitive form of nouns of any 
 kind or number; and is scarcely used in the "3Frf*rT*ri or cor- 
 rect language/' 
 
 r. The regular terminations ~s$ and ~s^ are little used in I'en- 
 gali ; now and then only they appear, when the natives are sur- 
 prized to see them, as f5Tsrfs ^ " 5 ^^ feflTi^ " he is more 
 beloved than you," ^TtTlZir^ ziZty fsfr foWs-J' ' he is the wisest 
 among them." The adjective "tTfsf '-good," in the former part 
 of the sentence, and ^t=T *tt? ' not good," in the latter part, are 
 sometimes used to express the comparative degree, as tS^Tf-r j\^ 
 <5t3f ~vV*\ f%U T3*. ^CI ^3 "T?T sf^?- '-one good son is better than 
 hundreds of foolish or bad ones." To sentences of this kind 
 ^o "rather," is frequently prefixed, as ^ ^w Tt~*T ~T=T ^^Ttf^f 
 ^f^r?^ ?TtSff? ^T? ^TT "T^ 5TT '' it is better to dwell in a forest 
 than in the city of a foolish king." 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 114. A transitive or active verb, having one object, 
 governs it in tlie accusative case, as <nrr ^&T^^ sjf?^T- 
 " Kama caught Shyama;" <rfa <it^ ^rf^s^w '-Erima is 
 reading a book." 
 
 a. Verbs of gii'ing, shewing, or communicating in general,, 
 govern two objects, of which the one gii-cn, slicwu. or communi- 
 cated to, has the (dative or accusative) termination ($ expressed, 
 whereas the other elegantly sailers the elision of it : thus. Tptf 
 ^srfaT^ 3^/1 iflw^f^^TST ' Rfuna gave his daughter to Shyf.ma In 
 marriage) ;" fsfr ^rW^ ^^ ^rfs ^"^5T ^TT^ cw^rt^irf^-w - he 
 has shewn to me a very good garden ;" ^rrfTT ^ITT^ T^?T 
 "I have communicated to him the whole affair."
 
 140 BEXGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 I. Transitive verbs, when formed into causals, and a few 
 others, govern two objective cases, as fsfr ^srfsTtir^ TT3T 
 "he taught me the shastras," 
 
 " I asked him this question," 
 "this is what he said to me," J)^~ 
 
 " make this gold into ear-rings," ^rffr CSTTtC^ ^ ^T^ ^f? " I 
 value you as a straw." 
 
 c. A transitive verb which in the active voice governs two 
 cases (as in the above rule), does in the passive voice retain the 
 one having the termination (^ expressed, and agrees with the 
 other, as ?r|Tsr<r ^3fl *STf5T<^ Jfirl ^Tfr^ " Rama's daughter has 
 been given to Shyfuna (in marriage) ;" ^sT^~ 
 "a situation has been given to him;" \5lTt3? 
 
 " everthin has been communicated to him." 
 
 (1. Verbs signifying " to take out " or " receive," etc. govern 
 the accusative of the tiling taken out or received, and the 
 ablative of the place or the person from which it is taken out or 
 received, as ^t^Wff? ^Ts f%^ ^T^rs? Tff^? ^fy?Tl '^T^ " take out 
 some papers from the almyra;"* ^fsr ^I7rt? ^"f^? ^t* 5 c, 
 ^TC^ or fnw\> <F3 Ff<f1 ^rf^"T( " how much money will you get from 
 me?" Verbs signifying emanation or motion from a place, govern 
 the ablative case, as sr? 5^~<Ts Ttnr? f 3 " come out of the house;" 
 C^T *ff^ ^trs ^f^\ fr\-$-ftT$ he fell oif a tree." Native Gram- 
 marians say that all persons and things from whom or which 
 there is a departure, fear, reproach., defeat., receiving, origin, 
 
 * The word almyrn is a corruption of the Portuguese Almnrin or Almeira. In Ben- 
 gall it denotes a "bureau," " chest of drawers," or "bookcase." We have the word, 
 however, in common use to this day in the "braid Scotch" and provincial English under 
 the forms " anirie,'' " awnirie," and " almarie." With us it denotes "a cupboard or 
 safe, where food and cooking utensils arc laid up." 
 
 " Steek the am/-i?, lock the kist, 
 Else some gear may \vcel be mist ; 
 Donald Caird finds orra things, 
 
 Allan Gregor iaund the tin^s." 
 
 WALTER SCOTT.
 
 GOVERNMLNT OF VERBS. 117 
 
 preservation, rent, disappearance, and jircrcntion, are put in the 
 ablative case; but it \vill be found upon examination that the rule 
 embraces not merely these words, but is of far more extensive 
 application. 
 
 e. Verbs signifying motion to or rest at or /// a place, and 
 those verbs the action of which is referred to a place or time, 
 require the place or time in the locative case, as ~~si\^ sfz? 
 *rTf~<r5f^ "I am going home," f$fr Tff&T5 '^R(?l "he is at 
 home," 4'^'jJH Wt^T? IT*R fif^T "SlTf? Tfl&rs R WS\ s"^T^ " a 
 meeting is to be held at his house on the 10th of this month/' 
 
 /. The verbs crfsfa and (^^ to stick," '-to adhere," etc. and 
 verbs of similar signification, require the locative of the objects 
 to which they stick or adhere, as TlTt? C^Wl ^Tl? C^fe 
 or ^5Tf^f%7T - his boat stuck on a sand-bank." But when ^ 
 impersonally means " to hurt," its object, if an entire animate 
 body, is put in the accusative, otherwise in the locative case, as 
 ^T^tc<r- ^5 sTif^T^ " it has hurt him severely," i.e. "he has 
 been severely hurt;" ^rf^T? 'Ff^"r ^17T3 ^5 crffarrft^r " he has 
 injured his rig-ht hand." Sometimes one of such words as (Wsrj, 
 37n "a hurt," ^Tl, ^rW 1 ?, "a stroke," etc., is used immediately 
 before cTfsfw , as ^ ^?fTr3 ^t^T<T ^ ^<t *T\ , (<W\ , ?;j^n or 
 " this word has hurt his feelins." 
 
 g. If the first member of a compound verb, ending 1 in ^<i "to 
 do/' is itself (made) the object of the verb, then the noun or 
 pronoun before it, is put in the genitive, otherwise in the accu- 
 sative case, as <TT3ff3 ^if^J C*T "5^X3 W*& - * f*(i:2? 
 
 or 
 
 "it is the duty of a king to root out vice and to plant virtue 
 by crushing the wicked and cherishing the virtuous." When, 
 however, a compound verb is formed by adding 3T<ri to the 
 adjective or passive participle, it generally governs the noun or
 
 148 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 pronoun before it in the accusative case, as 
 
 ^Tfa CSt^rfa^- ^Tls <t-f<l< "cure me, and I will make you 
 
 satisfied." 
 
 h. When one noun is followed by another, which signifies a 
 different thing 1 and forms part of a compound verb ending- in 
 jjf-8T (or is prefixed to $f^r), it is often used in the genitive, and 
 sometimes in the nominative form : thus, cf^ ^^fsfiTS C^Tfa 
 (?T'>t? "*Tt~^ or (^fTf *rTf% 3^~C33 "this medicine will cure your 
 disease." The third person singular of the present tenses of the 
 verb 3"^, is often annexed to nouns signifying appearing, feeli)ig 
 or perceiving in general, in order to form verbs of the same 
 signification ; such verbs arc (considered) impersonal, and require 
 the nouns or pronouns, preceding the nouns, to be in the genitive 
 or dative case; as <) ^5rW<^ or ^5TW? ~$~5 ^T 7 ^ Wfa ^T^r^" " this 
 appears to me very bud;" ^TJ^rtZ^ <>r "^t^t? C3Tl"< $[ (*r f^fr <4 
 3-sj3[ 4 iT<r ^=T "it seems to me that he is at the bottom of this con- 
 spiracy;" <? flTF| f%|r cTff^l CTt^t ^T3T^ " I feel a slight pain 
 there." Sometimes the noun or pronoun signifying the person 
 to whom reference is made, is put in the accusative, when the 
 noun or pronoun signifying the person making the reference is 
 used in the genitive case, as *? ^t^T^T^ ^T^Tt^ 
 ' that boy a}>pears to me to be very sly." 
 
 11-3. The intransitive passive verbs of the Sanskrit form 
 are for the most part active in signification, as flf^r ^art^ 
 <r-5TJ ^^rf^i f^irR^r " IK; arrived here yesterday ;" ^1 <TT8 
 ^ rtt" U I have not received it/' The intransitive passive 
 inflections of the Bengali form are not in use, except in 
 that of the third person singular, which, though im- 
 personal, is commonly used and understood as the first 
 personal : thus, ^rT? Wl~5^ Trftrs *rft? ^1 means literally " it 
 cannot he stood any longer," but cominonly U I or we 
 cannot stand aiiv longer."
 
 (JOVEUXMEXT OF VEKJiS. 1 I'.) 
 
 <t. The passive inflections of most of the transitive verbs. 
 formed by adding TTf^ to tbe Uengfdl {tussive participle. are not 
 idiomatically in use, excepting one, viz. tliat of tbe third person 
 singular, liefore this inflection, the nouns and pronouns signi- 
 fying rational beings of the second or third person, and of any 
 rank, are idiomatically put in the accusative form; irrational 
 animals are used often in the accusative; the other nouns arc 
 put in the nominative form : thus, i3rtTT ^F^Tjl < JT ; ?5f<fit ^TTh 
 5Tf9 C< " a tank will be dug here " (jf*TI Ht^"^ f~sff ct-^'f C^Tf^ -it 
 shall be seen what manner of man he is." 
 
 110. One verb governs another that precedes it and 
 depends upon it in the infinitive mood, as 
 
 all began to reproach him ; 
 ?n "he was not able to reply;" s 
 Cf? l ^ " send a person to bring them ; " 
 ^rtr? r| ~&tt 3$ wnt^ c^nr^i ^f?rs ^^T u if all can- 
 not come, tell (them) to send one person/' 
 
 a. The infinitive is sometimes governed by an adjective, as 
 
 fslrrf? >is?si ^rf? fr" 3 !^ "^^ ^5rrfrr3t? r ^t? c i ^-fsii:* c*rf2r ? you 
 
 arc the fit person to speak of your own welfare and the cause of 
 your coming into this solitary wood;" 3Tf^T<r| 
 they arc unable to do this work;" 
 '* be is able to do this work." 
 
 //. The verbal noun ending 1 in ^rl, when it admits of being con- 
 strued as a nominative, and occasionally as an objective, is often 
 used instead of the infinitive mood, as 3ZW Tf^T Wl "sT^T 3*~ ^T^" 
 ?rm "Fl^T TJT "to dwell in a wood is better than to remain in this 
 place;" i^STS 3-STl 3T^| CSt^lirfr^ WF3 *r^' ; it is not proper for 
 you to say such things ;" ^^"^^ CT% ^?1 "^^rf^? ^~<j~3J ' it is 
 our duty to love God;" ^tfw C5t5Tf? CWT| ^ff^'^TTtsr "' I gained a 
 sight of vou." When this form of the verbal noun ends in (3 it
 
 150 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 is generally used in the sense of "because;" as ^Tfat? 
 W("3 3"rsri7r5 fsfr <fc1C4 *ftC<FT " lie can say by his knowing or 
 because he knows my custom." The other form of the verbal 
 noun, though less frequently used, has the same construction; as 
 (Tf ?p?f ^f^^T? <Ff? s l or ^3<?|<[ ^t?i or ^<rf3 ^T?1 fsfr ^1^'CsR "he 
 came for the purpose of doing that work." 
 
 117. The gerund in Tl governs as a verb, but is governed 
 as a noun, and therefore in the genitive case; as c^rtz^ 
 Cfff*r^T? "GZ fsfr 4^" ^"fW -srf^sR h c came hither for the 
 purpose of seeing you ;" 4 ^fl ^f^<rt3 >Wdijs? ^ts~t?fl ^t^~fe^ 
 ?"5C 3f?sT " at the very time of his uttering these words they 
 killed him ;" ^Tg; <^p c?T^i ^r^Tf? ^T?i ^"5rrr^ f^rirTc^T "the 
 master has gone into the garden to plant a tree." This 
 same gerund, when connected with the word srtay, is al- 
 ways used adverbially, as c^r sTf^T^t^) ^rf^ttrfTfr^ sjf^r " he 
 immediately upon his going out seized them;" C 5 ^ vwft>f?[ 
 ^ft^^t^t^ TT^TCJf? CF^T c^t*t f^=r "the news when received 
 distressed them generally." 
 
 a. The gerund in Ti is used instead of the infinitive when 
 governed by a noun or an adjective, as 
 ''it is now time to go;" fSt^t? ^?t ^Tt? 
 ''it is necessary for you to cross the river;" 
 
 " what is not to be, cannot be ; and what is to be, that cannot 
 be otherwise." 
 
 118. Adjectival participles sometimes govern the instru- 
 mental case, but most commonly the genitive ; as ^Tf^i^ 
 sTC 7 ^ fernrrs ^fs ^IRJ srcr "an attempt should not be 
 made in an affair which endangers life ;" c^^" ^^f ^?1 
 ^^J "we ought to do that work;" ^ ^r 
 r rTS7 "this wood must be abandoned by us;"
 
 GOVERNMENT OF VKKI1S. 
 
 fw "the duty of serving is 
 very hard; it is impracticable even by ascetics." 
 
 110. All nouns and pronouns indicating time or place, 
 and all those which being used adverbially an.' preceded in 
 English by at, in or into, lo or unto, on or upon, Ity or near 
 to, must be in the locative case, as f~$fo f% tfty "srtw^ " is 
 he at home?" *JT^ nt^n (^ "go into the house and see;" 
 e 1 'Cte'* f% ^f^lT? ftf^5 ^T3[ " in what manner can there be 
 love in this?" rtSfT^(^ ^T?1 <rf*t "put it upon the dining- 
 tablc;" c^T < 5t5rt7T5 Tl"3T ^T<r "he lives by or near to the 
 
 Ganges;" Tf^TF ^TfrTfatrs *fww ^r? " tlie child goes to 
 school;" 7TJT^fl "srTtfre ^rlz^t?" 4 ! ^f?^T " the soldiers mounted 
 
 their horses;" T35ti ^"TO^^T "the enemy ascended the 
 
 (S^ *.' 
 
 mountain;" w\fa f% *f^lz? ^^1 ^f?TC~5 ^nf? how (literally, 
 in what manner) can I do that?" ^t?r3F^ ^rsly*!" cTt^ r? 
 " such gain is (comes) providentially," literally, "in process 
 of one's appointed lot." 
 
 a. The name of a person or place is generally accompanied by 
 the word *rfW in the locative ease, as OTt^ ^^T ^ "5T^ '"'a man 
 by name John;" ^ft^f^T^^ ^TW 3$ ^^[ - a city by name 1'utali- 
 putra." 
 
 1). To express tlic idea tiboiif, concerning, relative to. or rcsj>ert- 
 ing, tlic locative case is used, or the word f<Hii - matter," ' sub- 
 ject," in the locative case, as ^T^t? tyl ^rffsr f% ^f^" ' what sliall 
 I say about his qualities ? " ^T^t? f<yC53 yf% "STc^ ^t1 ^r?^3 
 <:t11[ ' you can say many things concernin- him;" fsn^TfcT-;? 
 ^<93't? ^T ^1^" "'this is the fruit of contempt respecting tiio 
 advice of a friend." 
 
 120. Adverbs arc placed as near as convenient to the 
 words which they qualify ; common ones for the most part 
 before, but negatives after the verb, provided it be in the
 
 152 JIEXGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 indicative mood, or in the second person of the imperative, 
 
 as c*r w *f 
 
 "the quality that the wise praise, that quality well quali- 
 fied people will certainly observe or keep;" <F^1 <$f^*2 -r) 
 " do not speak;" efrtw ^rf^s ^ z^ttf ^fsTS c*rfsr ^r T| "it 
 is not proper to speak before hearing the matter," literally, 
 "while the matter is not brought before you ;" fw^q^^f 
 
 C-' \J / 
 
 "31TI ^f^irT^ " you said that very finely." 
 
 a. A verb not in the indicative mood requires the negative to 
 be placed before it. The same rule applies to all questions to 
 which the hearer is not expected to reply. In sentences com- 
 mencing' with if, whetlier, i)i order that, the negative is also put 
 before the verb. In sentences commencing with a relative pro- 
 noun, it is put after the verb when the pronoun designates some 
 special matter of fact, person, or thing ;. and before the verb 
 when the pronoun refers to any out of a whole class of persons 
 or things : thus, ^fsT *rf^~1Z^ SffR T| " (the individual) whom I 
 know not," meaning some person specially referred to ; ^rtfsr 
 srT^~t *H "5Tffr "(a person) whom I know not," meaning any per- 
 son, although an example of the class may be named ; ^5t^T? ^^T 
 3T^rf <3 H ^9T^T ^Tfo srf^lTS *ttf? =n "his work not being finished I 
 cannot go ; " <ft|^ C^T ?^1 ^? *^?tT$ fc ^fw^ ^1 ^T " he who 
 saves life, by him what is not saved?" This question is one to 
 which no reply is expected. If information were sought, and an 
 answer expected, it would be f% ^f^F5 ^T r| ? 
 
 1). Some adverbs have a corresponding situation in the sen- 
 tence, the one being in the former part of the first clause, and 
 Ihe other in the succeeding one, as STT^s, fsfr ^1 ^Tf^T^TT ^t?'^ 
 ^rtfr Jtf<^ " 1 will wait till he comes," literally, " while he does 
 not come I will stay;" *T5 *& e \ ^STf? W^ ^1 "wtC"5f ^i^q rst^T? 
 ^ " I will gnaw your bonds till my teeth break;" 
 \vhcn he oes I will o also."
 
 POSTPOSITIONS - CONJUNCTIONS 1 0''> 
 
 121. Postpositions (v. 1 12) govern the genitive, as 
 C5t*rf<r Tff^s fsr^rsi ^f^rs Tt|?1 <ff?rn ^Tf^nrtf^ 1 " I have come 
 desiring to inak(3 friendship with you;" ^T1 ^f^?1 C^r 
 tfTS? sn:[ rtf%TTl ^f^cf "hearing this he remaining in tlie 
 hole said ;" ^fsTt? fr^RT? ^rf^T " come ne;ir to me ;" CSt^rf? 
 f? ^^5 *TTc? " by you I may obtain assist- 
 
 " 
 
 ance. 
 
 a. The words f?Rl and ^jHtd^d* arc very frequently united 
 with the nominative ease, as s^t? f?^r| ( 
 
 can help me besides Cod?" ^wlfl 
 
 I am unhappy without my husband (or protector) ;" 
 ^ vi-tds*) (^ -stf-^J ^ 5T) " in an assembly none 
 are rearded but the wise." 
 
 />. The word "g^ prefers the ablative case instead of the pos- 
 sessive, as C^ ^rfat^?T3 ^5tf&$ ~%Z~? ^tC^ '' he stays at a great 
 distance from me." It ma be 
 
 of the postpositions may be (as we have already stated,) com- 
 pounded with the leading- noun, in which case the genitive inflec- 
 tion is omitted,, as ^<?7T^tZ^f *Tt " g'o to the teacher." 
 
 122. Conjunctions generally connect the same moods and 
 tenses of verbs and cases of nouns and pronouns, as (?& 
 <TC^F3 C^tTjZ? <t?lciv)^n:^ Offa=T 4^ 5rtf?^T "he saw a black snake 
 in the hollow of the tree and killed it ;" c*H C^ra ^ ^?r 
 ^ ^tTfcT "?f?^5r^; "the cow and sheep and buffalo and goat 
 are feeding;" ^rrfa (^ w*^ 
 saw that man and his brother;" c*T 
 lie gave yon and me pleasure; 
 
 " "^T "yon go there, and tell him this;" 
 
 1 "he will go to Cal- 
 cutta, but will not stay long (there); 1 ' ^jfir ^rf? ^
 
 154 BENGALI GRAHMAE. 
 
 "you and I shall live together;" ? 
 fa^ ^rt^irs (Tf<? r| "allow Rama to go, but do not 
 allow Shyama." 
 
 a. When the latter part of the sentence differs in its nature 
 and construction from the former, the rule does not apply. This 
 is particularly the case when the former part of the sentence 
 contains an assertion or command, and the latter a promise or 
 inference from it, as (Sf^ 3TSI W$ v5ts[tF3 ^ft ^Tl " do this and 
 you will he happy;" nfff <f^ ?5?f ^ ^5tt tf^ ^<[ "if things arc 
 so, then do you depart." 
 
 b. When the latter part of the sentence is a consequence or 
 result of the former, $t^l75 is used in preference to <ft or ^? , 
 
 as ^rtfir ostsrt? < *t^?^ WSR ^f?R vst^lrs c^r cst^rf? ^J ^^rf? ^<t^r| 
 
 9^l ^f^^; 5^1 " I wiU subdue your enemy, and he shall no more 
 plunder you." 
 
 c. When ^ is put after a noun or pronoun, it means " also " 
 or "too" or f 'even;" when added to a participle, "even" or 
 "though" or although ;" as OT ^IT^ ^rffr^ f^srtsr " I also was 
 there," i.e. "besides others I too was there;" f^fr (trftnrf^? 
 Pft-nfr *r\ "though seeing he sees not," i.e. "although he sees he 
 docs not perceive ;" ^t^l 3f?cT*2 f%f; "5^T ^t"C^ ^1 " thougli he do 
 it, it will he of no use." 
 
 (1. The conjunction Tl may be used to signify " or " or " hut," 
 as c^l^lT^ Tl ^n:^ 5Tf^T " I shall go by boat or on horseback ;" 
 
 f% " I will not do it ; but, if J 
 
 should, what harm will there be ?" 
 
 e. The relative (*T is by some used as a conjunction, "that," 
 "thus," "namely," like the Persian ^ , and in a manner similar 
 to the use of the particle In in the Creek " New Testament,"
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 155 
 
 but "contrary to the idiom of the Bengali/' as 
 
 " be said to him, come and see." It should be 
 ^9 3-ST1 f*T *f^tc<*> ^?f^T or (7T 3f$tC$ $f^st *itfn?1 
 . Again, ii| ^f^T5 ^jc^ (*T C^1*J<J1 fnr 3T "this is said that 
 ye may believe." It should he HT^tC* or c^T^ (i1*J<I1 >TJir ^<T 
 ^P^ fa ^ ^ ^f*T5 ^rfz^". The assertion that this application of 
 the particle (% is contrary to the idiom of the Bengali will be 
 found in Dr. Yates' Grammar. I know not how it can be so; 
 for it is most extensively used by all writers." 
 
 /. ~z~$ "rather," is either used by itself or followed by 
 as jf% ^<rl ^TC^fSF! ^? f^1 ^<r| "t?r " it is better to l)eij tlian to 
 steal;" ^? tf*3^5 T^ "T=T ^^tf^f ^*f fsru "T5T wr^ "a wise 
 enemy is better than a foolish friend." 
 
 . be used alone as a conjunction in making a 
 
 request ; or as a relative pronoun followed by its correlative, as 
 C^ *f?(^Ptf? ^rfsrt? SR o*T^ ^frct =r| ut? "O Lord, let not my 
 mind go in wicked ways ;" C^5trr^ ^r^T C^f $~$ ^9 fafsrt~g ^rff^ 
 2Tt^T| ^f? " I pray for your welfare." (*& being originally the 
 Sanskrit form of the relative srf^lirs , it must always precede the 
 sentence which contains its correlative. 
 
 //. Some conjunctions have their corresponding conjunctions ; 
 the most frequent of these are ufpr and ~$tt , TTUf^f and ^^Ttf^r ; 
 as nfpf ^t^tC^ CW^t "Gtt ^St^lT:^ ^^" ^8T| ^sT "if you see him, tell 
 him this;" wfcf ^*R ^T ^STff^f ^t^0 *iP^ ^rt^rf? ^~5 csftfs 
 " although it be so, yet I have a great affection for him." 
 
 i. When the former part of such a sentence refers to matter 
 of fact, nf? or TT^rf^f is omitted, whilst ^?" or ^Tff^f must be 
 retained, as ^tfa ^ y ^t^T fwl ^T^TC^ "^nf^rtf^ "SCT" f% f<F(Z? 
 ^rf^rtZ^ f? <-r<ld-i ^"^1 ^? " 1 introduced him with an assurance 
 of protection, how then can he wish to destroy me ?"
 
 156 LEXGALI GRAMMAH. 
 
 123. Interjections require the vocative case, as 
 
 ? "give your order, sir; 
 hear me, woman;" (^ ^TWUT? 
 
 "our Father, who art in heaven, hear our petition;" ^ 
 " brother, come hither." 
 
 a. The word fop " fie upon/' or woe to," governs the ob- 
 jective case, as (*T ^R c^*r C*t^D ^tT Tft?T ^TC^ f^ "fie upon 
 him who delights only in play!" 
 
 " woe to me, that being born a man I have 
 not served God ! " 
 
 ON BENGALI STYLE. 
 
 124. Owing to the comparatively recent origin of Bengali 
 literature, the language, especially the written language, 
 is not yet fixed ; and although rapidly advancing towards 
 a state of purity and elegance, it is still in a fluctuating 
 condition. We may say then that at present there are four 
 different styles in vogue : viz. the pedantic, the clcyant, the 
 practical, and the familiar, each of which we shall here 
 briefly define. 
 
 a. The pedantic style may be known by its being imperfectly 
 understood by all those who have not studied Sanskrit : its faults 
 lie chiefly in the introduction of compound words where they arc 
 not needed, and in the choice of such compounds as consist of 
 words not in common use ; also in the adoption of Sanskrit 
 phrases and forms of speech. This style is found principally in 
 works translated from the Sanskrit. It is what the late Lord 
 Macauluy would call the " Johnsom-xc of Bengal;" and 1 believe 
 that it is now gradually falling into disrepute.
 
 TSENG A LI STVI.i;. ]-"7 
 
 1). The elegant or Itnoh style, which is also becoming current 
 in conversation, is the written language of the present day. It 
 is as yet scarcely formed ; hut its tendency is to occupy the 
 golden medium between the pedantic and the familiar, by pre- 
 ferring to all other words those Sanskrit elements which the 
 familiar language has retained, or altered only slightly, and by 
 avoiding all compound words the component parts of which are 
 not readily intelligible. This style is adopted in the latest ver- 
 sions of the Scriptures into the Bengali language; also in 
 numerous educational works* composed at Calcutta, within the 
 last thirty years, by learned natives under the superintendanee of 
 intelligent Europeans. 
 
 c. The practical style differs from the preceding chiefly in this, 
 that it borrows largely from the Persian, Hindustani, and English. 
 This style is used by almost all Muhammadans who speak Ben- 
 gall ; by most persons in the employ of Europeans ; by news- 
 paper editors, and by those who are engaged in commerce and 
 in judicial matters. It would be pedantry to proscribe all foreign 
 words from the Bengfili language; because in many cases they 
 are the only terms which exist, or which are likely to be under- 
 stood. But it is highly desirable to avoid the use of those for 
 which indigenous terms, derived from the Sanskrit, are either 
 already provided by the daily language, or may be introduced 
 into it with every prospect of being as plain and intelligible as 
 the exotic words now in common use. Dr. Yates calls this the 
 impure style, a term which I hold to be inappropriate. A lan- 
 guage is not necessarily impure, because, like the English, it 
 freelv borrows from its neighbours such useful words as it does 
 
 * This reminds me of a debt of gratitude which I owe to >orne friend in Bengal, m~t 
 likely a quondam pupil. Some years ago I found, at Kind's Cnllcge, a valuable paekage 
 of books in Bengal! and Sanskrit, sent to rny address ; but not a scrap of information 
 respecting the generous donor.
 
 158 BENGALI GRAMMAR. 
 
 not already possess. In tins style chiefly are composed most of 
 our Dialogues in Appendix C. 
 
 d. The familiar style is used by most of the natives of Bengal 
 in their own houses, and in their daily intercourse among them- 
 selves. Most of its words are derived from the Sanskrit, but 
 considerably modified, especially by absorbing the <T and other 
 consonants when preceded by a vowel, as ^fl for 3? < , 3^5 for 3^3 . 
 The endless use of expletives, as (?fl, F|, ^f%, is its chief blemish; 
 but for this it might become a beautiful language. It is, how- 
 ever, far from being rich enough to answer all the purposes of a 
 language. It abounds in terms relating to domestic and agri- 
 cultural life ; but is poor as soon as another province of thought 
 requires to be occupied. Vide Appendix A.
 
 159 
 
 APPENDIX A, 
 
 RULES FOR FAMILIAR OR COMMON CONVERSATION. 
 
 1. The rules laid down in the preceding work arc prin- 
 cipally applicable to the language as written in books or as 
 spoken in public by men of education ; but the colloquial 
 phraseology, in common use among the native Hindus, 
 differs in many respects from the written language. The 
 following remarks on this subject are extracted from the 
 anonymous work alluded to in 21, ; and as the author of 
 that work was himself a native, we may safely rely upon 
 his authority. Before we proceed further, however, it may 
 be proper to remind the reader of what we stated in o 
 respecting the inherent short vowel, viz. that it is sounded 
 like a or 6. Now the latter pronunciation is most preva- 
 lent among the uneducated classes, who form in Bengal a 
 majority of at least ten to one. The learned generally 
 pronounce the short d as it is in Sanskrit ; thus, they say 
 sdJcdl and drddhd ; whereas the vulgar say so/cul and orrfd/to. 
 This last mode of pronunciation seems to have been the 
 more common in the time of Mr. Ilalhed, who adopted it 
 in his Bengali Grammar, printed at Hooghley, A.D. 1788. 
 More than forty years later, Mr. G. C. Haughton followed 
 Ilalhed' s pronunciation ; although Dr. Carey had then in 
 troduced the Sanskrit system in Bengal.
 
 ICO APPENDIX A. 
 
 2. In familiar or common conversation, the imitative 
 sounds ( 87, h] arc frequently in use, whereas in writing 
 the things intended for expression arc in general formally 
 expressed. Thus the English sentence "bring a knife or 
 any other instrument which will serve as a knife," may bo 
 translated by ^-sitsr wfj fr^l ff?? ^*f ^? ^^5 (TR ^nsj" 
 ^rf^ or, by J)^-Tfw frf% |f? ^rfa ; but, in common conversa- 
 tion, the latter is mostly in use. Adjectives, used abso- 
 lutely, that is, without their substantives, generally have 
 the enclitic particles, appropriated to their substantives, 
 joined to them, as ^rfcrft^? TflTFl-^l (%$ ft ijfsr ^ToT-l} 1 ^r 
 " give me the white (one), and you take the black (one)." 
 
 3. Such words as are not Sanskrit, or at least pure 
 Sanskrit, are generally contracted according to the follow- 
 ing rules : viz. the medial ^~ of a verb is cut off in every 
 instance, except when preceded by a consonant and followed 
 by TT, as ^?* for Tta ; s^t~3: for *i?t^T ; lt*r for stf^rr. 
 If the syllabic f^; be in the middle of a verb, it is left out ; 
 if at the end of one, it suffers the elision merely of its 3;, 
 as 3*rfsr for <ff^cTt^ , ^ for ^f^ ; ^ for srf^ . The people 
 of Calcutta and the adjacent places contract the ^ only, as 
 
 for ?frf 5 r "^" for 
 
 4. The final or medial irl or ^^? is contracted into *?, 
 
 and Tin into ^ , as *^rj is contracted into *TCT?1 ; ?r"JTl into 
 <K ~ "^ <K 
 
 lF<T5rl ; ^f?rs into ^r?1 ; *rfwi into %z~$ ; "grfrhri into *su> etc. 
 If there be an ^rl in the word endin in ^1T| t"-s or %TT| 
 
 that ^T1 is changed into ^i, as *rffwi i s changed into 
 
 into C"^r^ srf&lfl into C^^l . The initial ^rf of verbs
 
 OF THE TENSES. 101 
 
 is contracted into <n : thus, -wto'MtT makes jr=rf?r ; 
 makes C*T?Tfsr . hi causal verbs, ~snt~ is contracted into ~sf], 
 as *rr$Trr^"eTf3r contracted into *ft C'7T*rt*r ; c^arrf"? into c^rpr ; 
 C^M?Ci into (T5TT5. In the past conjunctive participle of 
 a causal verb ^fl^TI ()1> ^TTT^in is contracted in(o^T*T,as 
 into c^f^y ; sfTf^in into '<ff?T<r; *Tf s<rf^"?n into srr^zir; 
 into rtnr; c^rnrt^^l into ^^r?; c^s?T^"?1 into 
 Observe further that when <? or ^ comes bet'oi-c 
 ^ is shortened into %, and ^ into ^ , as in tlie lu^t 
 two examples. 
 
 5. In the present definite and imperfect tenses, the 
 present participle loses its termination "T3 after a con- 
 sonant, and changes it into F after a vowel, which (T? ) is 
 compounded with the ^ following in the termination, as 
 for 5ff?^5f^ f^TTsr for ^Irrefwfa' ^rf^" 5 ^" for TTIP (.$(.<$ 
 
 for ^9 titC^ ; ^ft"^ for ^tr^C^-r . r riie following con- 
 tractions take place in the terminations of verbs, viz. 
 
 The syllable (^ is changed into TT as ^w 
 
 G. The negative inflections of the perfect tense always, 
 and of the pluperfect tense sometimes, are elegantly formed 
 by adding =rf^" to the simple inflections of the present 
 tense, even in good Bengali: thus, ^f=r -^rw *ff ^sTSJTyr ^^r 
 1) u he has not learnt (his) lesson to-day ;" 
 
 * The vowel i is here pronounced very slightly 01 almost imperceptibly, as we stated 
 in a preceding note. 
 
 11
 
 162 APPENDIX A. 
 
 " had he learnt yesterday?") 
 
 (for ^Iwtf^ZsRTl) " Xo, he had not learnt (it) yes- 
 terday also." Again, in common conversation, the negative 
 ^T^" in the same tenses is contracted into fr , as -^ifa ^fsfr 
 for ^rffw ^f? ^rft" . The negative particle r| is idiomatically 
 pronounced cr after the verbal inflections of the first per- 
 son, present indefinite tense, and all the second persons 
 singular ; as ^rtfsr *rtf?^ for *ftf?^1 ; ^a^t" tffow for ^r^ 
 *rr^fe| . The sr| of rr^ , too, when used principally, is 
 commonly (or vulgarly) pronounced (W , as 
 for 
 
 7. The pronoun ^f| is contracted into ; and ^1 into 
 , in the nominative as well as in other cases, as ^s? for 
 for ^T<r ; ^^ for ^^~t^ ; ^^ for 9 ^I7r^ * ^TTS for 
 for t"^ftT5 . The enclitic particle ^1 is vulgarly 
 pronounced as ^1 , after an adjective, and adjective pro- 
 noun ; and as c^ after ^, ^, c^rt" and c^rt" ; and fe is pro- 
 nounced fs after the last four pronouns : thus, ^8^1 ^T^T T5r 
 for ^1 ^t^T 5T?r ; <$*Fs "T=T for u^^fe ^tT . ^1 is pronounced 
 
 \J V/ 
 
 C5 after the word &tt" , and ^tt" is pronounced as c^l before 
 the particle fs, as ^ 
 
 57/c Different Significations of Verbs wlien used in peculiar 
 Idiomatic Forms or Instances. 
 
 8. The repetition of a verbal inflection twice or oftener 
 docs not generally imply a repetition of the signification ; 
 but when the present participle of a verb is repeated twice, 
 and followed by a noun of agency, formed in the Bengali 
 mode, from the same verb, or by a third personal present 
 indicative inflection of the common form, then, instead of
 
 DIFFERENT SIGNIFICATIONS, ETC. 1C3 
 
 doubling its signification, it indicates the frequent repe- 
 tition, continuance, or practice of what it meant singly ; as 
 fltoTS ffts (.*> *1fe dy "constant singing forms the songster;" 
 fsrsfirs f%ftl> f*Ttt " constant writing forms the writer." 
 The present and past conjunctive participles, when repeated 
 and followed by a finite inflection of another verb, indicate 
 the continuance of what they meant singly, as c^T srfferrfc or 
 srrfors*. *rf?nrl C*tsf u he killed himself by constant labour." 
 When the present participle is doubled and followed by a 
 finite verb, it indicates that the action of the finite verb 
 was put in execution or finished as soon as or very soon after 
 the action of the participle had commenced : thus, Tfrf? 
 <f>i<:4*. *Tf"?n ^^ " he had scarcely sat down when he had 
 done eating ; " f*r ^rfr ^"^ c*rf5rc<r or ?f*nr5*. 4lfs? fsfrs "la- 
 plays well who soon after he sits down, wins the game." 
 The repeated participle in the above instance, is sometimes 
 followed or preceded by the word ^fr (literally "thus" 
 or " so,") as ^*ifa ffcs *tfr?rtc$teT " it fell down as soon as it 
 was touched." 
 
 9. In many instances, the present participle, being 
 doubled and followed by a finite verb, adds to its significa- 
 tion the idea of w Idle, or a like word ; as fs 
 
 "he spoke to me while dining;" fsfr 
 
 <i< " he reads while Avalking along the road ;" 
 <F5 ^5rT*^fj f<yy ^ff^3 < 5TT^?' " as he goes along 
 the road how many wonderful sights will he have an oppor- 
 tunity of seeing." AVhen the present participle is repeated 
 (twice), and followed by a finite negative inflection of the 
 same verb ; then it shows that its agent did, is doing* or 
 will do the action of the finite verb when on the very point 
 of doing the action of the participle ; and in such cases, the
 
 164 APPENDIX A. 
 
 emphasis is generally laid upon the participle, as 
 rj " he did not give though on the very point of giving." 
 When, however, the emphasis is laid upon the finite verb, 
 then it expresses that the action of the finite verb was, is, 
 or will be put in execution or performed, while that of the 
 participle is, tuas, or shall be yet unfinished, as (4fc5\ (*ft?T r| 
 "he commenced his dinner but did not finish." 
 
 10. When the doubled present participle has a nomina- 
 tive of a person different from that of the (affirmative) 
 verb which completes the sense, then it bears the signifi- 
 cation of a finite verb agreeing with its nominative in 
 person and with its following verb in tense. In the first 
 case, it adds the idea of priority, and in the second, some- 
 times of priority and sometimes of while, as l[fsr c^sft^ ^n 
 sit^m ^rffr ftf?fl $T^5 " I shall arrive there before you 
 can ;" ^fsr c^srt^ c^fe^ Ttsl ^tn *rT^re " that will be 
 done ere or by the time you get there." When a verb of 
 the past indefinite, present, or future tense is doubled and 
 followed by an indicative inflection of ^<[<i "to do," or of a 
 verb expressive of seeming, then it shews that its agent is 
 on the point of being or doing or is about to be or to do what 
 it signified singly, as srjiu ^P ylc^ "it is on the point of 
 going ;" *rt?A ^f^ " I am about to go." 
 
 11. When J)^" is prefixed to a verb of the present defi- 
 nite tense, or of the past indefinite, and is pronounced 
 abruptly, it adds the idea just now, as ^ itU^ "he is just 
 going or gone ;" ^t~ C^sflz^ f^rtf^tsT "I have just been 
 there." When ^ is prefixed to a simple verbal inflection 
 of the present tense, it indicates that the verb's action will 
 presently take place, as ^ ^T|T*T "it will presently come;" 
 i<it" ^Tt^" " it will presently go."
 
 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 165 
 
 12. The pluperfect inflection of the indicative mood, fol- 
 lowed by ^Tf? fa (literally, " what more,") generally indi- 
 cates that its action was on the point of being performed 
 when it was stayed at the very last moment, as r <rc?f^rf^ 
 ^Tt? fa " I was on the point of catching ;" srf<rTrrfe*rr*r -3rr<r 
 fa " I was on the point of dying." fa " what " when pre- 
 ceded by an inflection of the past indefinite, perfect, plu- 
 perfect, or future tense, or one of the verbal inflections 
 ending ^t^r, fs^T, etc. and followed by the same inflection 
 of another verb, it adds, in a conditional manner the sense; 
 of as soon as, no sooner than, or the moment when, to the 
 meaning of the preceding verb, and turns (though indi- 
 rectly) the tense of past indefinite and perfect inflections 
 in the future, as ^fsr ^^K^ sftfa fvr$T% fa *rrf?r nihrn? " no 
 sooner you will abuse him, than you will get a beating;" 
 lifsT fT^Tft 5 * c^tl=T fa snrtsf "no sooner will you go there than 
 you will die." 
 
 13. When the conditional tense, terminating in 
 T, ("5, or ("5W, has the subjunctive particle *rfff " if/' un- 
 derstood before it, and is followed by one of such words 
 as 'StcTjijinr, *js?^, ?t^1, etc., and is, in its negative form 
 repeated with the following word, then the object is un- 
 affected by either alternative, as fsfsr 3Rr^r -frr, ^1 ^?^ "at^r 
 "(if) he does so (it is) good, (if) he does not (it is) good," 
 i.e. "it is immaterial whether he does it or not." ^fsr ^IC"5 
 TT^"1 ^fl fsrrs Tt^l l> if you did go (it was or would be) well, 
 if you did not go, good," i.e. " it matters little whether 
 you went or not." 
 
 14. Sometimes ^rs\ is used at the end of those verbal 
 inflections to which t" may be affixed, trsi adds, in a
 
 1G6 A1TEXDIX A. 
 
 manner, the idea of defiance to the meaning of the future 
 inflections ; and of frequency, to the signification of the 
 present inflections of the progressive form ; in other in- 
 stances it boldly asserts the performance of the verb's 
 action : thus, *rfa-^T3l " I will go ;" orstfrw irif^-^Trsi " (to 
 be sure) I frequently go there." Sometimes the C51 is 
 separated from the t", and added to the nominative, as 
 ^rffr-fsl srfa-^" , ^fsr-rsl srff^jr-^" . Sometimes such a 
 phrase as ^rf% "what of that?" v\ ^ f% "what fear of 
 that?" is added to ^si as *rt3"-^5l ^Tf% ? 
 
 lo. When the particle ^1 is added to the past indicative 
 inflections of a verb, it signifies that there is very little 
 harm or advantage should the action of the verb take 
 place, as c*t*f-t~3l "what matter if he has gone?" ^"cT-^ri 
 "it is of little consequence if it be." Such a phrase as 
 TKTS f%, tftrs f% ^r "what of that ?" ^irs f% ^rr^T^ TTT? u of 
 what consequence is that?" is often expressed after v*H ? as 
 C9f7T^-<ri "sUrs f% ? ^5 *i^<i ^st^5 f% "5rt^ L 7:'5T ulir ? When f% is 
 prefixed to the above inflection, followed by ^n , it con- 
 veys the idea of supposition in the execution of the verb's 
 action, as f% c ? l^^<1 "or I suppose he has gone." 
 
 1C. When ?> is joined to a verb of the indicative mood 
 present or future tense, or of the imperative mood future 
 tense, it (?") indicates the performance of the verb's action 
 with positive-ness or without failure, as <t-f<i<9 " I will 
 positively do or I must do (so);" <FTf% irf? 1 "^" c^TsTtF* "go 
 there to-morrow positively." When ^ is affixed to the 
 present, conjunctive, or adverbial participle, then it gene- 
 rally adds the idea of as soon as, or the moment when, and 
 the participle conveys the signification of a finite inflection
 
 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 107 
 
 which agrees in tense with the perfect verb following, as 
 
 "I went as soon as lie told me ;" 
 C>I?T Hie ran away the moment 
 when he saw me ;" fe-fal nrs ^rf^sr^ (Tfsrn^ frr* " I shall 
 pay you the money as soon as it comes to hand." The t" 
 is also sometimes affixed to the other inilections of a verb, 
 but it is very difficult to express what idea it adds to their 
 signification. The ^ added to the conditional inflections 
 of a verb, generally conveys the idea oi granted 01 supposing 
 that, arid causes them to convey their signification in the 
 indicative mood, as ^rfift" ^fwi srtfc ; or v 
 or nf? <-f<iyi Ttf%^" k ' granted that I did so." 
 
 17. In joining the ^ to the compound inflections of a 
 verb, it may be affixed to the participle as well as to the 
 auxiliary verb : thus, (T ^f^irts" TfC<F or c^T <t-f<iJl 
 
 or ^rts'^^tf^rt" ; ^f?"?rto (.^ or 
 
 f\clf*r or f^rtf^sTTfsr . In speaking, when the verb 
 lias already ended in ?"" , the additional ^~ , is generally ab- 
 sorbed in the former one, which is prolonged in pronun- 
 ciation. When t" follows the nominative to a verb of the 
 present tense indicative mood, and also the nominative to 
 the verb in the next clause, which must begin with ^TT?, 
 and end in the same or in another verb of the same tense 
 and mood, then the ^ gives the idea of tuhcthcr or either, 
 and ^rf? of or, as fftfa^ ^lU>H, '^srr? ^ifa^ *TT^" " either he 
 will come (here) or I shall go (there)." 
 
 18. When a verb is doubled, and ^ is used between 
 both, then it indicates the performance of the verb's action 
 with the utmost certainty ; but when the e" is used at the 
 end of a duplicated verb, it indicates that there is very
 
 " 
 
 1G8 APPENDIX A. 
 
 little consequence should the verb's action take place, as 
 " I must 8)" " I sna U positively go ;" ctfsr c^=r^ 
 no matter if he is gone;" ^fwlz^" ^f^yftr^ "he has 
 certainly done this ;" 3Ff?Tfr^ <rf?irir^x or <t?r<iiJUfe>^ ^fwfr^ 
 "it matters very little if he has done this." Sometimes 
 the present and past indefinite inflections of the indicative 
 mood are used together, and the ^ is added to the latter to 
 indicate that there is very little consequence should the 
 verb's action occur, as irHr C*tT^" u what if he goes ?" 
 " what if he do eat ?" 
 
 19. When a negative verb, formed by prefixing *r|, is 
 repeated, and has an ^ added to the second *r| , it signifies 
 that it matters very little whether the action expressed by 
 the verb is performed or not, as *1 fsif^fcT rft" ftf^T " what 
 harm if it hasn't been got?" =fl *TfTTl CtfeT ^1% *fTTTl C*t*T . 
 Sometimes another ^rfp" is used instead of the affirmative 
 part of the latter verb active or passive, as r| *Tf x C''?rf < ''fa' ^T^" 
 ^rt^ (for srjit c^^r), ^1 ^"?Hr^ ^t^ ^ft" . Sometimes the 
 verb is not repeated, but being preceded by -rf^, conveys 
 the same signification as the above, as ^T^ fafacr rr^" ^"^T . 
 
 20. If a verb of the future or past tense be doubled, and 
 the first one be followed by c*1 , and pronounced curtly, and 
 the second be followed by "s~, and pronounced emphatically, 
 then the idea of only, pcrscvcrinyly, 01 continually is added to 
 the signification of the verb in the future tense, and of for 
 ever to the meaning of the verb in the past tense, as f%fn:^ 
 (Tl f^ftnr^ " if ho sits down to write he will stick to it ; " 
 
 C51 (Sffio' " he seems to have gone for ever ;" f^T^" C31 
 ^ or f?f<Tt^^ . The speaker, when impatient of 
 awaiting the completion of the verb's action, often adds
 
 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS 109 
 
 (TT, and sometimes c$ and Orff " I see," to the end of such 
 phrases as the above : thus, C*ftcT| ("51 c^^Tc" or Offt " I see 
 that he is gone for ever." 
 
 21. When ^r=T (perhaps the contracted form of 
 " having said ") is affixed to the past indefinite inflection of 
 a verb, it has no distinct signification of its o\vn, but 
 causes the principal verb to signify that its action is on the 
 point of being performed or will soon he performed, as c*f*T ^?r 
 "it will go on the instant;" *rfi>T ^f% "it will fall in a 
 moment." Sometimes the action, which has a strong pos- 
 sibility of being soon done, is expressed by the simple 
 present or past inflection of a verb, in which case a verb 
 bearing a contrary signification is in its negative form often 
 expressed after it, and the word "5TT? is used between them, 
 as ^rffsr sr<rsrf*r , ^rf? <fffwi , 
 
 22. When a verb is repeated four times, the first and 
 second time in its affirmative, and the third and fourth 
 time in its negative form, the expression then shows that 
 it is of very little consequence whether the verb's action 
 be performed or no, as ^rf-e Tf srfrrT^ rfirf^ k ' you may go or 
 not, (just as you like) ;" r?^T ^^T srft^cT =m:^ . Often such 
 a phrase as TtT5 f%|f ~3rf! L r*T "?rtir ^H "nothing will come of it." 
 is expressed after a verb repeated as above, as ^rf ^TT srf<n s 
 5rt?rT , ^tre f%^" WT^"(T5T irTTr STI " you may go or not, nothing 
 will come of it." 
 
 23. When Ftt" " it is roqumnl," is used before a simple 
 verbal inflection of the present or past tense, indicative 
 mood, and is next used before the same verb negative, or 
 before the same inflection of another verb bearing a diife-
 
 170 APPENDIX A. 
 
 rent signification, then the agent is considered at liberty to 
 perform or not to perform the action of the principal verb, 
 and Ff^", in such case, conveys the signification of to wish 
 or the like in the subjunctive mood, present tense, as 
 ST| *rf " go or not just as you like ;" Ftt" (tfsrfa 
 , Ftt" (tfsrfa Ftt" ^\ c^rf^ . Optionally the second 
 and third personal inflections (simple) of Ff^ or Ff^ are 
 used instead of Ft^", to agree with the principal verb and 
 its agent in person and rank, as Ft srt^ Ff^? wfat^ ; Ftr 
 *l|<:<H Ftsr <1*U<:<M . Sometimes f% is affixed to Ft^" , in 
 which case the principal verb is not repeated or followed 
 by another verb, but has an ^" added to itself, to its nega- 
 tive particle, if any, or to its object, as Ff^~f% 
 
 24. When ^ and fiF together are added to the conditional 
 participle, and again to its negative form, or to the same 
 participle of another verb, bearing a different signification, 
 then it shows that there is very little consequence should 
 the participle's action be performed or not, and the two 
 participles have the force of two finite verbs agreeing in 
 tense with the perfect verb following, as ^f?r c*U=l^f<i? ^r) 
 C*Uds fa " of what consequence is it whether you go or 
 not ?" ^fsr srfvicci^fc %fFtcT? f% . The ^ after the above in- 
 flection is generally followed by csl, C*ffa " I see," or sr| c^r 
 "why not?" and r| (<$* is followed by such a phrase as 
 (klufa, ^17T3 CFt^ f%, ^tfw f%, or ^1T5 tfsr f% u Avhat harm is 
 in that?" as, ^
 
 171 
 
 APPENDIX B. 
 
 ON THE DIVISIONS OF MONEY WEIGHTS AND ME A- 
 SURES DAYS OF THE WEEK MONTHS OF THE 
 YEAR CONTRACTIONS OF WORDS. 
 
 OF THE DIVISIONS OF MONEY. 
 
 1. In Bengal petty disbursements are kept in 3-fs, *rrl, 
 etc., and the highest denomination of such accounts is the 
 3T3\, which is equal to the fourth part of a rupee, or our 
 sixpence very nearly. Accounts of this description are 
 superscribed with the word <d% " cowry," and are termed 
 ^T^l "crude." The other species of accounts is termed *Tfa1 
 11 ripe or perfect," and has the word ^r| "cash" written over 
 it. In these the rupee is the highest denomination, fwl is 
 the denomination of the fourth part of the nominal value of 
 the rupee, as settled in the bazar. Whatever is bought 
 or sold by tale, is reckoned by the *f v and 
 
 4 ^5 (cowries) make 1 
 
 5 ^31 1 ^s or 
 20 *tefl 1 *T v 
 
 4 *fq 1 WTr| or c^T^ or 
 
 1G *f v 1 ^;i = = 4 -srKI 
 
 16 ^r(^1 1 T?t^1 (rupee). 
 
 a. The coin valued at 2 annas is called ^srTfr; 4 anna?, a 
 , FtlT5rrf ; r, or C?~Sff%; 8 annas, ^Sff^T or ^lu^tf*'; one pice, 
 j and so on.
 
 172 APPENDIX B. 
 
 OF WEIGHTS. 
 
 2. The unit of the measurement of weights is the <r 
 which averages nearly two grains and a quarter troy 
 
 weight. 
 
 8 ?fs make 1 
 
 10 *rw 1 
 
 4 c^fsTl = 1 
 
 4 ^Ffr? = i 
 4 
 40 
 
 OF DRY MEASURE. 
 
 f Grain is either weighed in scales by the above 
 weights, or is measured by basket measures. These are 
 not the same or quite the same in all parts of Bengal. 
 
 4 GPF make 1 *Tffa, or flff^, or CSt^J, or 
 4 C3ti 1 
 5 
 4 
 16 
 
 The C?t^ is about a ser and a quarter. 
 
 OF LONG MEASURE. 
 
 4. This measure does not vary much from our own. 
 
 3 TT^ (barley-corns) make 1 <sreFf*r (finger's breadth) 
 
 4 *J st fa 1 "5"^ (hand's breadth) 
 
 3 "gr^ 1 f^TTi (span) 
 2 fw^ 1 rfT (cubit) 
 
 4 rfs 1 srg: (fathom) 
 2000 *rg: 1 c^T^r (coss) 
 
 4 f2FT*f 1 C?T^ (vojan)
 
 MKASUKKS OF TIMK. 
 
 (i. r riio area or portion of land, containing three hundred and 
 twenty square cubits, i< a knthn, twenty kt'itlms make a bighti. 
 The quarter of almost all objects is commonly called a (*T1Tn or 
 
 OF MEASURES OF TIME. 
 
 5. The time it requires to pronounce one long syllable is 
 called a 
 
 10 fw=T make 1 2fT 
 
 G fT< 1 *m 
 
 CO *f=r 1 tf*j 
 
 GO *j 1 f^ (day) 
 
 7 fir* 1 Tf^T^ (week) 
 
 OF THE DAYS OF THE WEEK. 
 
 G. The days of the week, like those of our own language, 
 are named after the planets ; the word TT? "a day" being 
 subjoined. 
 
 Sunday, from ?f? the Sun. 
 
 Monday, ,, OTfsr the Moon. 
 
 Tuesday, ,, sr^cT Mars. 
 
 Wednesday, ,, ^*f Mercury. 
 
 ^ Thursday, ,, <t^*vjHft Jupiter. 
 
 Friday, ,, ^3F Venus. 
 
 Saturday, ,, *rfw Saturn. 
 
 a. From sun-rise to sun-set is the length of the day, and is 
 railed fjrJTf^ ; and from sun-set to sun-rise is considered as the 
 nig-ht, and is termed <Ttf3raTr. Each of these divisions is sub- 
 divided into four equal parts, called f3"? -\vatches," which of 
 course vary in length, according 1 to the latitude of the place,
 
 174 
 
 APPENDIX B. 
 
 and the season of the year. It is evident, however, that they 
 must average, one season with another, three hours' duration each. 
 
 OF THE NAMES OF THE MONTHS. 
 
 7. The Hindu year is divided into twelve equal por- 
 tions, which may be called solar months ; but all festivals 
 and dates are reckoned, not by these simple months, but 
 by the duration of the moon which commences in each. 
 Hence, although the month baishalch for instance begins 
 de jure about the llth of April, it may commence de facto 
 from one day to twenty-eight days later. When two new 
 moons occur during one solar month, which happens once 
 in three years, there is an intercalary month, and the 
 month so intercalated receives the name of the solar month 
 within which the two new moons may happen to occur. 
 Each lunar month is divided into two parts. From the 
 change to the full moon is called ^# *FSF, " the bright half 
 or wing;" and from the full moon to the change is termed 
 " the dark half." fofa is the term for a lunar day. 
 
 br*rr*r 1 
 
 aft* 
 
 "April. 
 
 May. 
 
 June. 
 
 July. 
 
 August, 
 i. September. 
 
 October. 
 November. 
 December. 
 January. 
 February. 
 . March. 
 
 a. It may be observed, then, that the Hindus, rather clumsily, 
 reckon time hy solar years, and luni-solar months. Their 
 principal a?ra is that of the Kali-Tug, of which the year 436'2 
 expired ahout the llth of April, A.D. 1861, by solar reckoning, 
 at which period their new year generally commences. Beside
 
 CONTRACTIONS OF WORDS. 170 
 
 the frra of the Kali-Yitg, the Hindus in the northern half of 
 India reckon from the time of a renowned prince, by name 
 Vikramfiditya, who lived (or died) about 57 years before tbe 
 commencement of our a>ra. Another common a?ra is that of 
 a prince named Shalivahana, which commenced 78 years after 
 the birth of Christ. The former of these eeras is called the 
 Samvat, and the latter the Saka. sera. Several other a>ras are 
 in use in certain parts of the country, for a full account of which 
 the reader may consult a profound work devoted entirely to the 
 subject, entitled " Kala Sankalita," 4to. Madras, 1825. 
 
 OF THE CONTRACTIONS OF CURRENT WORDS. 
 
 8. Many words which are in very common use, arc con- 
 tractedly written in letters and papers of business, to save 
 time. The first syllable, with the nasal sign subjoined, is 
 the mode by which the contraction is made. As they are 
 mostly foreign words, the original of each is subjoined. 
 A. implies Arabic, p. Persian, ir. Hindustani. 
 
 t" for t~^ ( if- uJci-s) ) to this place, hither. 
 f% fV'xre, (A. i^-,^j) a village or division. 
 ,, f%f% ( P. ^j^ ) a boat. 
 ,, f<^<fa ( o.vJjuJ) a rent-roll ; an agreement to 
 
 pay by instalments. 
 ^r ,, Ft^rf^ an invoice. 
 
 ,, Ff^ (p.^iU*-) a servant. 
 ^rf ,, ^rlf^ (A. ^U) a surety or security, 
 cwl" ,, ("fli?1 (11. ^'yr) a P a i r or su ^ f an y thing. 
 fe ,, fe^r (A. <uj ) in trust or in charge (of). 
 
 A. ^Jl^ ) goods, commodities, 
 tr (A. jJL) ) ready money.
 
 17G APPENDIX B. 
 
 for "5"^*p (A. t sJe>) aside, towards. 
 
 \ \ ->^s s- 
 
 ,, ^^ ( A - J^) a talk or zemindary. 
 
 5ff?*{ (A. fC;lj') the date or day of the month. 
 ^ P r i ce or value of a thing. 
 
 ^ (P. ^j-jJ an account; lit within. 
 
 (P. <ufj ) a part of a zilla or province. 
 ^ (P. CXj ) a footman or courier. 
 
 (P. x^) a footman or messenger. 
 Tt ,, Tfa^ (A. ^- : ( V) an account (of); belonging to. 
 
 oT a mundul or chief person in a village. 
 3Tf ,, ^rf^ (P. *U) a moon, a month. 
 
 (A. c^i^) by the hands (of). 
 W ( A. Als' ) Muhammad. 
 the English Mr. 
 
 ^r (A. *lL ) a place (prefixed to the name of 
 any place). 
 
 ^"s ending with, up to this date. 
 
 ' f A. ,.ti"L- ) an inhabitant. 
 
 S \ ^< s- 
 
 (A. ^1!^) to the care (of).
 
 APPENDIX C, 
 
 CONSISTING OF EASY PHRASES AND UST-TUL DIA- 
 LOGUES ON FAMILIAR SUBJECTS. 
 
 Easy and Familiar Phrases. 
 
 Be careful, 
 
 Open the door, Tt? 
 
 Shut the door, ^rrT? flt . 
 
 Don't forget, ffsf* =fl . 
 
 Be silent, *f ^? . 
 
 Don't make a noise ($tT=T 
 
 Stop, stir, be quiet, 
 
 Make haste, ^?1 ^r 
 Don't be in hurry, 
 
 Go quickly, 
 Walk slowly, 
 Come here, <^n ^rt ^sr . 
 Sit there, ^-srft^ ^^^r . 
 Who is he ? ^s c^ ? 
 What is this ? 4 fo ? 
 They are liars,TT^T<n f^^Jl 
 Who lives there ? 
 
 (Tf s 
 
 They are la/y, 
 
 Let it alone, 
 
 Let it be as it i 
 
 It rains, *$ 
 
 It is cloudy, 
 
 Look for it, 
 
 What do you want? 
 
 What do you say ? f% 
 
 AVlio is there ? 
 
 I go home, Tffs 
 
 Is it true ? 4 f% 
 
 Who says so ? c 
 
 Don't ou know ? 
 
 Can you read ? 
 
 I know how to write, 
 
 Don't delay, 
 It is time, or late, 
 What shall I eat? 
 
 12
 
 178 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 See the sport or fun, 
 
 A bird's nest, 
 
 Why do you laugh? 
 
 Don't weep, <-|Pk r| . 
 
 Chide him, 
 
 Don't climb the tree, 
 
 iH^ r| . 
 Stand in the yard, 
 
 Go up, 
 
 Come in, n-i<l 
 You are angry, 
 I feel cold, *ffa 
 Cut the grass, 
 Eing the bell, 
 The dog barks, 
 Don't be angry, ?T*t 
 Don't strike, srrf? ? 
 Call (some) Coolies, 
 Lift up the load, 
 Call aloud, 
 Stand up, 
 Sit still. 
 Don't be uneasy, 
 Don't be impatient, 
 
 sr| 
 
 It seems hard, 
 It tastes bitter, 
 It is sun-shine, ( 
 A moonlight night, 
 
 A dark night, 
 There is no wind, TT5PT 
 It is sultry, 
 It is very hot, 
 
 The cock crows, 
 * 
 
 The wind blows, TT?r 
 
 ' &. 
 
 Take lessons, TT^ =r<? 
 Open your mouth, ^1 
 Shew your teeth, 
 Ask, fsfwl^n ^? . 
 Call for the palanquin, 
 
 Xo matter, no consequence, 
 
 Xever mind, 
 
 Xo harm, 
 
 Has your master risen? 
 
 What advantage is there in 
 
 that ? 
 There is no use in that, 
 
 What animal is this ? 
 
 ^^? 
 Whose house is that ? 
 
 5T?? 
 Whose house is this ? 
 
 ^T?? 
 He is very impudent, CT T^s 
 
 ?^. 
 
 Go away, you are dismissed,
 
 EASY AND FAMILIAR I'HKASKS. 
 
 170 
 
 Make a sign for him to come I Is any thing eatable to be 
 hither, Tlstc<? ^<flZr*Jir>iC3 ot there? 
 
 I luive no leisure, 
 
 I liavc got a head-ache, 
 
 lie has got the stomach-ache, 
 
 I have a very bad tootli-ache, 
 
 What is the price of these 
 
 things ? iii>i<t-i <3<l ^~^r fa ? 
 
 Where are you going? 
 
 Do you know where he is 
 gone ? srfsr fafa 
 
 Clean those things, J? 
 
 *i<r-si ^(f^ 1 ?^ ^ . 
 Send them to my house, 
 
 To-day is a holy-day with us, 
 
 What is the price of this ? 
 
 They don't work on festival 
 days, T^T^I *r?re? fif^ 
 
 That is invaluable, c^r 
 What is the difference be- 
 
 tween these two ? 4 bj.^4 
 
 "srcy fe^m" f%? 
 Is there no key to this box? 
 
 There are lots of flies at Cal- 
 cutta, ^fsFFfanr "SJZ^^F 5rrf% . 
 
 Who is the master or owner 
 of this house? iiTff%?^gi C^F? 
 
 What is the name of this 
 village or town ? 
 
 fa ? 
 
 Do you know this man ? 
 
 Have these things come from 
 Europe ? 4 
 
 How is he to-day ? 
 
 Where shall you stay to- 
 night ? $f?r ^rffi 
 
 Belter than yesterday, 
 
 Which is the best of these 
 three ? 3 
 
 The sun has become very 
 oppressive, c?
 
 180 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Hold up the umbrella, 
 (or 
 
 Is this horse Arabian, Per- 
 sian, or English ? 
 
 "Why does he not come ? 
 
 . 
 
 This is enough, * 
 
 That is the same thing, or 
 
 ti)f% (for <ff-s> ). 
 Speak slowly and distinctly ; 
 
 then I shall understand 
 
 (I 011 )> 
 
 The enemy has retreated, 
 
 Our army has advanced for- 
 ward, ^srftfr 
 
 They pursued the enemy, 
 
 He is a depraved man, c^ r? 
 
 He is very wicked, PT T5 ^ . 
 
 He is cunning, a deceiver, 
 
 and a hypocrite, 
 
 Don't interrupt me, 
 
 Do not prevent him from 
 doing so, 
 
 He can speak Bengali flu- 
 ently, 
 
 He tells me one (thing) and 
 you another ; whom shall 
 I hear ? fsfr <s& 
 
 He gives alms to the blind, 
 lame, deaf, dumb, leper, 
 sick, infirm, and poor, 
 
 DIALOGUE 1. 
 
 A Daifs Routine Conversation. 
 
 Sir, please get up. 
 It is dawn. 
 Is the gun fired ? 
 It is just fired. 
 
 fwt? 5, * *J \t^ .
 
 A DAY'S ROUTINE CONVERSATION'. 181 
 
 Bring water to wash (my) 5T5 
 
 hands and face. 
 
 Tooth brush. %Ts ~sr[w\ 
 
 Give (me) soap. 
 Give (me) a towel. 
 
 I shall go to walk. (<i bio <:* 
 
 Order (them) to get the carnage fflfs 
 
 ready. 
 Order (them) to get the riding- f^T?Tf?<r ortsi T$r~5 
 
 horse ready. ?^T . 
 
 Sir, the horse is ready. Tflzs^ , (*TTsi wf? . 
 
 Keep (it) undt^r tlie veranda. TTjfJrr? ^tTF <rrT. 
 The saddle is not well set. fsfw ^fsf TTW1 r? srrt^ . 
 Make the girth tight. c^rfe ^T or ^frnfl Or 8. 
 
 Lower the stirrup. C?^T^" 
 
 Take off my shoes and cotton ^T| >e 
 
 stockings, and put me on 
 
 woollen stockings and boots. 
 AYhcre is my handkerchief? 
 It is in the i)ocket of your coat, 
 
 J 
 
 AVlierc is it, I cannot get it. 
 
 Bring my hat and whip. Tjfor '<? 
 
 AVliere are my gloves ? ^rW? 
 
 The fly disturbs the horse. c^TTTO^ srrf^rs f<n[-& 
 
 Fan the horse with a fly-brush. c*TTTK? F(^? <F? . 
 
 The shoes of the horse are 
 
 coming off. 
 
 The horse must be shod. c^rtFf? ^ff^T T|fsfr3 ?^ 
 
 The bridle too is almost broken. ?rf^T 
 
 Stop the horse. C*TfTl 
 Pat (the horse). 
 
 Give him 4 or -5 turns, genllv. Fff? %i?
 
 182 APPENDIX C. 
 
 "Why are not the rooms, doors, 
 
 and furniture cleaned yet ? *ff*r^t<r 
 Tell the sweeper to sweep im- 3M^<<^t?CT? Ji*tfr 
 
 mediately. ?^T . 
 
 Sir, neither the Metar* nor the ^U^< , ('re? f% c*l4<tl?t 
 
 Metrdni is come yet. 
 What, it is so late and they f%, <*f5 
 
 are not come yet ! *rf^~ ! 
 
 See, how much dust there is (?*{ (?f*t 
 
 upon the table and chairs. 
 Clean them this moment. 
 My coat is covered with dust, 
 
 brush it well. 
 Brush a pair of shoes. 
 Khidmatgdr^ get (me) a cup 
 
 of coffee and two or three 
 
 bits of toast. 
 
 Give (me) a cup of strong tea. ^ c^lTl^n <r^1 F| 
 Very well, Sir, I shall immcdi- (3 wfwl , <3*{fr c'iirT? 
 
 ately prepare and give it you. 
 Bring the newspaper. 
 See if the auction-advertise- 
 
 mcnts are come. r| 
 
 Sarddr,% make all ready for 
 
 bathing. 
 AVarm some Avater. 
 
 Do not make (it) very warm. 
 Only lukewarm. 
 
 * Mule and fcmnle sweeper or scullion. Metnr is a corruption of the Persian word 
 miJitar which literally denotes " prince or grandee," but here used in an ironical sense, 
 t The KhiilmoirjTir is the servant that waits at table, generally a Musalman. 
 } The head servant in charge of the wardrobe, generally a Hindu.
 
 A DAY'S ROUTINE CONVERSATION. 183 
 
 Order the Bhisti* to fill the rr<:<* ^TT 
 
 tub with water. 
 Shall I keep your clothes in ^t<T5 fe ^^rfsrr^rn^r <rffr^ ? 
 
 the bathing-room ? 
 No, keep them in the adjoin- sr|, sT^T? cTT*ft TO ?Tf . 
 
 ing room. 
 Keep only a shirt in the bathing c*tt*T5T-JHk-4 C^R^f Jj^l 
 
 room. ?t*T. 
 
 Sardar, come and dress me. n<ikl<i, ^Jl^n, *TT? 
 Bring some waistcoats. f^tt^T^s *^*M (or 
 
 I shall select one. ^rffa 43^1 Tiffin 
 
 Give (me) a silk neckcloth c?^^? stcrfa 7 *' ^ ?>?r|^T 
 
 and handkerchief. 
 Where arc the comb and brush? 
 Near the looking-glass. 
 Order the Khidmatgar to bring 
 
 breakfast. 
 The breakfast is ready on the ^t&?T<i c*Jd&?<l 
 
 table. 
 
 Give (me) pepper and salt. ur<i<:i><i ^^51 
 This egg i^ ; rotten. ^ f%sr-i&1 csrf^ri 59 ti|<:^ . 
 
 This egg is not well boiled. 
 The bread is not fresh. 
 The butter too is not fresh. 
 AVhat sort of cheese do you 5j^T*nr , c^t^ "ffr? 
 
 want, Sir ? 
 
 English or Dacca cheese ? 
 The goat's milk and cow's niilk 
 
 are both ready. 
 
 The water-currier; a corruption nf the Persian blhi^ht'i.
 
 184 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Give the goat's milk to the 
 
 children. 
 
 And cow's milk to me. 4ft '^srtsrfr^ *fft~? 
 
 Have you got (any) fish ? srf^ < sft*r?rl 
 I have. 
 
 Quickly fry some and bring. 
 "What fruit have you got ? f% f% 
 Plantain, orange, plum, guava, wl, 
 
 dates, and sugar-cane. 
 Is that milk or cream ? 
 Bring finger-glasses to wash 
 
 our mouths and hands. 
 Take away all these. 
 
 Are there any rare fruits ? (^^Tgjts f%|r 
 There are almonds, raisins, ?~fFf5T, 
 
 pomegranates, pistachios, 
 
 walnuts and dates. 
 Well, bring those, and wine. wfi\ , (^ TT^T ;; srr^, :: 5rf? 
 
 Order the Hukkalarddr* to 
 
 prepare and bring tobacco. 
 Blow the fire. 
 The fire is out. Wf^ ^^r ri . 
 
 The water of the huJclca is not 
 
 fresli ; change the water. 
 Again prepare the tobacco- 
 
 receiver well. ^<r . 
 
 Make a charcoal ball fire. ^ *r<rT or 
 Order the coachman to get the 
 
 carriage ready. 
 
 * The servant who has charge of the JtuJiJca or smoking appaiatus.
 
 A DAY'S ROUTINE CONVERSATION'. 185 
 
 It is time. 
 
 I shall go to (my) office. 
 
 Put the office-box in the car- 
 riage. 
 
 Drive, go straight. 
 
 Turn to the loft. 
 
 Turn to the right. 
 
 Stop here. 
 
 See if the gentleman or the 
 lady is at home. 
 
 Neither the gentleman nor the 
 lady is at home. 
 
 Well, go to the office. ^1^1 , Jf^sft^IlT FST 
 
 Furnish,* why don't you clean ^r^T^r, CS^TT ~<fT5 sr| 
 the desk ? 
 
 The Da f tar i ^ too, does not ^sft -s <-5iwvrlw TTT^ 3t*r 
 keep the kalamddn, (ink- 
 stand, etc.) clean. 
 
 The Daftaii is as bad as the c^R if 1 " 
 Famish. 
 
 Where is the punkha-bearer ? 
 
 Pull the punkha (ventilator). rr o *fl 
 
 Pull it gently. 
 
 Pull it hard. 
 
 I feel it very hot. 
 
 >'<i,+ take this letter to ^ 
 that gentleman. fF$T sic ^1 
 
 * Ftirr~is/i, vulgarly Frosh, a servant whose business is to sweep the mats, carpets, etc. 
 
 f The Da ft or 7 is properly a "record-keeper" or " ivgi.-trar," but in Bengal the term 
 is generally applied to an inferior offiee servant, who prepares writing materials, and 
 arranges the books of the establishment. 
 
 J The llai-k^)-a\* literally a factotum ; but his principal duties are carrying letters, 
 messages, etc. ; and sometimes acting as spy or emissary.
 
 186 APPENDIX C. 
 
 And bring the answer. 
 
 If the gentleman be not at *ri% srlz^ 3T? r| 
 
 home, then wait till he ^Ts~f? ^t 
 
 comes. ^f^ . 
 
 "Who is there ? C^ ^sTU^r ? or 
 
 Go to the Post-office, and dis- ^T^re? f*f?1 , ^ Ttf^ft Tl 1> <^ 
 
 patch this package by langl* 
 
 and if you see that any letter ^iP^^U^ Ort 051 
 
 has arrived, then bring it. *sft v^r . 
 
 DIALOGUE 2. 
 
 SarJcdr. 
 
 SarMrfi go to the bazar. >i<i <?!<!, 
 You are to buy some articles f; srf*it? 
 
 for me. 
 What things shall I have to 
 
 buy? 
 Three lustres, eight pairs of fsTF| 
 
 wall-shades, a pair of candle- Cf9t=rf^ff? , 
 
 sticks, two standing shades, ^9" c*T5f, 
 
 five hanging lamps or Ian- 
 
 terns, one hand-lantern; and 
 
 some porcelain. 
 
 * The b~mgi is a long pole with slings at either end supporting portable baskets for 
 conveying parcels, etc. too large for the regular mail. It is conveyed on men's shoulders 
 at the average rate of five miles an hour ; one relay of bearers relieving another at 
 certain regular stages. 
 
 f The Rarkiir in Bengal commonly denotes a native clerk in the employ of 
 Europeans. lie is a sort of house-steward, keeps the household accounts, receives and 
 disburses, and takes care of his master's money. He is generally a Hindu, and not 
 unfrequently a brahman. His services are valuable in one respect, viz., he will allow 
 )'i,iitiil>/ to cheat his ninatcr exi-rpt himself. The term is applied in some parts of India 
 tn clerks and accouiitants in Kxneial.
 
 CONVERSATION WITH THE SAIIKAH. 187 
 
 What (are those) ? fr fr ? 
 
 Cup, saucer, basin (to wash fart^ (or c^nrtal), fefF (or 
 hands and face), ewer, jar, GRTft), 5T5 T*f ** 4 1 <! 
 
 etc. sm *rr^, -srmi ^rr 
 
 And bring drinking glasses, ^rfa wz <fm? *tT*r, 
 
 wine glasses, pots to keep 
 
 salt, mustard, vinegar, pep- ? a)\h Tjf^rn? *TT3f ; 
 
 per, etc. ; also knives, forks, ^fjr, $fiM 
 
 and spoons. 
 Do you rtM|iiire any wooden 
 
 furniture ? 
 
 Yes, I do. $1, 
 
 One marble (//?. stone) table, rf|*T?1 Tt~5r<r? 
 
 two teak almirahs, four ma- 
 
 hogany teapoys, a dozen of <$|<:<&4 cs^TT^", TT?rrr^(or 
 
 chairs, half a dozen foot- ww^) c^lfiF, ^"^Tfw *n - 
 
 stools, two couches, and one 
 
 bedstead. 
 
 Don't yon want some cloth ? 
 A piece of Dacca muslin, two 
 
 pieces of cambric, half a 
 
 piece of longcloth, twelve 
 
 yards of jaconet, a piece of 
 
 flannel, a piece of French 
 
 chintz, a piece of jean, a 
 
 quarter piece of broadcloth, 
 
 and two curtains. 
 What colour of broadcloth, 
 
 red, black, blue, green, yel- or 
 
 low, brown, purple, ash- C^"^ 5 ^ <TtTt, 
 
 colour, or rose colour ? 
 And bring two quires of paper, wf? ^ fwi
 
 188 APPENDIX C. 
 
 two bundles of pens, four ^w, Fff?n?1 
 
 pencils, six sticks of sealing- sffal-Tfit, <*re fwl iNfsr (or 
 
 wax, a box of wafer bits, a ^SJFS??), <Rr&\ ^f^reT^ri *\w--t 
 
 hookkawith its pipe, cliillum, STT, ^fem ^ TT^sffa, ^^ C*f? 
 
 and cover, one seer of tobacco, 
 
 a box of cigars, a snuff-box 
 
 with snuff, a penknife, and ?FR-?FtTM frf?, ^s < 
 
 a pair of scissors. f Tfr ^rff^^? . 
 
 But first go to the auction, f%"3 T*fr*r fsrsitcsr *rf>e, 
 
 (and) buy what you can get ^rt^l Tt^? *tf?F ^? 
 
 there. 
 First try some five shops, know 
 
 the general rate of each 
 
 article, then buy. Take f%f=re. 
 
 care, don't you be cheated. 
 And some lady's articles are ^Tt? 
 
 required, ask your lady 
 
 about it. 
 Call a letter-engraver, I want 
 
 to have one seal and four 
 
 badges engraved. 
 And I must have my name ^!? ^^T? "T^ C*tt?t^in 
 
 engraved and some cards 
 
 printed. 
 Go to the printing house, and ^>t*tW 5 rt!r 
 
 get a hundred copies of this 
 
 invitation letter printed. 
 
 DIALOGUE ,3. 
 
 srff^j jj^o ^f w The Barber, also the Tailor, etc. 
 
 Is the barber come ? 
 Here he is.
 
 CONVERSATION WITH THK 15AUI5KK, ETC. 180 
 
 Good, sharpen your razor well, ^rt^l ~sfr *f?rr| *?? 
 
 Your razor (loos not shave well. (TT^rT? rr<r 
 
 Put on more soap. ^nz?1 ^rm^ (if c . 
 
 The hair must ho dipped. 
 
 Do not crop the hair. 
 
 Cut it shorter behind. *rfT5? frfr^f *rn> *<r . 
 
 You must cut the nails of my *fR<r? STI Offers (or 
 
 toes. ^$ c<. 
 
 Sir, the tailor is come. *TTc^*, 
 
 Well, call him to me. "srP-^1, 
 Measure the cloth youare to sew. 
 
 Make pantaloons of- jean. for* ^T^nr^^ ^rTSftsri (or 
 
 Shirt of cambric. (<t-sj 
 
 Jackets of longcloth. 
 
 And make some lancans of 
 
 flannel. 
 And darn the clothes that arc 
 
 torn. 
 
 4v 
 
 Sir, the washerman is come. (*1 !>!<*<', C'^t^tl 
 Well, count and give him the 
 clothes. 
 
 And tell (the washerman) to ^Ti"? ^fsTTTl W C^T 
 take out the ink-spots on ^Tf^T? Ff'5t 
 the clothes, and to iron them 
 well, and give within a week. 
 
 Very well, sir. 
 
 DIALOGUE 4. 
 
 On Dining, etc. 
 Sir, the tiffin is ready. TTft^, frftw
 
 100 APPENDIX C. 
 
 "Well, give my salam (i.e. my 
 
 compliments) to your lady. 
 Butler, I have invited eight 
 
 gentlemen to-day. 
 Get a sufficient quantity of 
 
 things ready. 
 
 It is evening (lit. twilight). 
 Light the lights. 
 Light the parlour with candles, 
 And light the other rooms with 
 
 cocoa-nut oil. 
 Sir, the dinner is ready. 
 Serve it then. 
 Give soup and bread to that 
 
 gentleman. 
 Give me potato, mustard, and 
 
 salt. 
 Give him meat, pepper, and 
 
 vinegar. 
 
 Give a glass of wine to each, sr^rc^ 4^*. ^tfr 
 Give iced water. T^P (Trirl 
 
 Give me the curry made of 
 
 radish, turnip, carrot, and 
 
 shrimps. 
 Give that gentleman some rice 
 
 and mangoe fish. 
 Give me some pold-o. 
 Bring whatever sorts of fruit 
 
 you have. 
 Prepare (the) bed. 
 Shake the curtains well, that 
 
 no musquito may remain in.
 
 ON DINING, ETC. ID I 
 
 Extinguish all the lights ox- j^fci arfa <rtfnn 
 
 copt one. fsRT. 
 
 Give me my night-drawers. *rf?nn ^^rtir nterr^l of . 
 Awake me to-morrow at cock- ^Tfa *jfait<i ^FF| Tffwfa 
 
 ^s ^s * 
 
 crow. 
 
 Last night musquitocs entered *tfcr zrTTf?? srcg; snn %t*ito *it- 
 
 into the curtains, and there 
 
 were bugs in the bed, I 
 
 could not sleep well. 
 Sir, the month is over. 
 Please, order to give us our 
 
 salary. ^rr . 
 
 Call the Cashier.* *rrrfPtt^ 
 
 Give to these (men) their 
 
 respective dues. 
 Buy at once provisions for one 
 
 month, and keep in the 
 
 storehouse. 
 Give me a list of the things I 
 
 am to bring. 
 Eice, wood, salt, ghee (or cla- 
 
 rified butter), sugar, sugar- 
 
 candy, tea, coffee, pickles, 
 
 preserves, rare fruits, and 
 
 spices, chilly, pepper, cinna- 
 
 mon, turmeric, onion, garlic, 
 
 ginger, etc. ; and grain, hay, 
 
 and straw for the horses. 
 And tell the landlord, the bread- ^rt?Trf~5Trf?fl, 
 
 man, butter-man, milk-man 
 
 * A corruption of the Persian kha~d>ij /, a tixaburcr or cash-keeper.
 
 192 APPENDIX C. 
 
 and others to make bills of 
 their respective dues, and I 
 will sign them, (after which) 
 you may pay. 
 
 After paying these, and buying 
 the articles, give me an ac- 
 count of the money. 
 
 I want to adjust the account 
 every month. 
 
 DIALOGUE 5. 
 
 Time. 
 
 The morning star is up. 
 The night is over. 
 The cock crows. 
 It is light in the east. 
 It is dawn. 
 
 ]S"ow what o'clock is it ?* 
 !Xow it is morning at six. 
 The sun is about to rise. 
 "What, o'clock is it?f 
 About twelve o'clock. 
 The sun is over our head. 
 Look at the clock or watch. 
 It is nearly three. 
 It just struck three. 
 The (day) time is gone. 
 It is evening twilight. 
 The sun is set. 
 
 * Literally, " how much of the ni^ht IKI.S dawnul r !> ,ikwl in tlic mornin 
 t When askod during the day.
 
 THE RIVER AND THE HOAX. 103 
 
 The sun is sinking. 
 Xow it is twilight. 
 The moon rises. 
 (It is) full moon to-day. 
 The moonlight appears like the (WT,^1 f?r)S5? *T5 
 sunshine. 
 
 DIALOGUE 6. 
 
 The River and the Boat. 
 
 "Who is the boat-man ? 4 
 
 How many rooms are there in 4 <t&<iU4 
 
 this bafrd ? * 
 
 Three rooms and a water-closet, fs* 
 How much is the hire of the 
 
 boat? 
 
 Five rupees a day. fw*t 
 
 Let loose the boat when the c^rHTTjr ^rffVi^T c^l^l ^f%nl (or 
 
 flood-tide comes. 
 When will the flood-tide come 
 
 to-day ? 
 
 At nine o'clock. 
 How do you know ? 
 By this calculation, that in Cal- ^T? f\>iU 
 
 cutta, the flood-tide comes on Pf*r^t? f^ 
 
 the morning and evening of ^1ZT c&?f?rfiji 
 
 the tenth day of the moon. 
 Does the bore j* come to this 4 ?ftzr<r 
 
 side of the river ? 
 
 * Supposed to be a corruption of the English word barge. The Anglo-Indians call ii, 
 a htdge-row. 
 
 f The bore or boar is a sudden influx of the o^ean stream-tide into such slow and 
 narrow rivers as the Hoogly, when scanty of wat.T. It t.ikis puce at now and mil 
 moon; and seems absolutely to slide over the sluggish stream of the river. In sweeping 
 
 n
 
 194 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Now you are rowing, but after 
 
 the flood-tide is gone, how 
 
 will you propel it against 
 
 the current? 
 "We shall drag the boat by a <tT1 
 
 rope when it is ebb-tide. 
 If the wind be favourable, then 
 
 we shall go by sailing. 
 A high wind has got up. 
 It is likely to be a storm. 
 Take the boat in shore. 
 The waves are fearful. 
 Hold the helm stoutly. 
 Turn it to the right. 
 Rowers, pull the oars hard all. wtf%?1 
 Lo ! the ferry boat is sunk. 
 Take the boat in shore. 
 Anchor it at this ghat* 
 Or fix pins on the ground and 
 
 fasten the boat to them. 
 Behold, a boat capsized. 
 Now, she is on her beam ends. 
 
 DIALOGUE 7. 
 Tf^tt^ The Garden. Tank-fishing.^ 
 
 I shall go to sec the garden. "^Tlf^ Tftft-r 
 
 round Fort William its noise is distinctly heard nearly all over Calcutta. The only 
 safety for the numerous small boats in such cases, is to rush to the middle of the river 
 and face the bore, which is over in a few seconds. The etymology of the word is, I need 
 not say, exceedingly doubtful. 
 
 * A landing-place, or flight of steps leading from the river. 
 
 t In Bengal a good garden is always furnished with a tank or artificial pond abound- 
 ing in fish.
 
 THE GARDEN. TANK-FISHIXG. 
 
 By what conveyance will you f% c^rf?Tf?nr3 
 
 go (Sir)? 
 Elephant, horse, tanjan, palan- ^Tf^ , ^rtn , ^5t??Tw, *rfaf% , <rf*t , 
 
 quin, buggy, chariot, etc. ^ art sfsfs 
 
 are ready. 
 
 I shall go on foot. ^rrftr, 
 
 Gardener, put gravel on this sflfsr, <sfc *Rr 
 
 path. 
 Make flower beds on both ^$J4 ^ 
 
 sides of this (path). 
 
 Plant rose, and some good 4Tft^ c*tT5Tt?' ^^ ^TT^ a?f*r 
 
 country flowers in this 
 
 place. 
 Prepare this ground, and sow 
 
 the seeds of radish, turnip, *ffw<r, *f*f, sr^?, :y rt^, 
 
 carrot, cabbage, peas, greens ^rt?^ ^<K-ini<l ftF ~$*t . 
 
 and other vegetables. 
 Who told you to plant plan- ^?rtt^ f5t*Tft^ 
 
 tain there ? ?f^TcT ? 
 
 Could you not plant potato ^ri7^r r<<ritH 
 
 there ? TT? ^ ? 
 
 Are these seedlings or grafted 4 TT^T ?tT^ Ff?t 
 
 trees ? 
 What sort of fruits are in this 
 
 garden ? 
 Mango, jack, cocoantit, betel- 
 
 nut, date, palm, tamarind, 
 
 custard apple, almond, le- 
 
 chees, peach, grapes, pome- 
 
 granate, guava, plantain, cu- 
 
 cumber, pineapple, water- 
 
 melon, etc.
 
 196 APPENDIX C. 
 
 What kind of mango is of this 4 
 
 tree ? 
 
 Very superior. 
 Give me a nosegay every day. c?tf 
 
 What kind of water is of this 4 <z(75f?<tt? 
 
 tank? 
 Yery fine ; all the people of 
 
 this neighbourhood drink 
 
 this water. 
 
 Are there any fish in this tank? 
 There are, but small. 
 To-morrow I will come and 
 
 fish. 
 Keep the rod, hook, line, and f^*T, Tsf*r, 
 
 bait ready. ?tf<^ . 
 
 Throw out the ground bail dt 4 srft^ ^t? 
 
 this gltat. 
 
 Why don't the fish bite ? srfr^ *THr ^ 
 Your float is moving. 
 Lo, it sunk. 
 Don't give a jerk. 
 The fish will break the line 
 
 and run away. 
 Play your fish and land it. 
 The fish bite no more. 
 The rod(and line) won't answer 
 
 Get fishermen and cast the net. "SFTfwi "Fff%<n "STtsT 
 There are lots in now. JreT<r 6rUgi ^i <: 
 
 I can feel them tug and try to 
 
 bolt. 
 Haul in steadil.
 
 THE GENTLEMAN AND THE ARCHITECT. 197 
 
 DIALOGUE 8. 
 
 The Gentleman and the Architect. 
 
 Sir, the bricklayer is come. nk$4, ?1~5f 
 
 Tell him to come to me. 
 
 Sir, I heard you are going to 
 
 build a house. 
 What kind of house will that 
 
 be ? how large, and how 
 
 many storied ? 
 Two storied, a hall in the (ifl~5T*rl, "srcy ^ PTl^TT^ (or 
 
 middle, two rooms on each flT 1 ^ "5^"^. ^f?r (or 
 
 side, a pillared veranda on 
 
 the south, a portico on the 
 
 north ; its staircase will be 
 
 of wood, its floor with flues fw| 
 
 underneath, and there will 
 
 be a turret room on the top 
 
 of the house. 
 There will be wall around the <tf)<i c 
 
 house, a gate on the north, ^-sirtsn (or C*fT?), 
 
 a wicket entrance on the 
 
 west side. 
 On the north east, there will 
 
 be a stable, a place to keep 
 
 elephants, a coach-house, an 
 
 aviary, a cow-house, a goats' 
 
 place, a kitchen, a lumber 
 
 room, a storehouse, and scr- *r<r r 
 
 rants' out offices. 
 Mind there be a good water- 
 
 closct in the most suitable TR1 r 
 
 place.
 
 198 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Bring bricks, lime, and surJci 
 
 or brick dust. 
 
 What shall we do about wood? 
 Timber is already purchased, 
 I shall employ carpenters at Tt^ftTS |^5T? faffs; ?tf*T?Tl 
 
 home, and have beams, (or^rl^l),?l[^,C^3^,<3 
 
 rafters, door-frames, win- T^rf^5Trt ^ *t<rtfwl 
 
 dows, door-panels, Venetians <Hl^< 
 
 and window-bars prepared. 
 And iron bars, hinges, screws, c=Tt^T? *t?tfwl, <H s *l, 
 
 bolts, nails, lock and key fttr, 
 
 I shall get from the market. ^T 
 At present get some bamboos, >r*^ff^ <rr*T, 
 
 strings, and send for some 
 
 thatchers. 
 Eun up two thatched sheds. 
 
 And have their roofs thatched st^T? Ff=r r^5, f%TI 
 
 with straw, long leaves or ^W rtT?t=T fwl 
 
 small tiles. . 
 
 Place the foundation cord on 
 
 a lucky day. 
 
 And lay the foundation stone. 
 Begin to dig the foundation. 
 What will be the thickness of 
 
 the foundation wall, and 
 
 that of the house wall ? 
 IIow deep will the foundation 
 
 be? 
 Will the roof be made of tiles ^1~5 T^fe ^(r& ^T^TTI *Us> d< 
 
 or bricks ? (TT*ft ^C^ ? 
 
 The roof and the cornice will ^ts ^ f^r?^^r (or 
 
 be of tiles.
 
 INDIGO CULTIVATION, ETC. 199 
 
 Plaster the outer wall with sand *rr?? Ttf?r? TTf%? 
 
 rub, and the inner with lime. r>i<:<l J^^TV ^ . 
 The staircase floor is to be of f^fV? *!<:<i<i (srrBF <TT5E?<r 
 
 stone. 
 The steps will be about twelve rf*f ^rP*rrw TT? ^fp ^ 
 
 inches high. 
 Iron rail must be put on the <tt<it-*ly c*if$.t4 ($% fifrs $$ (.4. 
 
 veranda. 
 In Calcutta, it is necessary to <*fa$l>il*l (trtiltei^ tT!r 
 
 plaster walls, otherwise 
 
 damp-rot gets in. 
 It is necessary to repair every fjw Fit? ^<f*r<r t sT<r (<H*J"5 
 
 third or fourth year. 
 
 Sand rubbing and white- Ttfsr 
 
 washing arc finished. 
 Now painting remains. <W 
 
 "What paint, and how much of f% <r ^5 nf^ 
 
 it do you want ? 
 One maund of verdigris(green), ?r3~5F ? 4^ * 
 
 half a maund of lead (white SR, 3F^r| *ffr*T (*1T, 
 
 and blue), yellow 25 seers, C^=T <$$ ' 
 
 // */ 
 
 Europe oil one maund, 
 country ditto ditto . 
 
 DIALOGUE 9. 
 
 Indigo Cultivation^ etc. 
 
 How does the indigo grow in ^ ^ 
 
 these lands ? 
 The indigo is most prolific on ^wt? ^THT CWt^s n 
 
 the shoals and banks of ^r. 
 
 rivers.
 
 200 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Ft*T 
 
 If the other lands be well cnl- 
 tivated they will in like 
 manner produce indigo. 
 
 Go and ask the Zaminddr.* 
 
 If he gives me a lease of this 
 Malial^ I will make a fac- 
 tory here. 
 
 The ZamTndar cannot give you 
 a lease in perpetuity, but can 
 grant one fora certain period. 
 
 Does water remain in this 
 water course throughout the 
 year ? 
 
 Lay the foundation of a factory 
 on the bank of this inlet. 
 
 On the first start make four 
 pairs of vats, a boiler, a 
 press godoAvn and a drying 
 godown. 
 
 Build a bungalow for me to 
 liye in, a house for the 
 dmkls^ and a long straAV 
 hut for the coolies. 
 
 * The word Zam~n-dnr literally signifies "land-holder;" hut it would bo incorrect to 
 consider him on the same footing as our "landed proprietor." Till of late the Zamliidar 
 was merely a collector of the revenue, and was liable to be removed at the pleasure or 
 caprice of the government, especially under the Muhammadans. Under the British 
 government the ZmtJndilr is generally recognised as the actual proprietor of his district 
 as long as he regularly pays the fixed revenue, which consists of nine -tenths of the net 
 proceeds of his lands. 
 
 t Mahal is a smaller portion of the Zemindar's district, which he is privileged to sublet 
 for a fixed period. 
 
 J A corruption of an Arabic word denoting agent or superintendent. 
 
 The word coolie denotes a common drudge or labourer in its most extensive signifi- 
 cation. The term is now become familiar" to the English reader. 
 
 JtCcr<[ *Ttt? 
 
 Fff? 
 sr<r, 
 
 ? Tff^Rt?
 
 INDIGO CULTIVATION, ETC. 201 
 
 Purchase indigo seed in pro- *wt? *U*Kt6* TO 
 portion to the quantity of ff?if ^ . 
 land. 
 
 The present season is the most F? &$\M *ffa ir*Mt<l 
 fit for sowing seeds on char 
 lands, because, these have snft ^ 
 improved by the inundation, 
 and are still moist. 
 
 The highlands will not be fit ^tt?? st*ft (RtTTl? C5?t? (or 
 
 to be sown without they are ^ fw Ffa) sfl 
 
 tilled twice or thrice. 
 It is difficult to produce indigo 
 
 entirely by home cultivation 
 Call the Eyots* and give them <rJv?T3 ^ 
 
 advances. 
 "What is the rate of indigo ^Tt^t? ^tcT? i^ f% ? 
 
 plant upon which advances 
 
 are given to ryots ? 
 Twenty bundles per rupee. T>t^1ir 
 What is the rate of advance ? iffac*? f^f?t 
 Two rupees per lighd.^ 
 Then give advance for four ^<r^ Fff? *T5 fert? Pftfift 5 '' Or ^ . 
 
 hundred lighds. 
 Ascertain the ability of the *T^rf? ^t=T ^ ^T c*ff<F 
 
 ryots and the number of 3?f?Tfl 
 
 ploughs they possess, before 
 
 you advance to them. 
 I shall go to inspect the lands, 
 
 * The term ryo^ (properly ranjat] in Arabic denotes "the people or subjects" col- 
 lectively ; but in India it is applied simply to the peasants or cultivators of the soil. 
 
 f The blyhn is a measure of land varying widely in extent throughout the different 
 provinces of India. On an average it is not far from being equivalent to half an 
 English acre.
 
 202 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 The indigo plants are not bad, 
 
 but the lands are over- 
 
 grown with grass. 
 Weed (the plants). 
 Begin cutting the plants on FJ 
 
 the char lands. 
 
 Fix the pump andraise the waters 
 Steep the plant for only ten ff*f 
 
 hours, otherwise the colour 
 
 will be bad. 
 Put clean water and wash pro- *ff?p?rf3 
 
 perly. 
 Boil properly and take to the 
 
 press house. 
 
 Cut the cakes and dry them. 
 Weigh and see what quantity 
 
 is produced by each frame. 
 Now pack up the indigo and 
 
 dispatch it to Calcutta. 
 I have a desire to build a 
 
 sugar factory. 
 How is sugar-cane cultivated 
 
 here? 
 Sugar-cane grows, but not 
 
 sufficient for the purposes 
 
 of a factory. 
 If you cultivate, it might *rfrr 
 
 answer. 
 
 Is datc-/jroor obtainable here ? 
 It is obtainable ; the date trees *rfTT 
 
 are not plentiful here, but 
 
 Ilir //oor is brought from the 
 
 cast quarter. 
 
 ftrs 
 
 "*$ 
 
 fwl 
 
 <j?P<tyl c? t 
 
 t-fci'H 
 
 ftf^r? 
 
 5irT?
 
 THE MERCHANT AND HIS IJAXlAN. 
 
 203 
 
 DIALOGUE 10. 
 
 The Merchant and his Banian* 
 
 My compliments to yon, Sir ! 
 The same to you, Sir. Where 
 
 do you live, and what is 
 
 your name ? 
 My house is at Calcutta, and 
 
 my name is - 
 What are you come for ? 
 I heard that you have come 
 
 to this country to trade. 
 I am come to you with the hope 
 
 of carrying on youi-business. 
 What business do you do ? 
 That of Banian to merchants. 
 How much commission do tlie 
 
 Banians receive in buying 
 
 and selling ? 
 Two pice per rupee. 
 Well, I have got various sorts 
 
 of metals, clothes, and other 
 
 articles in my ship ; you 
 
 shall have them to sell and 
 
 piu-chasc country goods for 
 
 me. 
 Whatmetalshaveyoubrotight, 
 
 Sir? 
 
 (>Htj . 
 
 c*tn, 
 
 or 
 <tf<!<:4 - 
 
 Tffraj 
 
 fa 
 citc*<i 
 
 t>fy 
 
 <? 
 
 <jtj 
 
 * The word banian (properly baniyii) denotes a " Hindu trader," or " money cb.in^ii'." 
 In Bengal the term is generally applied to the native cashier or man of bu>ine<> mij>K>\i d 
 in European mercantile houses. He acts as agent between the firm and the native 
 dealers or manufacturers ; and not unfrequently he has a small share in his employers' 
 concern.
 
 204 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Gold, silver, brass, bellmetal, crW, Wl, f*^T, fT*fl, 
 
 tin, copper, zinc, iron, steel, 
 
 quicksilver, lead, and load- 
 
 stone. 
 Well, Sir, sell them off at this 
 
 opportunity. 
 The price of these things is 
 
 now high. 
 What goods of this country 
 
 will you buy, Sir ? 
 What sorts of grain are to be 
 
 had in this country ? 
 Paddy, (husked) rice, barley, *rfa, Ff^cT, TR, MT, f%T, 
 
 wheat, sesamum, mustard, (or 
 
 etc., all are obtainable. irtir 
 
 At present buy rice and wheat, 
 
 the current rate of rice JWW Ft^rJT? if? 
 
 is low, but that of wheat is fan 
 
 high. 
 Purchase silk, silk-handker- 
 
 chiefs, shell lac, opium, and 
 
 saltpetre, if you can get *lf?w 
 
 them at a cheap rate. 
 A silk broker has brought a <& SR 
 
 sample. 
 
 Show it to the appraiser. 
 What price does he say for this? ^t? fe if? 
 He Avants a very high price, c^r ^srfs F^sl if? 
 
 in addition to his brokerage. W? irt^Tf^t Ffir . 
 Is it better to buy cotton and 
 
 sugar here, or to get them 
 
 from the western provinces ?
 
 THE MKllCIIAXT AND HIS BAXIAX. 20-J 
 
 It will be better if you can 
 
 get them imported from O sTTWpft <r-f<J<:A 
 
 Gazipur, or Mirzapur. 
 But they refine well at Dhoba ; 
 
 Rhadhnnagar is very stringy. ?Tf*rR*fr<r<r 
 Many merchants send their 
 
 agents up, and they pur- 
 
 chase at a cheaper rate. 
 Are any inland duties paid on c*r TT^T crrrt 
 
 country goods imported here ? \5lr~f? f% t?r*J<:'D<) u 
 No, but duties are levied upon r|, 
 
 them when exported to 
 
 Europe. 
 K"ow that steamers have been 
 
 introduced, it has become 
 
 very easy to come and go. 
 Can these steam-boats work 
 
 in the ocean ? 
 These can go through any sea. <$ 
 
 Do you think Bengal will ever 05T*rf<r 
 
 grow coffee equal to that of 
 
 Mecca or Ceylou ? 
 There are plantations at Chit- 
 
 tagong and Shantipur. 
 
 DIALOGUE 11. 
 
 fc1^4 ] ^6 c^^rt The Doctor and his Patient. 
 "Wliat sickness have you ? ffTsrf? fa 
 
 * Literally, " fire-boat." 
 
 t The terra D~iktnr or DaJdar Sthib is applied only to European medical practitioners ; 
 the native JEsculapius is called Baidya, whose routine of practice is, to say the least of 
 it, rather questionable.
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 20G 
 
 Yesterdayafter dinner twitches *Tfa '^rf^Tz?? *fi?[ 
 
 came over me, my face and 
 
 eyes got flushed, and I felt stf^sra, * *frs* ^fes TT- 
 
 chilly. 
 After a short time a shiver- 
 
 ing fit of fever came on, 
 
 and it still has got hold of 
 
 me. 
 
 Did you vomit ? 
 I vomited twice. 
 But I had no motion. 
 Let me see your tongue. 
 Let me feel your pulse. 
 I have a very bad head-ache, 
 
 and stomach-ache. 
 You must be bled first, or 
 
 apply leeches on your head, 
 
 and take physic. 
 AYhat shall I eat to-day ? 
 Sago and sugar-candy, if you 
 
 feel hungry. 
 How are you to-day ? 
 I am better than yesterday ; 
 
 I have not the stomach- 
 
 ache, the head-ache is al- 
 
 most gone, and niy Climbs 
 
 are not very hot. 
 But I have still a burning and fr w^ (or *nr?r? 
 
 thirst. 
 Take this medicine one and 
 
 half an hour before the 
 
 fever comes.
 
 T1IK DOCTOR AND HIS PATIENT. 
 
 Send this chit (prescription) <s(%~ frrfr M 
 
 to the dispensary, they will w^*, ja& (4li?i 
 
 give you a bottle of liquid ^tn 4*^ c i>1 fry? Tftf 
 
 medicine, take half a c/w (a/;* [fo c< . 
 
 of that after every hour. 
 What regimen do you direct 
 
 me to take to-day ? 
 This medicine will cure your 
 
 disease. 
 How long has he (or she) 
 
 been ill ? 
 Since yesterday. 
 lias he had any spasms ? 
 Has he been purged ? 
 He has been purged six times, ^ir Tt? 99 
 Put a mustard poultice upon 9 ^j<i 
 
 his stomach. ^t^^ (or 
 
 Give him as much cold water 
 
 to drink as he wishes for. 
 Give him this draught, and 
 
 repeat it if it is thrown off (*tT? n srir^ (or 
 
 the stomach. csi < Jt s rgT 
 
 When did these eruptions ap- >n 'jftfs T3F5T 
 
 pear ? (or 
 
 Yesterday afternoon. ^rff^r ^ ^T?T?? *t?(orc<kd). 
 
 Do you feel nausea ? rsT^tjr ^tl 
 
 Whore do you feel pain ? 
 
 Point out the place. 
 
 Does this pressure hurt you ? 
 
 I feel a great pain. ~z~s ?7n 
 
 * J'idt Appendix C on Weights and Mea-'uros.
 
 208 APPENDIX C. 
 
 If he gets worse, come and 
 
 tell me. 
 
 Can you sleep at night ? 
 I cannot sleep well. 
 Does he rave ? 
 Yes, he talks a great deal of fl, 
 
 nonsense. 
 
 Get his head shaved. 
 Put a blister on his head, be- 
 
 hind his ear, upon his chest, 
 
 between his shoulders, at 
 
 the back of his neck, or 
 
 over his belly. 
 Eub this well into the skin nrtf^ (3T^1 (or 
 
 where the pain(or disease) is. 
 Let two drops of this liquid be f}% ^Tf^s ^^ 1 4 <:<?<! 
 
 put into the eye every night. C^T^I t^di frr . 
 Take one large spoonful three 
 
 times a day. 
 Take one spoonful every third 
 
 hour. 
 
 Have you a cough ? C3t*rT? 
 
 Have you much expect oration? <FT3T f 
 Take one pill every second 
 
 hour. 
 Take the pills to-night, and wtfw ?rrfar^5 ^ ?f% (or 
 
 the di-aught to - morrow 
 
 morning. ^^f< (or 
 
 Are your bowels regular ? 
 
 Has the medicine acted on the 03 ^^fes f% 
 bowels ?
 
 THE GENTLEMAN AND HIS PANDIT. 209 
 
 DIALOGUE 12. 
 
 f*P3FT<f Hunting. 
 
 Is there game in the wood fcrcn^ j^- ^r fW? 
 
 near this ? 
 No tigers ; but there arc wild 
 
 hogs. 
 Well, take my hunting ele- ^!x*1 ^srfrt? f*irrft r 
 
 phants and hunting dogs. f*l<-l'<ft f- <s 
 Guns, pistols, etc. bring with T^ f*rg*r 
 
 you. 
 
 Powder, ball, and shot. 
 Tell the (native) huntsmen to 
 
 take their bows, arrows, 
 
 javelins, etc. 
 Let go the dogs in the wood 
 
 to stir up the game, and 
 
 you fire from all sides. 
 The game will be up and alive 
 
 and come out. 
 There goes a deer. 
 Fire sharp. 
 
 DIALOGUE 13. 
 
 Gentleman and his Pandil.* 
 
 Sir, there is a Pandit come. 
 
 Let him in. ^"nrrs <TT . 
 
 My compliments to you, Sir. 
 
 * The term Pandit is applied to a Icanud Hindu who knows more or le "f S:in>krit. 
 He is a Brihman of course, and geiui-ally occupies hiiii- m tcacliing uruijcar:a 
 Sanskrit, and its derivative vernaculars. 
 
 Jl
 
 210 APPENDIX C. 
 
 The same to you, Sir. 
 
 Your name ? 
 
 Ishwar Chandra Sharma. (Hi 
 
 And what peculiar honorary ^rt? ^Tffk f% <ft^l 
 
 degree have you acquired ? 
 Folks are good enough to call 
 
 me Bidyabdgish.* 
 What are you come for ? ^Wfr f% 
 
 I heard you are going to study <sf~s ^-crfa ^rf^tf^ 4 
 
 the language of this country. 
 Yes ; but what ought I to begin 
 
 first Sanskrit or Bengali? ^f? 7T^5 fa 
 If you wish only to communi- 
 cate with the Xatives, then 
 
 learn Bengali. 
 But if you wish to go deep into fa *rffr TWsrt? 
 
 Bengali, or enter into the 
 
 sciences of the Hindus, then 
 
 you must learn Sanskrit. 
 Let me first master the Ben- 
 gall, so as to read, write, f!r*R 
 
 and speak, and then I will *ft<R? ^"^ ^T "^3 ^ j l>r 
 
 study Sanskrit. ^f?R . 
 
 But Sanskrit is very difficult, fa TT 15 "^^ ^s ^fc* . 
 Sir, there is no language so sTfE^, &[SF$ $$; ^t5l ~^T? 
 
 difficult, and at the same 
 
 time no language so good. 
 Arc there many good books of 
 
 Sanskrit literature ?
 
 HINDI' SUPERSTITIONS. 
 
 Arc the Sanskrit Looks poetry Tf 
 
 or prose ? 
 They are both prose and poetry, st'57 
 
 but tlie greater part in poetry. 
 Pandit ! how can 1 acquire the *rf 
 
 family and household con- 
 
 versation of the Bengali ? 
 
 "We mostly contract the words 
 
 in familiar con versation, and ^t^r ^r) f\ rj 7^^ <-f<iii1 ^f^. 
 
 intermediately introduce ^ ^ifJ^ ^^T? ??yi s c?-R 
 
 proverbs and slang. If you ^D ^^t^f ^f<r irnt 
 
 wish to speak our daily ^ri^rT^tt 
 
 household dialect, and uu- frf<nr5 
 
 derstand the uneducated 
 
 natives when speaking to 
 
 one another, you must learn 
 
 those contractions, that is, 
 
 our proverbs and patois, 
 
 and practice conversation 
 
 familiarly with us. 
 
 DIALOGUE 14. 
 
 Ilimlu Superstitions. 
 
 Wliat is the rule about the *$rs 
 
 lucky and unlucky times ? ^^ f<? ^r^T':? ^rr 
 
 and how is the calculation ^ ? 
 
 made ? 
 
 The astrologers make calcu- ^i^<?1 %? =^ra? ^ff 
 
 lations by the motions of -T^ 
 
 the planets and stars.
 
 212 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Some people, however, without 
 
 being astrologers, have ac- 
 
 quired a knowledge of lucky 
 
 and unlucky times. 
 The good Hindus do not enter 
 
 upon any matter of weight ^lr^ <3?*zf '^srTTS" ^t? sr|, 
 
 on unlucky days, i.e. mar- irri 
 
 riage, taking the thread, 
 
 first eating of rice, visiting 
 
 a great man, beginning a 
 
 new work, and the like. 
 
 But what days have you fixed w% ^ ^ f <*((.$ F?s& fwr 
 
 for dying and being born ? 
 God and the Erahnians have 
 
 not made an exception on 
 
 those particulars. 
 A certain portion of each day fPs f^sr Tliic<ci1 
 
 is Idrbeld or unlucky time, 
 
 in which actions of import- 
 
 ance are prohibited. 
 Two days of a week are un- 
 
 lucky to go to each of the fff^-'*rcT 
 
 four sides. Those days are 
 
 called diJc-shul) i.e. unlucky 
 
 for a certain side. They are 
 
 as follows : 
 On Sunday and Friday go not ?fr ^3p ?tc? 
 
 to the west. zy. 
 
 On Saturday and Monday to 
 
 go to the east is unlucky. 
 On Tuesday and Wednesday 
 
 go not to the north.
 
 HINDU SUPERSTITIONS. 21 
 
 On Wednesday and Thursday irftFM fcfan T*f ^r^rfs Ttr<r . 
 
 the south is unlucky. 
 Certain lunar and planetary r^T 5 * fjfa 
 
 days are also unlucky. 
 The months of Bhadra, Faush, 
 
 and Chaitra arc impure, and 
 
 those of Baishakh, Kartik, 
 
 and Magh arc considered 
 
 holy, and the full moon of 
 
 those months is specially 
 
 holy. The last day of every 
 
 month also is comparatiA'ely 
 
 more holy (than the rest). 
 "No marriage or other optional gb^s^ rs' ? 
 
 " 
 
 ceremony takes place in the *r| ^ ^T^J <fT^J 
 months of Bhadra, Paush, 
 and Chaitra, which are con- 
 
 sidered impure for those 3-z? *H, ^rrn *rfiRt<r<r 
 purposes ; for instance, one 
 would not change his resi- T), 
 dence, or keep any member 
 of his family at another's 
 house. 
 
 The first and last days of every srfcsr? ^fsftr fww ^s -5TiF{1% 
 month, the day of the new ^wR-yrl 5|f3T3 
 moon, and the first day of W* 
 the moon's increase or wane <2fT?r 
 are unlucky for ^oin2j to a 
 
 / 
 
 place, or visiting a great man. 
 
 The time of eclipse is impure, 
 
 but best for ffivinsj alms, 
 
 o o / 
 
 making worship, etc.
 
 214 APPENDIX C. 
 
 As certain days of a month mr c^t* fr^^r sflir*T? 
 
 and certain portions of a fw*T 
 
 day are unlucky, so are ccr- 
 
 tain times and moments 
 
 lucky for certain purposes. 
 Docs what is said to be lucky, 
 
 always turn out so ? 
 
 Why do the people still believe 
 
 in (these) calculations ? 
 They do not think that there 
 
 is no truth in the calcula- 
 
 tion ; but that the calcula- 
 
 tions had some mistake in 
 
 them. So the superstition 
 
 is perpetuated. 
 Apropos ! I forgot to ask you, ^CTt 
 
 why do the Hindu women 
 
 practice tattooing ? 
 Sir. it is said, that by receiving 
 
 tattooing they can avoid the 
 
 torment of the God of death. 
 
 Tliat is to say they endure 
 
 beforeliand this torment in 
 
 lieu of the torment of hell. 
 (3 n what part of the body do 
 
 they receive the tattooing ? 
 Between the two eyebrows, 
 
 above the nose, and often ^T^CT? srfs? 
 
 on the chin, on each side Hlr*T, T^ ; <? 5"HT5 f 
 
 of the nose, on the chest 
 
 and on the hands.
 
 ON DACOITKE. 
 
 But now this wrong idea has feign ^ffa<i TT? *rTfa 5^ 
 nearly become obsolete. In "&3 c?UC<T-j WC? <stT$ 
 respectable and good fami- rrfrl ^T?t 4 fur^? TT?1 
 lies, the young women, for vf*frt<rfJT*fre 
 the most part, do not dis- 
 figure themselves by these 
 marks. 
 
 DIALOG ri-: is. 
 
 On Dacoitcc* 
 
 Last month, there was a great *f\5 
 dacoitee in my neighbour's 
 house. 
 
 How ? 
 
 First, a person cut through the 
 
 wall and entered the house. 
 That same thief then opened t? c**i>~ CF^? fsfwt? 
 
 the back-door to the others. 
 And thus all the gang robbers 
 
 got inside the premises, and 
 
 lighting their torches, raised 
 
 their shouts. 
 They took much cash. 
 The village Chauknlar t and 
 
 others encountered them. 
 Then there was a tight, and 
 
 lives lost, on both sides. 
 Some dacoits being wounded, 
 
 have been seized. <5 Tf^sl 
 
 * The words ffncoif and dacnitce (properly d'J.'-it] have ni>w. like /--.'/.'iV. >-;/f.'. a:. 1 
 many others, taken their place in the Knu-li.-h laii^mfre. \ <!<tc>;>'t denotes ";i rubber" 
 as one of a i, r aii!j ; dacoitte, " gan-robhery," ^ p.. i-.illy accompanied by violence. 
 
 t C/cauk7d<~>/- denotes li a \vatchman in general," hence, "a policeman or tcutlnd."
 
 216 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 Did not the dacoits seized men- 
 
 tion the names of the other 
 
 dacoits who ran away ? 
 One or two of them did, but 
 
 after a great deal of torture. 
 A palcJca* dacoit never men- 
 
 tions the name of his brother 
 
 dacoit even at the hazard of 
 
 his own life. 
 But there is no clue where the fag 
 
 others have gone. 
 lias the stolen property been 
 
 found? 
 There has been a trace of some 
 
 of the property through in- 
 
 formers. 
 Did the person robbed men- 
 
 tion any property which 
 
 has been stolen ? 
 K"o, he did not. 
 A respectable native never 
 
 does so, for fear of being 
 
 afterwards obliged to iden- 
 
 tify and take back the pro- 
 
 perty 
 
 r| ? 
 
 n . 
 
 The Ddroffd^ beat some of the trlz?T*t1 
 
 dacoits very severely, but ^S^ <2T^T<r 
 
 could get no confession from 
 them. 
 
 3F<rft~F5 
 
 * The word pakka literally means "ripe" or "mature;" hence, in a figurative sense, 
 " sharp" or "experienced." 
 
 t The general meaning of I)~irfiy~t is "overseer" or "headman." In Bengal the term 
 is generally applied to the supcriuteudant of a police, custom, or excise station.
 
 ON DACOITKE. 217 
 
 "What lias become of that case ? c^ *K-*U<1 f% 
 
 The witnesses to the Diet and t>f*r->i jJd*fi<i fo 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 to the circumstances of the 
 case have given their evi- 
 donee well (i.e. against the 
 dacoits). 
 
 The witnesses to their good ^IdM >if*r<id4<i 
 
 character or defence were (or (St<U4) *rt*pt ^R ^ yt- 
 
 summoned. 
 The dacoits have given their 
 
 evidence upon it, but there- 
 
 by they are not cleared. 
 The Darogii, in his final report, ?tT<rt^t1 
 
 has given his opinion that 
 
 their murdering and com- **f 
 
 mitting the dacoitee is fully 
 
 proved. 
 And the Magistrate too, in his 
 
 proceeding of committal, has c^ttTff W^tjrtrs ^ srs <rlir 
 
 given the same opinion, and fsfft?1 
 
 made over the prisoners for 
 
 trial (to the Sessions). 
 I think two of them will be 
 
 hanged or imprisoned for life, 
 
 and the others will have long 
 
 periods for imprisonment. 
 AYill this case go to the Sadar 
 
 * The term MTijistrct Sahib applies only to the Hon. Company's Civilians, appointed 
 as Judges and Magistrates over certain districts. 
 
 t The Sadar Nizamat 'AdCilat is the Supreme Criminal Court of Bengal
 
 218 APPENDIX C. 
 
 I think it will. 
 
 For, if the Judge deems the 
 capital punishment neces- 
 sary, he will report to the 
 Sadar Nizamat ; or if the 
 Fativd* of the Muhamma- 
 dan Law Officer is not con- 
 curred in by the Judge, a 
 reference to the Sadar Xi- 
 zjimat will be required. 
 
 In that case, two have been or JR-Mld^ ^v 5 ^ 
 sentenced to imprisoment 
 for life in transportation be- 
 yond the sea ; four to four- 
 teen years ; three have been 
 released on recognizances 
 for 200 rupees, and five on 
 giving bail for good conduct 
 for two years. 
 
 DIALOGUE 16. 
 
 Litigation.^ 
 
 He has brought a suit against fsfr "^ 
 me in the Jlunsif's Court. 
 
 * Ft/tic r ', "a decree" or "sentence" in Mubammadan law. 
 
 t This dialogue is a fair specimen of what we described in 124 r. as the practical 
 style. It alxni'.ids in words and phrases adapted fruin the Arabic, Persian, IIind"istiiiiT, 
 and Eiigli.-li, all more or less mudiiied or c-rnipted. Such terms may, by the squeamish, 
 he called /////w/-e ; but, in fact, they arc all absolutely necessary, as no pure Sanskrit or 
 L\ ngfdT terms could convey the precise meaning intended. 
 
 ~i Tlu; Jlun.iif is a native civil judge under the British Government. His jurisdiction 
 i- limited, in Bengal, to small suits not exceeding the value of 300 rupees, or 30 of our
 
 LITIGATION. 211) 
 
 On what account, and what 
 dnos ho lay the suit at ? 
 
 For one hundred and twenty- 
 live rupees, principal and 
 interest as due on a bond 
 debt. 
 
 What has become of it ? 
 
 A summons was served on me 
 to appear at the court per- 
 sonally or through my 
 pleader, and tender my an- 
 swer to the plaint, within 
 fifteen days. 
 
 But thereupon I did not ap- 
 pear. 
 
 The plaintiff then deposited the 
 peon's wages, upon which a 
 notification was issued to this 
 effect, that if I would not ap- 
 pear in the court personally 
 or through a pleader, and 
 file my answer to the plaint, 
 the cause will be judged 
 ex-parte. 
 
 Upon this, I filed a power of 
 attorney, and appointed a 
 pleader, through whom my 
 answer was put in. 
 
 The plaintiff then filed a re- 
 plication. 
 
 To which my pleader tendered 
 a rejoinder.
 
 220 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 <-fa'<:--i> 
 
 The plaintiff had greatly over- 
 
 valued the suit. 
 This, as well as many other \5ts1, & 
 
 defects of the plaint were offa 
 
 shewn in the answer. 
 Upon which the plaintiff filed 
 
 an amended plaint. 
 And we put in a supplementary 
 
 answer to the same. 
 After which the Judicial Ofn- 
 
 cer drew up a proceeding. 
 And in that, having fixed the 
 
 points for adjudication, he 
 
 ordered the parties to ad- 
 
 duce theii 1 documentary and 
 
 oral proofs. 
 We accordingly filed, on our 
 
 respective parts, the docu- 
 
 ments and the lists of 
 
 names of witnesses. 
 Subpoenas were accordingly 
 
 issued in the name of, or to 
 
 the witnesses. 
 Then on the day appointed, 
 
 almost all the witnesses ten- 
 
 dcred their appearance be- 
 
 fore the Court. 
 The witnesses of the opposite 
 
 party having been duly 
 
 sworn, bore testimony in 
 
 his favour ; and my wit- 
 
 nesses in mine. 
 
 tflTt? 
 
 JflfleT 
 
 fa ifc'l fa 4 <t-fayl 
 
 J?Tf<tf 
 
 wtft 
 
 fay ft 
 
 5ft? 
 
 *ftfwi ftfs ^rs ^T 
 
 (or 
 
 $ "*rtf^?rt <?
 
 LITIGATION*. 2-!l 
 
 Have you been able to learn f^FlT^eT?* ?t"T 
 
 tlio opinion of the Judge ? 
 No, the Judicial functionary is 5*1, 
 
 neitlicr favourable nor mi- SR, <rgnpsT-<2 SR. 
 
 favourable to any party. 
 A judge should be equally well ^H^U^ >l<Ksl<l ff3 
 
 disposed to all parties, and 
 
 always of the same disposi- 
 
 tion and of a certain temper. 
 I shall not easily give up my <3*t*t^ ^ ^^TST ^TfiR =n. 
 
 right. 
 If the case be decreed against "rfrf ^fvit<l ^1? f^rft ?ir, itt 
 
 me, I shall appeal against f*rt" ipyviiTTT?^"^^^^ s?'gf- 
 
 it to the Judge. 
 And should I be defeated in 
 
 appeal, I will prefer a special c*ZT5 *ft"*T 
 
 appeal to the Sadar Court."\ 
 
 If a special appeal be dis- ^ rr 
 
 missed, then there can lie ^t^T? 5*1 <ftwtT3 
 
 an appeal from it to the <? ftcT ^^c Tt? f^? -r) 
 
 Queen in Council ? 
 
 No, an appeal can be lodged *ri, fwT5 T 5Tt' ! Tt=T C^ 
 
 in the Privy Council only wltrsi ^rf^fttcT? -fl 
 
 from the decision passed on ^"^5 <Tfr? . 
 
 a regular appeal. 
 
 What are the preliminary steps fwte ^rt*ft=T <?f<c^ 59 ci 
 
 to be taken in preferring an fft?~ f% f% ?F?1 
 
 appeal to England ? 
 
 * The Bichar-karta or Hakim is the native supremo authority in a district next to 
 that of the European Judge and Magistrate. The latter i= always styled the J>:j S<~/<i0, 
 as a distinction. 
 
 f The Sadar Dlwunl 'Adalat under the late Honourable Company was the Supreme 
 Civil Court, and the Court of tiual appeal, iu India, in each of the three rresiiLiiULS.
 
 222 APPENDIX C. 
 
 First it is necessary to file the 
 
 petition, subsequently to *t?F| 
 deposit the expense of the 
 translation. 
 
 Then the court demand security 
 
 What kind of security ? 
 
 Is it only for the personal ap- ^twt? WT^ffc, r| 
 
 pearance, or for the results 
 
 of the suit ? 
 
 A security for costs. <t?Ft? 
 
 I had brought an action for ^rTfir 
 
 possession of a property from 
 
 which I was dispossessed. 
 What order has been passed 
 
 on that ? 
 It having been established be- fe?tftlT 
 
 fore the Magistrate by local 
 
 investigation, that I held 
 
 the disputed property in 
 
 continuous possession, he 
 
 has kept me in. 
 Is the property sued for move- C3 f<ydiJ? 
 
 able or immovable ? 
 "Why, don't you know that 
 
 Act IV. applies solely to 
 
 real properly. 
 The other partv, dissatisfied 
 
 JL */ ^ 
 
 with the order, brought a 
 
 regular suit, which has been sr^^tTiri T5TTtT5f<r 
 
 referred to the Sadar Amln* 
 
 for trial.
 
 LITIGATION. 
 
 How far have the proceedings r*r aiE'*;ji<i gr C'Trrfensn 
 
 reached ? $?*1U5 ? 
 
 Only the lour pleadings have c^^T FTf? 
 
 Leen iilcd. "TfT^j 
 
 The ease lor the execution of (7PT? fs^ft 
 
 your decree has Leon struck ST^IT srrfVsF 
 
 off the tile. 
 The paternal estate, I think, r*ffaRF OI *f9 tsfcT &UCS? 
 
 will this time Lo dono for. 
 AVhy, what has happened ? 
 The Collector having measured 
 
 it under Regulation II. of ^ffr ^FrT<n ^-jr=Ti-^t5r) 
 
 1 810, has issued a notice. 
 AVliat harm is there in that ? 
 No one will take your property c~5tsrf? fji f<iytj 
 
 indirectly (without invest!- sf^T* ^ . 
 
 gation). 
 There will Le a trial, at which 
 
 your proofs will be exam- 
 
 ined, and if they prove it ^"re, Tlrrrs 7rrrf 
 
 rent free, it will Le released, ^T^'W fir <HiTpT f" 
 
 otherwise it will Le resumed. 
 Amongst the documents there 
 
 is only one deed of registry, 
 
 my house Leing Lurnt, the 
 
 grant and deed of release 
 
 were destroyed. 
 Then it will Lc difficult to win && rsi ^r^t^l <TT^in "T? 
 
 the case. CtT3" .
 
 224 
 
 APPENDIX C. 
 
 The Court will not hear such 
 excuse. 
 
 But it will not be altogether 
 lost to you, a settlement 
 will be made to you, and 
 you will receive 50 per cent. 
 as Mdli/cdnd or proprietary 
 right. 
 
 There is another remedy left, 
 
 Had you possession before the 
 Company's accession to the 
 Dewany or after it ? 
 
 I think we had possession from 
 a time previous to the De- 
 cennial settlement. 
 
 There has risen another dis- 
 pute as to this property 
 being Mdl* or LdJchardj. 
 
 The Zammdar has put in a 
 petition of objection. 
 
 It is now become very difficult 
 to keep landed property 
 for one day's delay in pay- 
 ing the revenue, the Zamm- 
 dari is put up to sale. 
 
 True, the rules for levying the 
 revenue from the Zammdar 
 are hard enough, but the 
 rules for realizing the rents 
 from the ryots are not less 
 
 C3t*rr? 
 
 *fsj?t*t 
 TWfl) 
 
 ^rf? 
 
 er >i<t<t-l<Tl 
 
 *r*r 
 
 ?fs( 
 
 ^Tef^rt? 
 
 r| 
 
 * Absolute property, or rent-free.
 
 ON HINDU MARIM.UJKS, KTC. 
 
 hurd, i.e., on the PutnMiir 
 or sub-tenant not paying ^srf^Ta xtc<i fair? 
 Ins rout, the sub-lease can 
 1)0 sold at auction under 
 Keg. VIII. 
 
 And should the ryots with- 
 liold the, payment of rents, 
 their movcablc property can 
 be sold under Ix(\u:. V. (of 
 1812), or under Hog. VII. 
 (IT 99), and should the value 
 of the personal property 
 thus sold fall short of meet- 
 ing the Zammdiir's demand, 
 the remainder canbc realized 
 by selling their real property ^TjTt?r r 
 under a regular suit. 
 
 DIALOGUE 17. 
 
 On TJinda Marriages, Manners, mil 
 
 Tell me how does marriage 
 
 take place in your country? 
 The father, and in his absence 
 
 the mother, and in their 
 
 absence the nearest friends 
 
 by law choose a bridegroom 
 
 and give the girl in mar- 
 riage. 
 
 At what age ? 
 In respectable families, a girl 
 
 is married within the age
 
 220 APPENDIX C. 
 
 of from five to eleven years ; 
 there is no limit, however, 
 for the age of the male. 
 But the custom is that the 
 bridegroom must be older 
 than the bride. 
 Can a per son of one caste marry 
 
 A / 
 
 a girl of another caste ? 
 
 Never. 
 
 And can a person give his 
 daughter in marriage to a 
 person of any family, though 
 of the same caste ? 
 
 He can, but he is lowered in 
 rank if he gives his daugh- 
 ter to a person below him- 
 self in rank. 
 
 Docs this rule prevail among 
 all the castes ? 
 
 No, only among BrdJimans 
 of the lid r hi and Bdrandra 
 classes. Among Kdyastha 
 and oilier castes, a Maulik 
 also can marry the daugh- 
 ter of a Kulln. But still to 
 marry a daughter into a 
 high class raises the rank. 
 
 It is for this reason, I believe, 
 that a Kulln has scA r eral 
 wives ? 
 
 It is not only for this reason. 
 A Kiilin family has its
 
 ON HINDU MARRIAGES, KTC. 
 
 Pdlti or collateral family : srrf<t , 
 
 thus a Kulin cannot marry frrfy 
 
 his daughter except to a yrr sq, JT* CTT 
 
 person of that family, and 
 
 a girl of this Pdlti family 
 
 cannot be married but to a 
 
 man of that family. 
 Therefore, if there be only ^ns-SR, irftf 
 
 one man in a family, but srft^ 3tTT? 
 
 many girls in his PdUi 
 
 family, then that man must 
 
 marry all those girls. 
 I have heard that a Kulin 
 
 makes fifty or sixty mar- 
 
 riages, is it true ? 
 
 Sir, what is fifty or sixty ? >iU^< nsPTf *tffc-Tft fe 
 
 Formerly 100 or more mar- "*T5 
 
 riages used to be made by wr c<rifd<-<i 
 
 a single man. 
 Docs the man keep all those 
 
 women in his own house ? 
 
 "V^Tien he dies, do all these 
 
 women become widows ? 
 Certainly. 
 And can they not marry again? 
 
 jS"evcr! And all their days 
 they must live a life of 
 austerity that is, avoiding 
 animal food, no more than (1SH 
 one meal a day, fast with-
 
 228 APPENDIX C. 
 
 out a drop of water every T3H ^f?nrs, 
 
 eleventh day of the moon ^gj 1 tfes 
 
 of either side, dress poorly, 
 
 etc. 
 If of the family of one Kulln *rfif C^rfr 
 
 there are many daughters, wi 
 
 and there is no man in his src? *rf% *Tt3f 
 
 Pa/fo' or collateral family ; *rfw ^ w! ^FCT ^irs mirr- 
 
 or if there be a man and he 
 
 is younger than the daugh- <Tf3' Tf^, ^? f% 
 
 ters referred to, or he is 
 
 very old, what happens 
 
 then? 
 In the first contingency, the 
 
 girls must remain for life 
 
 unmarried, in the second 
 
 and third cases, they can Of? 
 
 have no other man to marry f^t^ ^75 ^ft^? ri. 
 
 but that individual. 
 Those Kullns who marry in 
 
 the family of Bangshaja or 
 
 broken Kullns, do they at 
 
 once lose their Kullmliip? 
 Not at once, but their Kulln- 
 
 5/}? decreases from genera- 
 
 tion to generation, and the 
 
 seventh generation entirely 
 
 loscs it, and becomes Bany- 
 
 shaja. 
 With you folks, can cousins 
 
 intermarry- or any other 
 
 near relations ? Or can
 
 ON HINDU MARRIAGES, KTC. 
 
 
 harbla marriae. 
 
 
 there be marriage amongst 
 parties of the same lineage ? 
 
 U"3ft 
 
 No, Sir, it is done amongst =r| 
 your race, and other people, 
 but not amongst us Hindus. 
 
 We arrange our marriages 
 ourselves, and then ask our 
 parent's or guardian's per- 
 mission, if under age Is 
 it so with you ? 
 
 "VYc had a custom formerly 
 that a girl coidd choose a 
 man for herself, that is, 
 many worthy candidates 
 having been invited and 
 assembled together, the girl 
 came and selected her 
 bridegroom from amongst 
 them, and in proof of her 
 choice put a garland of 
 flowers on his neck. 
 
 And there was another kind 
 of marriage called Gdnd- 
 
 The man and woman in that 
 case being satisfied with
 
 230 APPENDIX C. 
 
 each other, have no religi- 
 
 ous service, but are married 
 
 by exchanging flower gar- 
 
 lands. 
 Now, the girl being very <wtl Wf? 
 
 early in life betrothed, these 
 
 marriages are out of use. 
 I have heard that the women 
 
 of respectable families do 
 
 not come out of their pri- 
 
 vate apartments In what 
 
 state do they remain there ? 
 They wear head- wrappers, xst^t^l (*TtsnM 
 
 they do not show their ^? (siK-w ^^ Of<tT? 
 
 faces to their superiors, nor 
 
 do they converse with them, 
 
 or speak in such a way (so ^fl ^<^ r| . 
 
 loud) that they should hear 
 
 them. 
 The husband's elder brother ^t*? ^t^^Jj, 
 
 b^> u^ ' 
 
 and younger brother's Avife ^tf^1 ^ <3$ t >ft% tt^ r| 
 
 must not be in the same 
 
 room, nor the husband's 
 
 maternal uncle and the wife 
 
 of a sister's son. 
 I suppose it is not your cus- 
 
 torn, as it is that of our 
 
 ladies, to shako hands and frnrl 
 
 dine, etc., with their male 
 
 fricnds. ^rtt:?? C^f ftfs 
 
 Oui- women never touch their 
 
 superiors, and hardly even
 
 OX IITNDf MAIiKIACF.S, HIT. 
 
 2-il 
 
 rtir 
 
 f*ftT =1 
 
 any one else, and so far 
 from eating w/M wicw, they 
 do not eat in the presence 
 of a man. 
 
 Why don't your women learn 
 
 writing and reading ? 
 Because it is not the present 
 
 custom. 
 In former times many daugli- 
 
 tors of munis, princes, and 
 
 many other women used to 
 
 acquire learning. 
 Do high Ilindus dine together - 
 
 as we do ? 
 They sit together, but not on 
 
 chairs, nor do they eat at 
 
 tables. They sit sepa- 
 
 rately on the ground, no 
 
 one must touch his neigh- 
 
 bour, nor any one else 
 
 touch them, and they never 
 
 rise while eating, because^, 
 
 if they are touched or stand 
 
 up, they can no longer pro- 
 
 ceed with their meal. 
 They do not take two meals 
 
 between sun rise and sun 
 
 set. 
 What, can no one at all touch f%, 
 
 them while eating ? 
 There is no harm in the father, ff3l, srfn, 
 
 mother, and y/v/ touching 
 
 sfTrr ""pp 
 
 "5TWTF? 
 
 sr|. 
 
 t^t?n 
 
 
 sr| 
 
 r|, 
 
 T1TT?1 cftm 
 
 r| 
 
 r|.
 
 232 APPENDIX C. 
 
 them, or a Brahman touch- 
 ing a Shudra, because, 
 that person may take of the 
 same dish after them. 
 
 The Hindus do not eat any 
 thing with their shoes on. 
 
 If boiled-rice or curry, etc, 
 fall on their clothes, they 
 must change the clothes, 
 and wash with water. 
 
 Persons dining together must 
 commence and get up all at 
 once, i.e. no one begins to 
 eat and gets up before the 
 others, but must wait for 
 the others, though he may 
 be very hungry; and though 
 he may have done first of all. 
 
 Is there any rule as to the 
 taking the eatables one after 
 the other ? 
 
 Certainly there is The things 
 somewhat bitter in taste 
 arc taken first, then the 
 pungent, then the acid, and 
 then at last the sweet : and 
 after washing the hands and 
 mouth, betels are chewed, 
 and tobacco smoked by 
 most.
 
 Consona n t ,s 
 
 Mr.i .t ///, 
 
 f 
 
 Ife- 
 
 
 .-. 
 
 C C T[,v^ ^ <r- I 
 
 II
 
 n'/i 
 
 , 
 
 khr 
 
 w 
 
 si 
 
 
 X'.r 
 
 /
 
 5 
 
 /</ 
 
 "3 
 
 tf 
 
 '5J 
 
 U/Jl 
 
 nkfi 
 
 /'/' 
 
 nr fi 
 
 riJi 
 
 fun fiv fir flL fin- //.,-
 
 IT 
 
 // 
 
 shrJth. .<Hsn 
 
 n 
 
 .thfih 
 
 shy 
 
 sth 
 
 V/ .OV 
 


 
 A NH\V AND RFATSLI) LIST 
 
 TEXT BOOKS AND MAM'ALS 
 
 FOR STCDKNTS IN 
 
 /^DTPMTAT T \A T / r> T T \/ r> T"( > 
 
 OKIbNlAL LANGUAGES 
 
 Manv of which arc used as 7V. T/ fiooks for tJie 
 Examinations for 
 
 THE INDIAN CIVIL SERVICE AND 
 THE INDIAN STAFF CORPS 
 
 Also as Class Books in 
 COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS IN INDIA 
 
 LONDON 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOU & SON 
 
 7, STATIONERS' HALL COURT, LUUGATK HILL, E.C. 
 
 A XL) 
 
 121 A, VICTORIA STREET, WESTMINSTER, SAY.
 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON'S 
 Catalogue of Books in the Eastern Languages, &c. 
 
 ARABIC. 
 
 BIRDWOOD, ALAN R. 
 
 AN ARABIC READING P.OOK, in the Arabic Character, with transliteration. 
 Fcap. Svo. 5$. 
 
 FORBES, DUNCAN, LL.D. 
 
 ARABIC GRAMMAR, intended more especially for the use of young men 
 preparing for the India Civil Service, and also for the use of self- 
 instructing students in general. Royal 8vo, cloth. i8s. 
 
 ARABIC READING LESSONS, in the Arabic Character, consisting of easy 
 K \tracts from the best Authors, with Vocabulary. Royal 8vo, 
 cloth. 155. 
 
 PALMER, PROF. E. H., M.A., &c. 
 
 ARABIC GRAMMAR. On the principles of the best Native Grammarians. 
 Demy Svo. iSs. 
 
 Tin; ARABIC MANUAL. Comprising a condensed Grammar of both 
 Classical and Modern Arabic ; Reading Lessons and Exercises, with 
 Analyses and a Vocabulary of useful Words. Fcap. Svo. js. 6d. 
 
 ROBERTSON, F. E. 
 
 AN ARABIC VOCABULARY FOR EGYPT. The Arabic by Lufti Yusset 
 Ayriit. In the Roman Character. Fcap. Svo. 3s. (15 piastres). 
 
 STEING-ASS, DR. F. 
 
 STUDENT'S ARABIC-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. Demy Svo. 50*. 
 ENGLISH-ARABIC DICTIONARY, in Arabic Character and transliterated. 
 
 Demy Svo. 28s. 
 THE ASSEMBLIES OF HARIRI. The Text (in the Arabic Character) 
 
 with English Notes, Grammatical, Critical and Historical. Demy Svo. 
 
 21:;. net. 
 
 TIEN, REV. ANTON, Ph.D., M.R.A.S. 
 
 MANUAL OF COLLOQUIAL ARABIC. Comprising Practical Rules fin- 
 learning the Language, Vocabulary, Dialogues, Letters and Idioms, &c., 
 in English and Arabic, the latter in Arabic and Roman characters. 
 Fcap. Svo. js. fid. 
 
 BENGALI. 
 
 FORBES, DUNCAN, LL.D. 
 
 BENGAL; GRAMMAR, with Phrase-; and Diai.igues, in the Bengali 
 
 Character. Royal Svo. I2s. 6<1. 
 BENGALI READER, in the Bengali Character, svith a Translation and 
 
 Vocabulary. Royal Svo. I2s. Gd. 
 
 HAUGHTON, G. C. 
 
 BENGALI, SANSCRIT, AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY, adapted for Students 
 in either language ; to which is added an Index, serving as a Reverse 
 Dictionary, 410. 305.
 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON 
 
 NABO NARI. Anecdotes of the Nine Famous Women of India. 
 
 [Text-hook for Examinations in Bengali.] In ihc Bengali Character. 
 
 I2ino. 7s. 
 NICHOLL, PROF. Or. F. 
 
 BENGALI MANUAL. Fcap. Svo. ys. 6d. 
 TOTA ITIHAS : The Talcs of a Parrot. Demy Svo. 5>. 
 
 BURMESE. 
 
 DAVIDSON, LIEUT. P. A. L. 
 
 ANGLICISED COI.LOOUIAI. BURMESE; or, How to Speak 'he Languagc 
 in Three Months. Fcap. Svo. 43. 6d. 
 
 CHINESE. 
 
 BULLOCK, T. L., Professor of Chinese in the University of Oxfoid, 
 PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN 'IHE CHINESE WKHILN LAM, ''AGE. 
 
 Royal Svo, cloth. IDS. 6d. net. 
 DOUGLAS, SIR ROBERT K. , Professor of Chinese at Kin-', College, 
 
 London, iVc. 
 
 A CHINESE MANU \L, comprising Grammar, with Idiomatic Phra-es and 
 Dialogues. New Edition. Fcap. Svo. IDS. 6d. 
 
 HINDUSTANI, HINDI. &c. 
 
 Dr. Foiicj's IVorks arc use J as Cl.iss Books in the Colleges and SL/ICJ'S in 
 
 ABDOOLAH, SYED. 
 
 SINGIIASAN BATTISI. Translated into Hindi from the San.-cri:. In 
 the Xagari Character. A New Edition. Revised, Corrected, r.inl 
 Accompanied with Copious Notes. Royal Svo. 12.-. 6d. 
 
 AKHLAKI HINDI, translated into Urdu, with an Introduction and Note.-. 
 
 In the Persian Character. Royal Svo. 1 2s. 6d. 
 CHAPMAN, MAJOR F. R. H. 
 
 ENGLISH-HlNDL'STANI POCKET VOCABULARY: Containing 2.2<> 
 
 words in classified lists. (Urdu in Roman Character.) 
 Edition, Revised and Enlarged. 32mo. cloth. 2s. net. 
 
 llo\v TO LEARN HINDUSTANI. A Manual for all Student- 
 Guide to the Lower and Higher Standard Kxai 
 Svo, cloth. Jitjf Published. 7s. 6d. net. 
 EASTWICK, EDWARD B. 
 
 THE BAGH-O-BAHAR literally translated 
 explanatory notes. Demy Svo. IDS. 6d. 
 FORBES, DUNCAN, LL.D. 
 
 HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, in tl.e Per.s ; an Cliaracter, \viili tl <. 
 Hindi words in Nagari also ; and an English-Hindustani Dictionary in 
 the Roman Character ; both in one volume. Royal Svo. 42 >. 
 
 HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-HINDUSTANI DicnoNAuv, in 
 the Roman Character. Royal Svo. 365. 
 
 SMALLER DICTIONARY, Hindustani and English, in the Roman Cha- 
 racter. I2S. 
 
 HINDUSTANI GRAMMAR, with Specimens of Writing in the Persian and 
 Nagari Characters, Reading Lessons, and Vocabulary. Demy bw. 
 IDs. 6d.
 
 . 
 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON 
 
 HINDUSTANI MANUAL, containing a Compendious Grammar, Exercises 
 
 for Translation, Dialogues, and Vocabulary, in the Roman Character . 
 
 New Edition, entirely revised. By J. T. Platts. i8mo. 35. 6d. 
 BAGH-O-BAHAR, in the Persian Character, with a complete Vocabulary, 
 
 in Persian and Roman Characters. Royal 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 BAGH-O-BAHAR, in English, with Explanatory Notes, illustrative of 
 
 Eastern Character. Demy 8vo. 8s. 
 
 BAGH-O-BAHAR, with Vocabulary. Roman Character. Crown Svo. 55. 
 TOTA KAHANI ; or, " Tales of a Parrot,'' in the Persian Character, with a 
 
 complete Vocabulary. Royal Svo. 8s. 
 BAITAL PACHISI ; or, " Twenty-five Tales of a Demon," in the Nagari 
 
 Character, with a complete Vocabulary in the Nagari and Roman 
 
 Characters. Royal Svo. 95. 
 IKHWANU-S-SAFA ; or, " Brothers of Purity," in the Persian Character. 
 
 Royal Svo. las. 6d. 
 
 HOLROYD, COL. W. R. M., ormerly Director of Public Instruction, 
 
 Punjab. 
 HINDUSTANI FOR EVERY DAY. Royal Svo. 324 pages. 8s. net. 
 
 KEMPSON, M., Director of Public Instruction in N.W. Provinces, 
 1862-78. 
 
 THE REPENTANCE OF NUSSOOH. Translated into English from the 
 original Hindustani. Crown Svo. 35. 6d. 
 
 FIRST FIVE CHAPTERS OF THE TAUBATU-N-NUSUH, in the Persian 
 Character, with Marginal Analysis, additional Annotations, and Index 
 Vocabulary. Royal Svo. 75. 6d. 
 
 THE SYNTAX AND IDIOMS OF HINDUSTANI. A Manual of the Language; 
 consisting of Progressive Exercises in Grammar, Reading, and Trans- 
 lation, with Notes, Directions, and Vocabularies. Second Edition, 
 Revised and Enlarged. Crown Svo, cloth. 6s. net. 
 
 KEY TO THE TRANSLATION EXERCISES OF SYNTAX AND IDIOMS OF 
 HINDUSTANI, in the Roman Character. Crown Svo. 35. 6d. 
 
 MULVIHILL, P. 
 
 A VOCABULARY FOR THE LOWER STANDARD IN HINDUSTANI, in the 
 Roman Character. Containing the meanings of every word and 
 idiomatic expression in " Jarrett's Hindu Period," and in " Selections 
 from the Bagh-o-Bahar." Fcap. 35. 6d. 
 
 PINCOTT, FREDERIC, M.R.A.S. 
 
 SAKUNTALA IN HINDI, in the Nagari Character. Translated from the 
 Bengali recension of the Sanskrit. Critically edited, with grammatical, 
 idiomatical, and exegetical notes. 410. I2s. 6cl. 
 
 HINDI MANUAL. Comprising a grammar of the Hindi Language both 
 Literary and Provincial ; a complete Syntax ; Exercises in various styles 
 of Hindi composition ; Dialogues on several subjects ; and a complete 
 Vocabulary, in the Nagari and Roman Characters. Third edition, 
 thoroughly revised. Fcap. Svo. 6s. 
 
 PLATTS, J. T., Persian Teacher at the University of Oxford. 
 
 HINDUSTANI DICTIONARY. Dictionary of Urdu and Classical Hindi 
 and English, in the Persian, Nagari, and Roman Characters. Super 
 Royal Svo. .3 33.
 
 CROSRV LOCK WOOD & SON 
 
 GRAMMAR 01- IIIE URDU OK HINDI-SI ANI LANC,UA<;K. Hindustani 
 
 words in the Persian < 'h.iracter. Demy Svo. I2s. 
 PAITAI. PACHIM, transited into English. Demy Svo. Ss. 
 IKIIWANC-S-SAI-A, translated into English. Demy 8vo. 10-. 6d. 
 ROGERS, E. H. 
 
 How TO si'EAK HINDUSTANI ; in the Roman Character. Roy. 12m ,. I-. 
 SMALL, REV. G. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF NAVAI. TERMS, English and Hindu-tarn. For the use 
 of Nautical Men trading to India, &c. In the Roman Character. 
 Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. 
 TOLBORT, F. W. H. 
 
 AI.IK LAII.A RA-ZAHAN-i-URDf. (The Arabian Nights in Hindu -:ani.) 
 In tlie Roman Character. Crown Svo. 10=;. 6<\. 
 
 JAPANESE. 
 
 CHAMBERLAIN, BASIL H., Kmeiitus Professor of Japanese and 
 
 Philology in the Imperial University of Tokyo. 
 A HANDBOOK OF COLLOQUIAL JAPANESE, in the Roman Character. 
 
 Third Edition, entirely revised Crown Svo. 15*. 
 PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO THK STUDY <>K JATANKM; \\'KIIIM;. 
 It teaches the writing of the " Kana " nn< 
 characters, and is a Reader at the >ame turn 
 Folio, ^is. 6d. net. 
 MacCAULEY CLAY, A.M. (President of the Sch< 
 
 Learning, Tokyo). 
 AN INTRODUCTORY COURSE IN JAPANESE. Crown Svo. ios. 6d. 
 
 KOREAN. 
 
 GALE, J. S. 
 
 KOKEAN-KNCII.ISH DICTIONARY. Super Royal Svo, cloth. 3os. net. 
 
 MALAY. 
 
 BIKKERS, DR. A. J. W. 
 
 MALAY, ACHINESE, FKKNCH, AND MNC.LISII VOCARUI.ARY. Alpha- 
 bet ically arranged under each of the four languages. With, concise 
 Malay Grammar. Post Svo. 75. 6d. 
 
 MARSDEN'S MALAY GRAMMAR. 4 to. i is. 
 WILKINSON, R. J. 
 
 A MALAY-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. In three parts. Royal 4(0, about 
 75 P a S es> 5 OS - ne *i or t)ound in one volume, half-leather, 6js. net. 
 The third part will be supplied at /s. 6d. to those who have already 
 purchased j^arts I and 2. 
 
 PERSIAN. 
 
 CLARKE, LIEUT. -COLONEL H. WILBERFORCE, ;hitei R.E. 
 
 THK PERSIAN MANUAL. A Pocket Companion. 
 
 A Concise Grammar of the Language, with ExercUes, a Selection 
 of Useful Phrases, Dialogues, and Subjects for Translation into 
 Persian, and a Vocabulary of Useful Words, Engli>h and Persian, 
 iS:c. iSmo. "js. 6d.
 
 CROSBY LOCKWOOD & SON 
 
 the Per.-ian Character. 
 
 the Text 
 Svu. 
 
 the Persian 
 
 FORBES, DUNCAN, LL.D. 
 
 PERSIAN GRAMMAR, READING LESSONS IN THE PERSIAN CHARACTKK, 
 
 AND VOCABULARY. Royal 8vo. 125. 6d. 
 IBRAHEEM, MIRZA. 
 PERSIAN GRAMMAR, DIALOGUES, &c., i 
 
 Royal 8vo. I2s. 6d. 
 
 KEENE, REV. H. G. 
 
 FIRST BOOK OF THE ANVVARI SOHEII.I 
 
 Character. Demy 8vo. 55. 
 AKHLAKI MUHSINI. Translated into English. 
 
 ORIENTAL PENMANSHIP : comprising specimens of Persian Hand- 
 writing, illustrated with Facsimiles from Originals in the South 
 Kensington Museum, to which are added Illustrations of the Xagari 
 Character. By the late Prof. Palmer and F. Pincott. 410. I2s 6d. 
 
 OUSELEY, LIEUT. -COL. 
 
 AKHLAKI MUHSINI ; the Text in the Persian Character. Demy Svo. 5>. 
 
 PLATTS, J. T., Persian Teacher at the University of Oxford. 
 
 GUI.ISTAN ; in the Persian Character. Carefully collated with the 
 
 original MS., with a full Vocabulary. Royal Svo. I2s. 6d. 
 GULISTAN. Translated from a Revised Text, with copious Notes. 
 Royal Svo. 123. 6d. 
 
 PLATTS, J. T. (Persian Teacher at the University of Oxford), and 
 
 ROGERS, A. date Bombay Civil Service). 
 
 THE BUSTAN OF SA'ADI. Photographed from a Persian MS., Collated 
 and Annotated. Impl. Svo. l8s. 
 
 ROGERS, A. (late Bombay Civil Service). 
 
 PERSIAN PLAVS, in the Persian Character ; with Literal English 
 Translation and Vocabulary. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 STEINGASS, F., Ph.D. 
 
 A COMPREHENSIVE PERSIAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY; including the 
 Arabic Words and Phrases to be met with in Persian Literature, 
 being JOHNSON and RICHARDSON'S PERSIAN, ARABIC, and ENGLISH 
 DICTIONARY, revised, enlarged, and entirely reconstructed. Impl. 
 Svo. 1600 pages. ^3 35. net. 
 
 TOLBORT, T. W. H., Bengal Civil Service. 
 
 A TRANSLATION OF ROBINSON CRUSOE INTO THE PERSIAN LANGUAGE. 
 Roman Character. Crown Svo. "s. 
 
 PUSHTO. 
 
 RAVERTT, MAJOR H. G., Author of the Pus'hto Grammar and 
 
 Dictionary. 
 
 THE PUS'HTO MANUAL. Comprising a Concise Grammar ; Exercise and 
 
 Dialogues ; Familiar Phrases, Proverbs, and Vocabulary. Fcap.Svo. 55. 
 
 ROOS-KEPPEL, MAJOR G. (President of Central Committee of 
 
 Examiners in Pushtu Language;. 
 
 A MANUAL OF PUSHIU. Demy Svo, cloth. (Second Impression.) 
 I2s. 6d. net.
 
 CROSBY LOCK WOOD & SON 7 
 
 SANSCRIT. 
 
 GOUQH, A. E. 
 KRY TO THE KXERCISES IN WILLIAMS' SANSCRIT MAM'AI. iSmo. 4-. 
 
 HAUOHTON, O. C. 
 
 SAN.ICRIT AND BENGALI DUTIONAKY, in the Mental! Character, with 
 Index, serving as a reversed Dictionary. 4'. jos. 
 
 JOHNSON, PROF. F. 
 
 Hi 1OHAUESA ; the Text in Sanscrit, with Grammatical Analy<-. and 
 Vocabulary in Nagari ancl Roman Character--. 410. 15,. 
 
 PINCOTT, FREDERIC, M.R.A.S., &c. 
 
 I li lOl'ADKSA. A new literal Translation from the San'-kiit Tc\i of 
 Pro!. I-'. Johnson. For the use of Students. 6-;. 
 
 WILLIAMS, MONIER. 
 
 SANSCRIT MANL'AI., in the Roman (Character; with a Vocabulary 
 F.n_;lish and Sanscrit, in the Nagari Character, by A. I-], (iuu^h. 
 iSmo. ;s. 6d. 
 
 TURKISH. 
 
 TIEN, REV. ANTON, Ph.D., M.R.A.S. 
 
 A TURKISH GRAMMAR, containing also Dialogues and Tenn-> con- 
 nected with the Army, Navy, Military Drill, Diplomatic and S icial 
 Life. Svo. 420 payes. IO.>. 
 
 ORIENTAL MANUALS. 
 
 BIKKERS, DR. A. J. W. 
 
 MALAY, ACHINESE, FRK.\CII,ANI) I'.NC.I.ISH VOCAHITARV, ^c. With 
 concise Malay Grammar. Fcap. 7>. 6d. 
 
 BIRDWOOD, ALAN R. 
 
 Ax ARABIC READING DOOK. Fcap. iivo. 5s. 
 
 CHAMBERLAIN, B. H. 
 
 A HANDBOOK OK Coi.i.oijriAi. [AHANESK. Third F.ditiun, entirely 
 revised. Crown Svo. I5s. 
 
 CLARKE, LIEUT.-COL. H. W., (late) R.E. 
 
 THE PEKSIAN MANUAL. Containing a Concise Cjrammar, with Kxer- 
 cise.s, L'selul Phra>es, Dialogues, and Subjects fur Translation into 
 Persian ; also a Vocabulary ol Useful \\'ord>, lui^'lish and Pcr>:an. 
 Roman Character. iSmo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 DAVIDSON, LIEUT. F. A. L. 
 
 ANGLICISED COLLOQUIAL BURMESE ; or, How to Speak the Language 
 in Three Months. Fcap. Svu. 4s. 6d. 
 
 DOUGLAS, SIR ROBEKT K., Professor uf Chinese at King's College, 
 
 London, >kc. 
 
 A CHINESE MANUAL, compiling Grammar, with Idiomatic Phrases 
 and Dialogues. Fcap. Svo. IDS. 6d. (.\Vw Liliti.'it.)
 
 CROSBY T.OCKWOOD & SON 
 
 FORBES'S HINDUSTANI MANUAL. Containing a Compendious 
 Grammar, Exercises for Translation, Dialogues, and Vocabulary, in 
 the Roman Character. New Edition, entirely revised. By J. T. 
 Plaits. iSmo. 33. 6d. 
 GOUGH, A. E. 
 
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN WILLIAMS'S SANSCRIT MANUAL. i8mo. 45. 
 MACKENZIE, CAPTAIN C. F. 
 
 A TURKISH MANUAL. Comprising a Condensed Grammar, with Idio- 
 matic Phrases, Exercises and Dialogues, and Vocabulary. Roman 
 Character. Fcap. Svo. 6s. 
 NICHOLL, PROF. G. F. 
 
 BENGALI MANUAL; with Grammar, and course of Exercises, illustrating 
 every variety of Idiomatic Construction, Specimens of current Hand- 
 writing, &c. , and a short Asamese Grammar. Fcap. Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 PALMER, PROF. E. H., M.A. 
 
 THE ARABIC MANUAL. Comprising a Condensed Grammar of both 
 Classical and Modern Arabic; Reading Lessons and Exercises, with 
 Analyses and a Vocabulary of Useful Words. Fcap. Svo, 73. 6d. 
 PINCOTT, FREDERIC, M.R.A.S. 
 
 THE HINDI MANUAL. Comprising a Grammar of the Hindi Language 
 both Literary and Provincial ; a Complete Syntax ; Exercises in 
 various styles of Hindi Composition ; Dialogues on several subjects ; 
 and a Complete Vocabulary. Fcap. Svo. 6s. 
 PORTMAN, M. V., M.R.A.S. 
 A MANUAL OF THE ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES, in the Roman 
 
 Character. iSmo. 10s. 6d. 
 RAVERTY, MAJOR H. G. 
 
 THE PUS'HTO MANUAL. Comprising a Concise Grammar ; Exercises 
 and Dialogues ; Phrases, Proverbs, and Vocabulary. Fcap. Svo. 5 s - 
 ROBERTSON, F. E. 
 
 AN ARABIC VOCABULARY FOR EGYPT, in the Roman Character. 
 
 The Arabic by Lufti Yussef Ayrut. Fcap. Svo. 35. (15 piastres). 
 ROOS-KEPPEL, MAJOR G. (President of Central Committee of 
 
 Examiners in Pushtu Language). 
 A MANUAL OF PUSHTU. Demy Svo, cloth. (Second Impression.) 
 
 I2s. 6d. net. 
 SCHNTJRMANN, J. NESTOR. 
 
 THE RUSSIAN MANUAL. Comprising a Condensed Grammar, Exercises 
 with Analyses, Useful Dialogues, Reading Lessons, Tables of Coins, 
 Weights and Measures, and a Collection of Idioms and Proverbs 
 alphabetically arranged. Fcap. Svo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 AID TO RUSSIAN COMPOSITION. Containing Exercises, Vocabularies, 
 Syntactical Rules, and Specimens of Manuscript. Fcap. Svo. 73. 6d. 
 TIEN, REV. ANTON, Ph.D., M.R.A.S. 
 
 MANUAL OF COLLOQUIAL ARABIC. Comprising Practical Rules for 
 Lw-aimng the Language, Vocabulary, Dialogues, Letters and Idioms, 
 &c., in English and Arabic. Fcap. 7s. 6d. 
 
 NED-HELLENIC MANUAL. Comprising Practical Rules for Learning 
 the Language, Vocabulary, Dialogues, Letters, Idioms, &c. Fcap. 55. 
 WILLIAMS, MONIER. 
 
 SANSCRIT MANUAL. To \\hich is added a Vocabulary by A. E. Gough. 
 iSmo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, DUKE ST., .STAMFORD ST., S.K.